Home

8648A/B/C/D Signal Generator Operation and Service Guide

1. SHEET T OF 2 HET BAND LO A4 REFERENCE TOO MH SEAR PANEL A3J10 3 2 dBm TYPICAL A6 OUTPUT RE R PANEL A3J11 19
2. A4 REFERENCE A3J10 3 HET BAND LO li REAR A3J11 19 TS 1000 MHz A6 OUTPUT 2 dBm TYPICAL MIXER 19 ice gt eis A5 SIG GEN SYNTH LO a3u11 17 pA lt CLOCK 10 MHz 4 lt 1 0 498 1002 MHz 14 3 iz See 2s m ERN 2 BAND 100 kHz 1000 MHz 501 1000 MHz TYPICALLY 2 4 dB MAIN BAND ABOVE FRONT PANEL 13dBm 412V 0 TO 3 dBm POWER SETTINGS REF OUT OF TYPICAL LEVEL gt 5dB TYPICAL des 3060 PRESENT LOCK E A7 FRONT A3J7 50 Z ATTENUATOR PANEL C REF FTN RN RF OUT RF IN 00 MHz 1300 300 Be BE 130 dB 4 S t5M F 1 CAL f gt E 90 lt gt Pl P 93 gt ATIN T 3S civ ROM l l BEP aS 3 3419 3 PHASE NF A3J12 3 A3J14 17 249 501 MHz A3J15 13 A3J17 Y OUT OF 9 2 gt 8 LLOER DC 25 m um ASUNG 100 KHz 1 GHz DATA 4 pus aa 1 0 S4 FOR y ES 10
3. Function If NUMBERED is selected the next parameter to be selected is NUMBER as follows N FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE NUMBERED NUMBER 63 O encode21 drw NUMBER 5 for setting the initial number of the numbered numeric message that will transmitted The allowable range is 0 to 63 If HEX BIN is selected the next setting to be selected is BLOCKING LENGTH FREQUENCY MODULATION AVPUTUDC M M BLOCKING LENGTH 1BIT Ea O BLOCKING LENGTH indicates the bits per character as follows 1BIT 1 bit per character 7BITS 7 bits per character 8BITS 8 bits per character 14BITS 14 bits per character 16BITS 16 bits per character Enter the message in the hexadecimal format tothe MESSAGE NO 6 in the message menu NOTE When 7 or 14BITS are selected the total number of hexadecimal characters of the message must be a multiple of 7 characters 28 bits Setting the Message The message menu looks like the following REN l e
4. Bl FREQUENCY ENG MODULATION NEN AMPLITUDE MESSAGE NO 0 AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm FRAME 000 encode29 drw NOTE If the RF output is turned off AMPLITUDE x xdBm Will be substituted for RF OFF While encoding the blinking cursor is on the first character A of AMPLITUDE Or R Of RF OFF Signaling Examples The following examples illustrate the frame structure for the three transmission repetition settings The HEADER and TERMINATOR parameters are set to oN default andthe COLLAPSE CYCLE CC is set to 1 and 2 messages will be repeated every 2 frames 21 and 4 frames 22 respectively SINGLE Mode Example Start Cyde 10 Start Frame 127 Collapse Cyde Has no effect Since HEADER is set to oN the idle signal is output at Frame 126 With TERMINATOR set to ON the asynchronous state signal is output after the message 10 10 11 Frame 126 127 0 CC 1 idle message asynchronous CC 2 idle message asynchronous BURST Mode Example Start Cycle 10 Start Frame 127 Collapse Cyde 1 27 and 2 22 Burst 3 Since HEADER is set to on the idle signal is output at Frame 126 1b 18 Operation Reference Function With TERMIN
5. room j ER FREQUENCY MODULATION TUDE 7 m FORMAT FLEX 7 dr Oo Sal POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON ole o Encodel drw Selecting the Data Rate and Pager Type Settings 3 Set DATA RATE to 3200 2 and PAGER TYPE to NUMERIC using the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob and the U NEXT key You may choose to set the data rate to one of the other settings you FLEX pager should automatically adjust FREQUENCY MODULATION D DATARATE 3200 2 PAGER TYPE NUMERIC Press the NEXT key to move to the next page 4 Set VECTOR TYPE to STANDARD using the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob Encode2 drv FREQUENCY MODULATION d VECTOR TYPE STANDARD Encode3 drw Press the NEXT key to move to the next page 1a 25 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pag
6. 2 OF 2 Option 1E6 A13 Pulse Module 9 W10 From A10 lt gt L 11 Note W12 is part of A13 Pulse Module 1 7 12 CLOCK DATA Connects to A3J28 gt 2 ENABLE WITHOUT OPTION 1E2 gt 3 REAR PANEL Connects to 14 T 6 PULSE WITH OPTION 1E2 Lo 15V lt w11 See Sheet l gt 5 1 of 2 9 15V 38V 9 kHz 4 0 GHz Typically 1 to 4 0 dB above Front Panel Settings A12 RPP A l gt 1 Reset A10 Frequency Extension gt 2 Interrupt 8648B 2000 M z Connects to A3J26 gt 3 4 12V See Sheet 5 5V 8648C 3200 MHz ear Ed 2000 2520 MHz gt 4 12V 8648D 4000 MHz 1000 1260 MHz Band Poss Band Pass Filter Filter gt 2000 MHz 2520 3200 MHz ASIN gt 1000 MHz i 1260 1600 MHz x2 Bond Poss L o A11 Attenuator e 2 o Band Pass o Iw Filter gt 1000 MHz W m ws m W3 Front Panel gt gt o Filter MOD o tep Attenuator everse lt 2000 MHz 3200 4000 MHz 2 228 gt O to 130 dB lt Power lt Pears 1009 MHz 1600 2000 MHz Bond Pass See 10 dB Steps Protection Bond Poss Filter PreLevel lt 2 Filter A Detector A3J25 1000 to 2000 MH Ld o lt 2000 MHz lt 1000 MHz 10dB THRU Out Level i 25909 Vd KOOD Mie Detector S 2 1098 ATTEN 2098 THRU Poe CLOCK 5 2048 ATTEN 9 kHz 4 0 GHz DATA 40dB THRU c TERN 1 0 FROM AS gt 13
7. Press the NEXT key to move to the next page 1a 27 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only 9 ADDRESS TYPE and ADDRESS1 areset automatically when the capcode is entered in the previous menu If A0012477 was entered SHORT and 0045245 would be displayed respectively Generally you would not change these settings I ERI co T wos S FREQUENCY MEN MODULATION AMPLITUDE C Jal J ADDRESS TYPE SHORT LI IB E ADDRESS1 0045245 SE ooo je OVyoooooo encode41 cdr Press the NEXT key to move to the next page Selecting the Protocol Settings 10 FRAME PHASE and COLLAPSE CYCLE are also set automatically when you enter the pager s capcode If you entered A0012477 previously 011 D and 4 would be displayed NOTE If MODE is set to BURST or CONT instead of SINGLE you may choose to change the collapse cycle to 1 to 7 With a collapse cycle of 4 the pager will receive the message once every 16 frames 2 1f the collapseis 0 or 1 the pager will receive the message either every frame 29 or every other frame 21
8. UE lie FREQUENCY MODULATION E CJ C C MODE BURST AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm Bm BURSTS 003 I co Q 1 Gabe 1b 24 Operation Reference Function MODE determines whether the message will be output once or multiple times when INCR SET START STOP is pressed SINGLE Outputs the message once BURST Outputs the message the number of times specified in the BURSTS field 3 times in this example CONT Outputs the message continuously until the INCR SET START STOP key is p AMPLITUDE sets th ressed a second time e signal output level of the carrier BURSTS sets the number of times the message will be transmitted This parameter is displayed only when the MODI E parameter is set to BURST The allowable 5 1 to 255 RF OFF is displayed below the amplitude setting when the RF output is turned off To toggle the RF signal output on and off press RF ON OFF HOLD is displayed when the step attenuator is held at its current range setting To toggle the attenuator hold function on and off press ATTN HOLD Entering the Pager Capcode Address The pager code menu looks like the following EM FREQUENC
9. FREQUENCY MODULATION RN AMPLITUDE INNEN 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 01 regseq6 drw FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE MR 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 02 regseq drw 1a 9 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers Checking the Sequence 8 Recall the registers in sequence 0 Theft and keys recall registers or sequences depending on which key was pressed last REG or SEQ por if f r r 7 FREQUENCY a MODULATION Calf yojoooo gt d o 10 00000 MHz 1100 500005105 SEQ 0 REG 00 CI X OOO m 11 00000 MHz i O JJ SEQ 0 REG 01 12 00000 MHz RES SEQ 0 REG 02 10 00000 MHz regseq8 drw SEQ 0 REG 00 Checking a Different Sequence 9 Select sequence 1 P FREQUENCY aum MODULATION AMPLITUDE MEER GOTO TJE SEQ 1 4 req9 drw 10 Step through the registers in sequence 1 if there are registers saved in it TN O 0 18 al
10. Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz Rad Lower Measured Upper 0 250 5 0 1 0 26 100 5 0 1 0 26 400 5 0 1 0 26 500 5 0 1 0 26 750 5 0 1 0 26 1000 5 0 1 0 26 Table 8 12 Residual FM Performance Test Limits Hz RF Frequency LO Frequency Input Frequency Uncertainty 8648A 8663A 8902A Upper Measured Hz MHz MHz MHz 10 11 5 700 7 0 45 100 101 5 700 7 0 45 248 249 5 700 7 0 45 251 252 5 700 4 0 35 400 401 5 700 4 0 35 501 502 5 700 7 0 45 750 751 5 700 7 0 45 1000 1001 5 700 7 0 45 8 62 Table 8 13 Harmonics Performance Test 8648A 8566B Limits dBc Frequency Harmonic Uncertainty MHz Frequency Upper Measured dB MHz 1 2 30 0 1 2 2 4 30 0 1 2 5 10 30 0 12 10 20 30 0 12 20 40 30 0 1 2 100 200 30 0 1 2 100 300 30 0 1 2 300 150 30 0 1 2 500 1000 30 0 1 2 500 1500 30 0 1 2 600 1200 30 0 1 2 600 1800 30 0 1 2 700 1400 30 0 1 2 700 2100 30 0 1 2 800 1600 30 0 1 2 800 2400 30 0 1 2 900 1800 30 0 1 2 1000 2000 30 0 1 2 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record 8 63 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 14 Spurious Performance Test 8648A Limits dBc Amplitude Frequency Spur Uncertainty dBm MHz MHz Upper Measured dB 4 242 274
11. Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 400 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 49 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 114 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 512 5 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29
12. Field PhaseA Phase B C Phase D Word O of BI Block Info Dummy Block Info Dummy Block Info block 0 Word 1 of BI BIWOO0 Idle Idle block 0 Word 2 of BI BIW111 Idle Idle block 0 Word 3 of BI Idle Idle BIW101 block Word 4 of AF Network Address Idle Idle block Word 5 of AF Address 1 Dummy Address 1 Dummy Address 1 block Word 6 of AF Address 2 Dummy Address 2 Dummy Address 2 block Word 7 of VF Short M essage Vector Idle Idle block for Network Address Word 0 of VF Vector for Address 1 2 Numeric Vector for Numeric Vector for block 1 Dummy Address 1 2 Dummy Address 1 2 Word 1 of VF Message Dummy Message Dummy Message block 1 Word 2 of MF Message Dummy Message Dummy Message block 2 Idle Idle Idle 1b 21 Operation Reference Function where BI Block Information AF Address Field VF Vector Field MF Message Field IB Idle Block POCSAG Setting the Data Rate and Pager Type The parameter menu for the data rate and the pager type looks like the following FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE DATA RATE 512 PAGER TYPE NUMERIC FUNCTION 00 encode32 tif DATA RATE 512 512 bps 1200
13. N FREQUENCY MNENEEEEEENH SE AVPLTUDE C J CYCLE 00 FRAME 011 PHASE D COLLAPSE CYCLE 4 LJ Co encode42 cdr Co Press the NEXT key to move to the next page 1a 28 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only Selecting the Roaming Mode Settings 11 Set ROAMING MODE to NONE using the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob lic Ol Ajo RR Si FREQUENCY ES MODULATION SD AMPLITUDE joo Cit n CYCLE 00 FRAME 011 PHASE D l COLLAPSE CYCLE 4 L E LL I EJ IET ILI E 1 encode42 cdr Press the NEXT key to move to the next page Encoding 12 To start encoding after selecting all pager encoder parameters press the INCR SET START STOP key BN ncc HE FREQUENCY ES MODULATION SE AMPLITUDE ojo MESSAGE NO 6 AMPLITUDE 0 0 dBm CYCLE 00 FRAME 011 PHASE D Co Co Co Co encode43 cdr 1a 29 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option
14. O encode5 drw Press the NEXT key to moveto the next page 1a 26 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only 7 Set IMMEDIATE STOP tO OFF HEADER to ON and TERMINATOR to ON using AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob and the key These are default settings that normally would not be adjusted FREQUENCY am MODULATION mum AMPLITUDE CZ CQ 2 C C2 CJ go 01050500600 IMMEDIATE STOP OFF ojoo 0000910 HEADER ON TERMINATOR ON 01000000 o Press the NEXT key to move to the next page Selecting the Pager Capcode Address 8 Enter your pager s capcode address in the pager code menu The rad dBuV SHIFT key is required to enter alphabetical characters For example to enter the following A0012477 press 7 A 0012477 MHz dB m ENTER Then using the U NEXT key and the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob set DUMMY CALL to OFF NOTE The pager s capcode contains information that automatically sets the parameters of the last two menus NS FREQUENCY MENS MODULATION SD AMPLITUDE OJO PAGER CODE 0012477 DUMMY CALL OFF m E 1 a encode40 cdr
15. Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 400 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 49 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 140 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 512 5 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 141
16. FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE FSK 5122 AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm PNI5 1b 26 encode30 drw 512 2 1200 2 1600 2 2400 2 3200 2 3200 4 6400 4 NOTE p DATA RATE 512 bps 2 level FSK 1200 bps 2 level FSK 1600 bps 2 level FSK 2400 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 4 level FSK 6400 bps 4 level FSK Operation Reference Function This setting is required only when PN15 is selected in the format menu PREV and NEXT keys toggle the format menu and this PN15 Fsk data rate menu No other menus are displayed Message During Encoding To start and stop encoding press the INCR SET START STOP key Q FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE PN15 SENDING AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm encode31 tif If the RF output is turned off AMPLITUDE x xdBm Will be substituted for RF OFF While encoding the blinking cursor is on thefirst character A of AMPLITUDE Or R of RF OFF SERVICE This function is used for servicing the 8648a Option and provides a continuous FSK signal Setting the Data Rate The following parameter must be set to activate the service function
17. RERO 1 4 O PIB RIOR dede ub be dear dod B op eee ea Te 1 4 1 Modulation Source cererii OP Oks EO HEE Sha DERE E 1 5 la Operation Examples Setting Ehg RF Output Signal seser occ Spice tiani See dont la 3 Seting the PAM oss usados sex ub Leh Che ieee kee bebe d Robo la 3 Wie Glos Steeler hn REA ee hy Nee eae la 3 Tornon HERP CBE iso pep ks o o ARERR Che eee d dicata la 3 Setting the NMDA 2a dnd wl wh ene edet De es la 4 Incrementing or Decrementing the RF output Signal 1 5 ut nuces e 1 5 Jere We LI es Re 1 5 Using the Wierement AA ex 1 5 Using the Memory Registers 1 7 Saving Instrument Setting in Register Sequences 1 8 Deleting a Register from the 5 la 11 Renumbering the Registers in a la 12 Inserting a Register a Sequence la 13 Offsetting the RF Output from a la 16 Setting the R
18. Field Phase A Phase B C Phase D Word 0 of BI Block Info Dummy Block I nfo Dummy Block I nfo block 0 Word 1 of BI BIWOO0 BIW1018 BIW1018 block 0 Word 2 of BI BIW111 BIW1018 BIW1018 block 0 Word 3 of BI BIW1018 BIW1018 BIW101 block 0 Word 4 of AF Network Address Idle Idle block 0 Word 5 of AF Address 1 Dummy Address 1 Dummy Address 1 block 0 Word 6 of AF Address 2 Dummy Address 2 Dummy Address 2 block 0 Word 7 of VF Short Message Vector VF block 0 for Network Address Word O of VF Vector for Address 1 2 Numeric Vector for Numeric Vector for block 1 Dummy Address 1 2 Dummy Address 1 2 Word 1 of VF Message Dummy Message Dummy Message block 1 Word 2 of MF Message Dummy Message Dummy Message block 2 Idle Idle Idle BIW101 System Message Time nstruction Seconds Adjust 0 Daylight Savings No Standard Time Local Time zone Greenwich Meridian b Vector Type Short Message Tone Only Message Type 3 Numeric Characters 000 with Short Address where BI Block Information AF Address Field VF Vector Field MF Message Field IB Idle Block 1b 20 Operation Reference Function NOTE If the firmware revision of the 8648A option is B 04 08 or below the contents in each phase are shown in the following table 6400 bps 4 level FSK Call in Phase A Address Type Long Address Roaming Mode SSID NID
19. 8 24 Configure the Measuring Receiver cs cas saa ehh ka ra srar ORA E EORR Eae 8 24 Configure the Audio Analyzer Es 8 25 Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 8 25 Configure the 85648 RR ridiani iaro eee Ewe P Edd ERAS 8 25 Measure DeoLAU IE coded che as acp Rd 8 25 Test ROO ERR EE KEEN ABER Few Ee REG E 8 25 Harmonic Parton mance iud adde outs rac d a pee dad Me Nea a KES 8 26 Connect the Test Equipment cicius oso be ees ER ERA Pees 8 26 Configure the Spectrum Analyzer sis case eno ce debe ver beeen crane REOR aa ee 8 26 Configure the 8646 FEROS eee eee Ee EGE Eee 8 26 Measure Harmonie Levels ede dodo 8 26 Test Record gcse sues wap ERR need Agee Rs 8 26 spurious PerPormance ESE E Pep ke poe pa abd aon 8 27 Connect the Test Equipment aiiis duke ERR REEWRRR ERR ee ERES 8 27 Configure the Spectrum Analyzer uisa sneak pb we EE RAO ERR n 8 27 Configure the S640 ci HERR renked Onr rrai HERE TOE hs eee ETRAS PER EH 8 27 Measure Spurious L
20. A30 PAGER ENCODER OPT 3J28 w13 J1 5 D gt 2 SPARE DATA 05 m 1 0 5 S SPARE EN D GND So S 15 zi 8 25 gt 38V gt 10 gt CAL IBRAT I ON MEMORY DATA EEPROM EEPROM SRAM W15 FROM J2 FRONT PANEL MOD gt INPUT OUTPUT NORMAL 1EP 1 0 ANALOG SWITCH CONTROL NORMAL J3 o k L w14 TO A3J21 on623a2d Figure 5b 6 8648A Option 1E 2 A14 Modulation Generator Block Diagram PULSE CK 14 MODULATION GEN 1 gt PULSE EN gt 3 gt gt 0 6ND MT 9 gt t 15V D gt gt 8 D L gt 10 gt A3428 wie 1 1 2 SPARE DATA at SPARE EN 4 3 i gt D GND gt 6 1 15V gt 15V gt 7 LS s S 5y CALIBRATION 10 pore EEPROM W18 FROM J2 FRONT PANEL MOD I NPUT OUTPUT b MEMORY EEPROM ERATOR OPT 1E 1 0 ANALOG SWITCH CONTROL NORMAL NORMAL MOD GEN MOD GEN 1 w17 0 0 TO 3021 on622a2d 5b 9 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution 5b 10
21. N FREQUENCY i MODULATION E 117 L IE Ed Ed E3 EJ cy C Oc ae L2 C 1 50kHz SQR Li 0 kHz 4a JC on sbd 1a 22 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only this example you will set up the pager encoder to send a signal appropriate to test a numeric type FLEX pager NOTE This pager encoding example can only be performed if Option is present The front panel of the Option 1EP instrument is different from the standard instrument s front panel The green and blue labels are incorporated for the pager encoding mode onl y Therefore these keys have multiple functions on instruments with Option Figure 1 1 The 8648A Option 1EP Signal Generator She asi 8648A T00kHz 1000MHz EM a Agilent SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE FORMAT FLEX POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON FUNCTION AMPLITUDE ENCODER r DATA START STOP A ENTIS INCR SET 7 PREV D aweuruee ENCODER a o PULSE MEMORY MODULATION SOI U wW A MAX REV PWR 50 W 25 VDC MOD INT Ext sa fec
22. a RRM don PUR edo dace BES 5a 15 A12 Reverse Power 8648 5a 16 A13 Pulse Modulator 8648B C D Option 1 6 5a 17 A14 Modulation Generator Option 1 2 5a 18 A30 Pager Encoder 8648A Option 1 5a 19 5b Troubleshooting Information TRUDI IGE ING CBR SE usa cua ie d neben 5b 2 AC Maing Line Fuse Removal 1423 x ax a ca ROCA eee ie hans Sede 5b 3 TO Ree Ihe FUSE aE edo eode e doo Ed Ta CER a ORS 5b 3 Modulation Test Points and Power Supply lt 5b 4 Power Supply ded denny obec ade PEE ea 5b 5 xii Contents 5c Service Error Messages 6 Replaceable Parts S cn pida PER e a 6 1 8648A Replaceable seu hr Fee a eee ee 6 3 DOADHICUD Replaceable Parte qa sei 3 bacs dx do rea X ee oe sed 6 9 7 Adjustments EQUIDITIGUE xu odisse Sd Rican dk d del qan t dd dubai ore abies aia etd dia 7 2 Equipment Setup for Automated 7 2 Tes Pont EX S eas RR e
23. E Defines the coverage zone of a pager under test The allowable range is 0 to 31 e COUNTRY CODE Defines the country code The allowable range is to 1023 SSID TMF Defines the SSID traffic management flag This value is automatically set when the capcode 9address is entered in the PAGER CODE data field The allowable range is 0 to 15 1b 16 Operation Reference Function After completing the previous menu set FRAME OFFSET in the following menu FREQUENCY SN MODULATION AMPLITUDE FRAME OFFSET 00 encode26 drw FRAME OFFSET Defines the number of frames to be offset by BIW101 from the signaling frame at the home area Theallowable range is 0 to 63 The next menu is displayed for setting the NI D mode after completing the 5510 mode settings only if the SSID and NID modes are selected FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE ADDRESS 2058240 RF CH 0 AREA 00 MULTIPLIER 0 NID TMF 02 encode27 drw ADDRESS Defines the network address which appears on
24. 7 27 HF Power Level Accuracy All 8648 7 28 LF Output Level Most 8648B C D llle 7 31 LF Power Level Accuracy Most 8648 7 32 FSK Deviation Option cerise snina seeder det et 7 34 Filter Path Ophion LEP a eu pi re on dg ex Ros tener bape Kod wees 7 35 Agilent Service Support 5 7 36 Required Test cack scie iced aque EB Ph p lc HR 7 36 the SIMA uud ue heey eed o Ce Rae GORY Ra de 7 37 7 41 Service Support Software 7 42 Running the Service Support 5 7 53 Motherboard Repair eeu rue TX Role diete ddr eto E p Ve Re os 7 58 8 Performance Tests del pem o MP 8 2 Required Test Eguiprrien Rede RENEE RE Kew 8 3 Performance Test DEScriptins a aes E a 8 6 Manual Performance Teste 22 4 secs eee es ae E RE vee ese eee eh ee EEr TENS 8 6 Automated Perrormisnce shed HbR eae candace ce 8 6 Accuracy Per
25. px dox dic dor Ad bal Pap eee SRL dog aoo Uo d 4 4 Fregueney iva E PERPE pm 4 5 xi Contents Phase Modulation coves rur gau seed Fee ba EOS HEHE RG ows 4 6 Aunputade nni cai acea eaa perde a pe ppp d pde pad 4 7 Modulation SOU C amp eg Er RR REX EE AG RR PREG EORR CR RR RE RR 4 8 Ramae Pror amn a iu 4 8 Environmental ss rsscs qure ERO ERR DG ERES 4 9 MTM MP 4 9 Modulation Generator Option JE 2 rsrsrsrs Ra om ks dee eau eT EERE ER PERS 4 10 Pulse Modulation Option LEG ite duce ped x Ce PE a de e ER de ae ra 4 11 Pager Encoder Signalling Option PER REPEAT REN 4 11 Frejueney Mola Chee paran dre EC P ee E EO e eee 4 12 Paging Signalin iiuesskkessu sk i FG yet ee geek ESO 4 12 Modulation SOU hie bud eked ahd e id ed dede dex aca 4 12 General eye Pi PERRO HERR PEEKS OK eRe EEE TOES S dd 4 12 Regulatory cits eh C4 eed neonates 1077 0277 21022 T 4 13 150 9002 CompllalE eee kw dW ea dees PENSE ADEA Re eS a 4 13 Stabe nen or Compl snos cause dax deoa SE Re Ea acm d pde 4 13 Noise Decaratian s
26. 8 115 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 999 9 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 116 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 1300 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26
27. M ES e ere BR N oO gr E FREQUENCY MODULATON AMPLITUDE FORMAT SERVICE CALIBRATION FSK 512 2 encode45 cdr 1b 27 Operation Reference Function CALIBRATION FSK is one of the data rates as follows 512 2 1200 2 1600 2 2400 2 3200 2 3200 4 6400 4 NOTE 512 bps 2 level FSK 1200 bps 2 level FSK 1600 bps 2 level FSK 2400 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 4 level FSK 6400 bps 4 level FSK This setting is required only when SERVICE is selected in the format menu The PREV and NEXT keys toggle the blinking cursor between the format parameter and this CALIBRATION FSK parameter No other menus are displayed Message During Servicing To start and stop encoding press the INCR SET START STOP key s FREQUENCY SN MODULATION NENNEN AMPLITUDE Q FSK SENDING AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm 1b 28 encode39 drw If the RF output is turned off AMPLITUDE x xdBm will be substituted for RF OFF While encoding the blinking cursor is on the first character A
28. a AM bandwidth degrades at carrier frequencies below 1 5 MHz and is not specified If you press EXT DC while the instrument is already in external dc mode and the is on then the instrument will perform a dc FM calibration Thecalibration takes approximately one second During the calibration the following message appears on the display DCFM calibration in progress 1b 45 Operation Reference Function 6 1 kHz EXT DC Press 1 kHz EXT DC toconfigure the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port as a dc coupled input for modulating the carrier along with the internal 1 kHz source Refer also to EXT AC EXT DC for further information about operation and acceptable ranges NOTE 1 kHz AC 400 Hz EXT DC and 400 Hz EXT AC are available only via GPIB Setting the Modulation Level When modulating with both an internal and external source the level of the external source should not exceed 0 5 V peak 0 5 Vdc This level will provide one half of the displayed modulation To set modulation to the level you desire set the displayed modulation to two thirds of the desired setting The external source set to 0 5 V peak or 0 5 Vdc will provide the additional one third of the desired setting one half of the instrument s setting For example to set up the modulation for 3 kHz of FM deviation set the instrument for 2 kHz of FM The external source set to 0 5 V peak will provide another 1 kHz of deviation If the externa
29. 2 2 EI cascos Rd T dade tans adipe d dad BOAR d a oe T i SEE DR 2 2 opos darte dran gari siccus E dubiis eta 2 2 Progamming E sess asd mice dade ER Ros dde bale dfe ie etd feno doe 2 3 Programming RE Frequent succes ERR RR AU Kee acp CA doko esas ROS es 2 3 Programming RF Frequency and FM 2 3 Duerying Freer Su ce d uxo soos aeq qr quia dec didam abba ad abt eoi dear pupa ea qp ate 2 4 Programming RF Ampli Ure use eusmod ade do Je Rocio oen a doeet doe 2 4 Programming Pulse Modulation Option 1 6 2 4 Programming Pager Encoder Option eee ec een 2 5 Contents GPIB Status eGo ye RONEN TOK CE OEE DEUS Ee wes POEs 2 12 External Modulation Input Level 5 lt 2 14 Reverse Power Protection 44 4 4 tyris ees 2 16 Unspecified Power Amplitude Entry 5 lt 2 17 Pager Encoding Status Option LEP teens Rx ns 2 18 SCPI Command Reeren s REA d pce dake 2 20 ABORE Subsystem Option IEP Only css suo ke dee ce ee wes 2 21 AM SUS tO qucex dedu ed e YER dpud eee
30. MIXER N LO TN IF 10 MHz REF IN gt ai A3J11 17 ze 999 991 100 A3J14 3 BUS s 9 SIG GEN SYNTH to 751MHz A3J19 TR f g g CLOCK AT T INT 179 498 1002 MHz lt 9 2 BAND 9 kHz 1000 MHz 13dBm 501 1000 MHz TYPICALLY 2 to 4 dB MAIN BAND ABOVE FRONT PANEL EA pe 0 TO 3 dBm A POWER SETTINGS BE PRESENT dab us CD DET DET 50 11 2 _0 12V 0 009 249 MHz 3 L o AMP SG REF RF IN 501 1000 MH gt gt 5 BE lt EE B I0 A10 A347 M Nie Y 1 E s SEE SHEET 2 OF 2 412V gt A3J13 m 3413 3 PHASE MOD gt NF A3J12 3 A3J14 17 249 501 MHz A3J15 13 A3J17 4 CAL z T gt P ROM BAND FM Bl E DC 25 kHz Y we VPK FOR L gt g gt Chock Y MAX DEV DATA r 1 4 gt 1 0 5 MOTHERBOARD A3J8 7 L gt AS Js MODULATION DISTRIBUTION o CARRIER 031 4 Fal LEVEL NOD REF zool morl Q 4 b REF m LOOP 1KHz N z as od B12 BIT DAC Se sue j INTEGRATOR 2 FRONT PANEL A14 MOD 2 Him ns tye pac H MOD output GENERATOR E EMQUE I NPU UTPU TO 10 ui gt 9 lt edd AM MOD OPT 1E2 z
31. NOTE Sequence 1 does not contain the settings you saved in sequence 0 The instrument enables you to save different settings in each sequence to create up toten different sequences for your testing Remember when you save or recall a register be sure that the correct sequence is also selected 1a 10 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE SEQ 1 REG 00 req0 drw Deleting a Register from the Sequence In this example you will delete a register from the sequence you created in the preceding example Selecting the Sequence 1 Select sequence 0 A FREQUENCY MODULATION INE AMPLITUDE SEQ 0 Deleting a Register delreg0 drw 2 Delete register 01 from sequence 0 NOTE The contents of the register are recalled when it is deleted This allows you to re save the contents if you need to M CN te SR FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE 11 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG delreg1 drw 1a 11 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers 3 Step through the remaining registers in se
32. Re synchronization function for FLEX FLEX TD pagers only Servicing the 8648A Option 1EP POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD 2 Level FSK RESYNC PN15 FLEX FLEX TD 4 Level FSK 1 Carrier Deviation 1 Carrier Deviation 10 Carrier Deviation 11 Carrier Deviation 3 01 Carrier Deviation 3 0 Carrier Deviation 0 Carrier Deviation 00 Carrier Deviation INVERSE Inverse polarity POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD 2 Level FSK RESYNC PN15 FLEX FLEX TD 4 Level FSK 1 Carrier Deviation 1 Carrier Deviation 10 Carrier Deviation 11 Carrier Deviation 3 01 Carrier Deviation 3 0 Carrier Deviation 0 Carrier Deviation 00 Carrier Deviation FILTER selects whether or not the baseband modulation filter 1Oth order Bessel low pass filter 3 dB at 3 9 kHz is used Normally the filter is on ON Uses the low Pass filter OFF 1b 8 Does not use the low pass filter Operation Reference Function FLEX FLEX TD Setting the data Rate and Pager Type The parameter menu for the data rate and the pager type looks like the following m FREQUENCY MODULATION DATA RATE 3200 2 7 PAGER NUMERIC
33. ONA ons Query UNTERMINATED Indicates that a condition causing an UNTERMINATED Query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the device was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received Query DEADLOCKED Indicates that a condition causing a DEADLOCKED Query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 1 7 For example both input buffer and output buffer are full and the device cannot continue Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite respons Indicates that a query was received in the same program message after a query requesting an indefinite response was executed see IEEE 488 2 6 5 7 5 Five second self test This message appears when the command tst is sent to the instrument over the GPIB bus Theinstrument runs a subset of its power up tests when this message is displayed The local key is disabled during this time 1c 10 Operation messages Service Messages Service Messages Messages numbered 500 and above relate to the service self test provided within the instrument For information about troubleshooting the instrument refer to Chapter 5 Service 1c 11 Operation messages Service Messages 1 12 GPIB Programming Background This signal generator adheres to the IEEE 488 1 1987 IEEE 488 2 1987 and SCPI Version 1992 0 command language In 1987 the IEEE released IEEE 488 2 1987 Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with
34. ER S IC dut d 7 2 Manual AJUSTEN S Paru dedos Aedes 1d a x daos SO RP dio 7 4 Internal Reference Oscillator 7 5 Pager Encoder Timebase Frequency 7 7 A dIUSEmibF TES cu dod ob ac bodega Mc OE 7 9 AM Level and Distortion 8648A 7 10 AM Level 48 sana dastolet kde quani exque qubd ds dp Toe am gie Sep cade n 7 12 Detector Offset 8648A Only 0 0 ccc een een 7 14 Outpt Level 8648A uu dd vex se ucc p ER RR RCR RR 7 15 AM Level FE 8648B C D Only crip DRE Xx bor thereat 7 16 Predistortion and Detector Offset 8648B C D Only 7 18 Preleugl 8648B C D Only cc poetic ceased oe RR eX Roe ERR Roe dk cec de ac 7 19 Output level Frequency Extension Calibration 8648B C D 7 20 AM Modulater Only 244 0 chen vee ie ease cq E RR kie PRO cx Ede Rn x 7 21 Time Base DAC All BOJSAJBICID aues on ener sS ce Pee ke 7 23 Motherboard Audio Path All 864 7 24 All S538 BI DE eter X opa chee nn 7 26 Audio Generator Options IE2 and LEP
35. Power Level Accuracy Performance Test Automated NOTE This performance test is the preferred replacement for the RF Level Accuracy performance test If this performance test is performed the RF level Accuracy performance test is not required Description The power level accuracy performance test measures the level of the output power against the specifications Required Test Equipment Power meter Power Sensor Spectrum Analyzer e 6dB Attenuator e Low Frequency Amplifier High Frequency Amplifier Procedure Figure 8 23 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup Power Levels gt 10 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR 5 2 8 49 Performance Tests Power Level Accuracy Performance Test Automated Figure 8 24 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup Power Levels 10 to 70 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST Ref Out 19 MHz Ref SPECTRUM ANALYZER ooo ood 0000009 nnn ATTENUATOR an66a2d Figure 8 25 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup Power Levels lt 70 and 2 1300 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST Ref Out 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM ANALYZER LOW FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER an67a2d 8 50 Performance Tests Power Level Accuracy Performance Test Automated Figure 8 26 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup Power Levels lt 70 and gt 1300 dBm 8648 10 MHz UNDER TEST Ref Out 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM
36. A7 Attenuator 8648A The attenuator assembly contains the attenuators the reverse power protection circuitry and the temperature sense circuitry The attenuator assembly contains a calibration EEROM that contains calibration data This data must be regenerated anytime the A7 assembly is replaced 5a 13 Theory of Operation A10 Frequency Extension 8648B C D A10 Frequency Extension 8648B C D The main input to the A10 frequency extension module is the 9 kHz to 1000 MHz RF from the A6 output module It operates in three frequency bands to cover the extended frequency range of the 8648B C D e 9kHzto 1000 MHz gt 1000 MHz to 2000 MHz gt 2000 to 4000 MHz For frequencies lt 1000 M Hz the module operates as an amplifier and provides a dc voltage tothe A6 output module that is used for ALC This dc voltage represents the detected RF output level from the module and is used as an input to the ALC integrator on the A6 module For RF output frequencies between 1000 and 2000 MHz a doubler is used on the 500 to 1000 MHz input signal Three bandpass filters are used over this frequency rangeto control harmonics A pre level detector provides a dc voltage to the A6 output module that is used to drive the ALC loop integrator on the A6 output module An additional ALC loop is provided on this module for frequencies gt 1000 MHz For RF output frequencies between 2000 and 4000 MHz an additional doubler is used For this freque
37. Cable Color Mint Gray Mint Gray Jade Gray Jade Gray Mint Gray Mint Gray Mint Gray Mint Gray Jade Gray Jade Gray Installation Connecting AC Power For Use in Country Option 900 United Kingdom Hong Kong Cyprus Nigeria Singapore Zimbabwe Option 901 Argentina Australia New Zealand Mainland China Option 903 United States Canada Brazil Colombia Mexico Philippines Saudi Arabia Taiwan Option 918 Japan Option 902 Continental Europe Central African Republic United Arab Republic Option 906 Switzerland Option 912 Denmark Option 917 South Africa India Option 919 Israel formt118 3 5 Installation Turning On the Signal Generator Turning On the Signal Generator If you are operating this instrument in extreme environmental conditions refer to the following operation limitations The following minimum conditions are required for safe operation of this instrument indoor use altitude lt 4500 meters 15 000 feet temperature 0 to 50 C maximum relative humidity 80 for temperature up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50 relative humidity at 40 C INSTALLATION CATEGORY II according toI EC 1010 POLLUTION DEGREE 2 according to IEC 664 The instrument performs a diagnostic self test on power up If any problems are detected with functionality it will display a message Refer to Chapter 1c Operation Messages for further information about the
38. Kaa eae 8 11 Posse CD Option LEZ ONIY Lu iua sue t ERG GERE RAGHARSPOX RARE REEPX ada 8 11 Connect ine Test BONING Ws Feb REOR a OR AO ons R a baa Ed Roe sans 8 11 Configure the Synthesized Signal 8 11 Messire DESEE c a covet ei X x eden PO pde ace d ded n de a 8 12 Test Record s ERR ERR UAE 8 12 FM Distortion Performance Test G 8 13 Connect the Test Equipiient 0425 ee bee esaeee ewer dee ae ke 8 13 Configure the Measuring Receiver geek aes n a Rhe E 8 13 Configure the Audio Analyzer te eed pe eas RES 8 13 CONGUE BOSS Lou PE A ioe ok de d d ee edm 8 13 Measure DisEortlori tag me RR EEE ROHS SERRE REESE EA 8 14 I4 oc ict C rS 8 14 CD ONY cia RIDE GR TE EREQXSEDEPRE d PE 8 14 Connect The Test edad ob ep x el ace d ebd a Ead deba 8 14 Configure the Synthesized Signal 8 15 Measure cia seta xu ere aXX uo ex bdo Sardo a thee dante cba dap 8 15 Test Record ceed ey ice Geew ses hh eee Ewes PORE GREENE ESAS GRE 8 15 Acc
39. O Encode2 drv DATA RATE specifies how fast the data stream is output in bits per second and whether it is 2 level or 4 level FSK 1600 2 3200 2 3200 4 6400 4 1600 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 2 level FSK 3200 bps 4 level FSK 6400 bps 4 level FSK PAGER TYPE specifies the type of message a pager under test can respond to and is selectable from the following TONE ONLY Short only type NUMERIC HEX BIN Numeric type ALPHANUMERIC Alphanumeric type HEX Binary type If NUMERIC is selected the next setting to be selected is VECTOR TYPE as shown up eese Ir _ a FREQUENCY MODUATON C C VECTOR TYPE STANDARD Encode3 drw V STANDA 5 PECIAL RD ECTOR TYPE identifies the type of message as follows The pager under test displays the numeric message it receives The pager under test converts the numeric message to a pre defined message which is displayed The message numbers are assigned for each paging address separately starting at 0 and progressing up to a maximum of 63 in consecutive order 1b 9 Operation Reference
40. kHz 48kHz kHz 7 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 9 kHz 48kHz kHz 9 _ kHz 48kHz kHz Average Sum 3 10 kHz Average Sum 3 10 _____ 2 Frequency 155 MHz 5 mode 6400 4 Frequency 280 MHz FSK mode 6400 4 Symbol rate 3200 sym sec Span 50 kHz Symbol rate 3200 sym sec Span 50 kHz 0 KHZ 48kHz kHz 0 kHz 48kHz kHz 1 kHz L6kHz 2 1 kHz L6kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz kHz 3 kHz Ll6kHz kHz 3 kHz Ll6kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz kHz 5 KHZ L6kHz kHz 5 _ kHz L6kHz J kHz 6 kHz 48kHz kHz 6 kHz 48kHz 2 7 kHz L6kHz kHz 7 kHz Ll6kHz X kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 9 KHZ L6kHz kHz 9 kHz Ll6kHz kHz Average Sum 3 10 kHz Average Sum 3 10 kHz 8 44 Table 8 2 FSK Deviation Accuracy Work Table Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 Symbol Marker Desired Deviation Symbol Marker Desired Deviation Value Deviation Error Value Deviation Error Frequency 325 MHz FSK mode 1200 2 Frequency 930 MHz FSK mode 1200 2 Symbol rate 1200 sym sec Span 20 kHz Symbol rate 1200
41. sn61d MP15 2 Places 8648A Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts 8648A Replaceable Parts 6 4 Replaceable Parts 8648A Replaceable Parts Table 6 1 8648A Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description Al 1 FRONT FRAME ASSY NOT AVAILABLE FOR REPLACEMENT 1 1 0960 0856 1 1 2 0960 0856 1 A1A3 08648 60178 1 FLEX CIRCUIT AlA4 2090 0362 1 DISPLAY VFD 2x40 Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 2090 0312 1 DISPLAY LCD 2x40 Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 1 1250 1811 1 RF OUTPUT TYPE N CONNECTOR A1MP1 08648 60188 1 FRONT FRAME KIT 8648A 1E 2 Serial prefixes 2 3836A 3836U 08648 60187 1 FRONT FRAME KIT 8648 1 Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 60015 1 FRONT FRAME KIT 8648A Options 1E 2 1E P Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U A1MP2 08647 40006 1 KEYPAD A1MP3 08647 00004 1 DISPLAY MOUNT A1MP4 08647 00019 1 COVER DISPLAY A1MP5 01650 47401 1 KNOB CURSOR A1MP6 01650 47401 1 KNOB CURSOR 08648 80001 1 NAME PLACE 8648A A2 0950 2293 1 POWER SUPPLY A3 08648 60614 1 MOTHERBOARD ASSY Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 60314 1 MOTHERBOARD ASSY Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 08648 69614 1 EXCHANGE MOTHERBOARD KIT Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 69314 1 EXCHANGE MOTHERBOARD KIT Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U
42. 2 21 CAL Subsystem robbs HORNE eae Y 2 22 DM S bsystem Option TEP ONY kiiret cane 2 22 FM Subsystem ee EE EEGs DHE EEE THERE REE 2 23 FREOQUE IO SUBSYSTEM ue dr bi dac ib dara laca 2 24 INITiate Subsystem Option Only 2 24 CUT PUL SUD SDNTE iae pce pid dort EE aded dee ao doped acd 2 24 PAGing Subsystem Option JEP Only mk RR ERR HERR ERR 2 25 PRI Sube ya sis ah ea angue dedi ed cb adea ui dca te A 2 37 POWer SUBSYSTEM ois raus RC HER REPE KCN E 2 38 PU M SUDY E ois os ah oe REPERI DOS eb ad e ebd aede PR a eee bear 2 38 STATUS Subsystem isses oko SR A EROR GC EE ER Ee eeu RE da 2 39 i SIS SUNS NR EE LM Mc othe ana gad 2 40 TRIGger Subsystem Option IEP p whee eee 2 40 Changing Parameters While Encoding Option 2 41 Using the Buffer Memory for the Arbitrary 2 41 E suu aurae Drac doe aee a CEP b X did a ERE re eee ee 2 43 GPIB Connector Informatlan iiis dorus ou REGRESAR ERR E YER LER EN 2 44 0050 5 7 Compatible LANGUA
43. 55 0 12 247 259 55 0 1 2 6 1 999 55 0 1 2 1 1000 55 0 1 2 41 1000 55 0 1 2 61 1000 55 0 1 2 91 1000 55 0 12 102 286 55 0 12 137 315 55 0 1 2 150 148 55 0 12 150 149 55 0 12 150 151 55 0 1 2 150 152 55 0 12 167 7 55 0 12 172 312 55 0 1 2 227 92 55 0 1 2 232 304 55 0 1 2 241 759 55 0 1 2 241 1000 55 0 1 2 242 274 55 0 1 2 8 64 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 15 DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test Frequency Frequency Limits Hz Frequency Deviation FM Off FM On Uncertainty MHz kHz Hz Hz Lower Measured Upper Hz 100 1 100 100 1 0 100 5 100 100 1 0 100 9 9 100 100 1 0 500 1 100 100 1 0 500 5 100 100 1 0 500 9 9 100 100 1 0 1000 1 100 100 1 0 1000 5 100 100 1 0 1000 9 9 100 100 1 0 8 65 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 16 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 49 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9
44. Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 92 Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E6 Limits dB Frequency Uncertainty MHz Measured Upper dB 100 80 1 8 500 80 2 1000 80 2 1500 80 2 2000 80 2 2300 70 1 8 2500 70 2 2700 70 2 3000 70 2 3200 70 2 3500 70 2 3700 70 2 4000 70 2 Table 8 93 Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1 6 Limits ns Frequency Uncertainty MHz Measured Upper ns 1000 10 1 Table 8 94 Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Limits kHz Uncertainty Lower Measured Upper Hz 5 x 10 19 5 6 10711 8 147 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record 8 148 9 Supplemental Verification Tests The procedures in this chapter test the electrical performance of the signal generator These tests do not require access to the interior of the instrument This chapter contains the following information Required Test Equipment Supplemental Verification Tests A list of all the equipment required to perform these supplemental verification tests For a comprehensive list of all test equipment required to perform these tests plus the manual adjustments the manual performance tests and the automated adjustments and performance tests see Chapter 5 Service A list of all the equipment required to perform th
45. Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 999 9 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 142 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 1300 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 11
46. RTS Z E GND CTS A3J4 CPU BUS lt lt RPG 1S enD CLOCK 317 _ lt 5 3 4 DATA i 5 3 5 VOLATILE EN INT 1 RPGB SRAM s lt 4 gt 44 510 CLOCK A3J8 lt lt GND CONTROL pata t B 5 L5 t AS KEYBOARD ERRROM EN INT bo A3J3 PINS 1 7 KEY CLOCK A3J9 DATA COL 1 7 COL 1 PIN 1 to lt EIE COL 7 PIN 7 DATA t lt 5 r EC ME EN INT c JU Es E S CLOCK A3J16 gt DATA 3 L 5 PA PINS 9 16 EN INT 0 4 La ROW 1 ROW 1 8 9 Tm ATTEN CONTROL NC A3J22 VOLATILE we SRAM 1 0 pata 3128 T DISPLAY 354 ENABLE 3 A14 A30 1 RPP RST A3J26 ROM 2 gt gt A323 1541 GND BATTERY RPP INT 2 lt Nc 2 5V FREQUENCY SE MODULATION SES AWPL TUDE S a 100 00000 MHZ FM 3 00 kHz 100 0 dBm 5 R W DISPLAY m ASST eu S CONTROL 5 6 DAW 5 1 6 21524 mm NRFD 7 gt 16 gt 1 NDAC T IFC DO PIN 7 DO 9 o7 D7 PIN 14 SRQ 10 GPIB ATN 11 DO PIN 1 to D4 PIN 4 D5 PIN 13 to D7 PIN 16 sn63d 8648A BLOCK DIAGRAM Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution 5b 8 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution Figure 5b 5 8648A Option 1EP A30 Pager Encoder Block Diagram
47. SHAPe SHAPe shape Sets the AM modulation waveform for the internal modulation generator Option 1E2 only Legal values for shape are SINe TRIangle SQUare and SAW RST value is SINe SOURce CAL DCFM Eliminates the offset in dc FM so that the carrier frequency remains the same with no modulation applied External dc modulation must on to implement this calibration or execution error 221 is generated Pager encoder programming commands are valid only for instruments with Option 1EP SOURce DM L DATA1 FORMat FORMat FSK2 FSK4 Sets DM modulation to FSK2 or FSK4 RST value is FSK2 STATe STATe ON OFF 1410 Sets DM modulation ON or OFF DM is not turned on by setting DM DEViation Turning DM modulation ON will not automatically turn OFF any other types of modulation Turning any or all modulation types ON or OFF must be done explicitly If a modulation type is turned ON while another modulation type is ON an execution error 221 is generated and the state of the instrument is unchanged RST value is OFF DEViation DEViation lt NRf gt lt freq term gt Sets DM modulation deviation RST value is 3 kHz POLarity POLarity NORMal INVerted Sets DM modulation polarity to normal or inverse RST value is NORMal FILTer STATe STATe ON OFF 110 Sets DM modulation filter on or off RST value is ON Note FM Subsystem To set or change th
48. 000000 g OOOO o OOOO o n o00000 Input 50 W an615a2d 7 21 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 21 Location of J 31 on the Motherboard A3 Motherboard an619a2d 1 With the line power turned off install the Test Point Extender on J 31 J 31 pin lis the rear pin on the right edge of connector J 31 If jumper J 32 is installed on the motherboard remove it Turn on the line power Connect the equipment as shown above Preset all of the equipment amp UN Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the 7 22 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Time Base DAC All 8648A B C D NOTE A manual adjustment is available This automated adjustment can be replaced by performing the manual I nternal Reference Oscillator Adjustment instead Description This adjustment determines the proper DAC setting to achieve a frequency reading of 1 GHz 1 Hz The DAC settings are then stored away This program determines the proper DAC setting to achieve a frequency reading of 1 GHz 1 Hz The DAC setting is then stored away Required Test Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Primary Frequency Standard Procedure Figure 7 22 Time Base DAC Setup 8648 UNDER TEST PRIMARY FREQUENCY STANDARD 10 MHz 2 to 10 dBm an612a2d 1 Connect the equi pment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow th
49. 1600 bps 3200 bps 6400 bps 1 Lower 16 bits 3 Lower 16 bits 5 Lower 16 bits 7 Lower 16 bits 174 Upper 16 bits Word 7a of block 10 Word 3c of block 5 Word 5d of block 2 175 Lower 16 bits BENE Word 7c of block 10 Word 3d of block 5 350 Upper 16 bits 351 Lower 16 bits 702 Upper 16 bits Word 7d of block 10 703 Lower 16 bits LSB and MSB are defined as follows Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits LSB MSB 1 2 8 15 16 17 18 19 31 32 GPIB Programming 2 27 2 28 GPIB Programming Example for FLEX FLEX TD Suppose that you want to send the following message Data Rate 1600 bps 2 level FSK Cycle 0 Frame 0 Collapse cycle 0 Repeat 0 Address A0000001 Message 0123456 0 Frame information bits and data sets should be as follows Frame information bits Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits LSB MSB 0000000000000000 0 0111100001000010 16926 Frame Data Sets Frame info lower info LI Plain LSB MSB of block 0 Data set 1 Data set 0 info of block 0 Data set 3 Data set 2 field of block 0 Data set 5 Data set 4 field Word 3a 0100001000010011 1427 0000111010110010 19824 of block 0 Data set 7 Data set 6 field Word 4a 0011110010010101 22212 of block 0 Data set 9 Data set 8 field of block 0 Data set 11 Data set 10 frame pea 1111111111111111 1 of block 0 Data set 13 Data set 12 frame of block 0 Data set 15
50. 3 5 inch disk drive MS Windows version 3 x or mS windows 95 98 or NT 2 Button mouse optional Printer MS Windows supported for test results documentation e 82341C GPIB Interface Card 16 bit HP SICL libraries installed and configured CAUTION Do not install this software program on your computer if the ESG Series Support Software Version A 02 02 or earlier is installed on it 7 36 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Installing the Software NOTE No other MS Windows programs may be running during installation Close all MS Windows programs prior to starting the installation 1 Insert Disk 1 into the disk drive 2 Todisplay the Run dialog box For MS Windows 95 98 NT Select the Start button then select Run For MS Windows version 3 x open the Program Manager then select Run from the File drop down menu 3 From the Run dialog box type a setup and select the OK button The Setup window is displayed as it loads files for the installation Once these files are loaded the welcome screen is displayed Welcome Welcome to the 8648 Service Software Setup program This program will install 8648 Service Software on your computer lt is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by c
51. AM INT2 FUNC SHAP shape AM EXT COUP DC AM EXT COUP AC 26 GPIB Programming Sets AM depth in 9 value from 0 1 to 99 9 AM DEPT Sets AM on FM and PM must have state off AM STAT Sets AM off Selects internal source AM SOUR Selects internal source 2 for AM Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Selects external source Selects internal and external sources Selects internal 1 kHz frequency AM INT FREQ Selects internal 400 Hz frequency Sets the internal modulation generator 1E2 or AM INT2 FREQ the internal audio generator 1EP frequency to the value and units Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Sets the internal modulation generator AM INT2 FUNC SHAP waveform to the shape shape may be SIN TRI SQU or SAW Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Selects external dc coupling for AM AM EXT COUP Selects external ac coupling for AM Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions continued Command Statement Modulation continued Frequency Modulation CAL DCFM FM DEV lt value gt KHZ FM STAT ON FM STAT OFF FM SOUR INT FM SOUR INT2 FM SOUR EXT FM SOUR INT EXT FM INT FREQ 1 KHZ FM INT FREQ 400 HZ FM INT2 FREQ lt value gt lt units gt FM INT2 FUNC SHAP lt shape gt FM EXT COUP DC FM EXT COUP AC Phase Modulation PM DEV lt value gt RAD PM STAT ON PM STAT OFF PM SOUR INT PM SOUR INT2 PM SOUR EXT PM SOUR INT EXT PM INT FREQ 1 KHZ PM INT FREQ 40
52. MHz 8648 2000000 REF OUTPUT UNDER TEST a S500060 E 9 iu RF OUTPUT A an65abc Configure the Vector Signal Analyzer 1 Set the instrument mode press a Instrument Mode Digital Demodulation b demodulation setup demod format FSK 2 or FSK 4 Return symbol rate 1 6 3 2 kHz d result length 10 sym meas filter Low Pass Return f ref filter rect Return g more normalize off NOTE The symbol rate must be set to 1 6 kHz for 1200 2 FSK and 3 2 kHz for 6400 4 FSK 2 Set the display mode press Display 4 grids quad 8 40 Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only 3 Set each channel trace mode Channel Measurement Data Data Format A FSK measured time polar IQ vector B FSK error time magnitude linear C FSK measured time eye diagram I D symbol table error summary 4 Set the average mode press Average average off 5 Set the frequency span the frequency span must be set to 20 kHz for 1200 2 FSK and 50 kHz for 6400 4 F SK press Frequency center 155 MHz Span 20 or 50 kHz 6 Set thetime mode press Time result length 100 sym sync search on sync setup pattern 01 enter Return points symbol 20 enter 7 Set thetrigger mode to single mode press Pause Single 8 Couple Mkrs on 9 Display the status press View State measurement s
53. POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION A7 ATTENUATOR 8648A Sav A10 FREQUENCY EXTENSION Sod rm 1 8648B C D DB 1 12 L Hi 2 38V 12 5V 12 5V 12 5V 5V F 1 12v 12V 38V A6 OUTPUT SECTION 5V F1 12V 12V IBENNREEN NEERBEENEN jN Uppy lt 01 iL mi paama 5V OO OO mim OO OO OO Poo All STEP TEST POINTS A3J6 1 5VD A2 POWER SUPPLY W4 TO A3J6 NOTE ONLY POWER SUPPLY RELATED CONNECTORS ARE SHOWN crounp 2 5b 5 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution 5b 6 8648A BLOCK DIAGRAM
54. dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 999 9 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 70 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 17 Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Limits kHz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 1600 1599 992 1600 008 0 0011 Table 8 18 FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Limits kHz Frequency FSK Mode Uncertainty MHz Rate Level Lower Measured Upper Hz 155 1200 2 0 060 10 060 10 6400 4 0 060 10 060 10 280 1200 2 0 060 40 060 10 6400 4 0 060 0 060 10 325 1200 2 0 060 10 060 10 6400 4 0 060 10 060 10 930 1200 2 0 060 10 060 10 6400 4 0 060 10 060 10 Table 8 19 Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Limits kHz Uncertainty Lower Measured Upper Hz 5x 10 19 day 5 6 10 11 8 71 P
55. es FREQUENCY MODULATION o nooo N wao A x FM 25 0kHz Yona gt Yo z on6sbd Setting the Modulated Waveform 2 Press the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY WAVEF ORM key until sou is selected Repetitively pressing the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY WAVEF ORM key selects one of five states e afixed 1 kHz sinewave internal source e avariable frequency sinewave source indicated by SIN preceded by the frequency value avariable frequency triangle source TRI e avariable frequency squarewave source 500 e avariable frequency sawtooth or ramp source SAW 1a 21 Operation Examples Setting a User Selectable Modulated Frequency and Waveform Option 1E2 or 1EP Only ice C RS FREQUENCY MEE MODULATION o EE C C3 1 5 5 ratu Mmmm T 1 12kHz SQR gogoan oO so Q INT S 1kHz Frequency Waveform Setting the Modulated Frequency 3 Set the modulated frequency to 1 5 kHz The kHz key is the only accepted units key BE E je
56. lt 4000 MHz lt 1 at deviations gt 12 radians Amplitude AM performance is not specified below 1 5 MHz and is typical above Modulation 1001 MHz Range to 100 output lt 4 dBm Resolution 0 1 Accuracy 1 kHz rate 5 of setting 1 5 Applies at 25 5 C and at lt 70 depth AM accuracy is typically 7 of setting 1 5 over 0 to 50 C Rates Internal 400 Hz or 1 kHz Option 1E2 10 Hz to 20 kHz External DC to 25 kHz typical dB BW AC 1 Hz to 25 kHz typical 8 dB BW Specifications 4 7 Distortion 1 kHz rate THD Noise 0 3 to 3 kHz BW 8648A at 30 AM at 90 AM 8648B C D at 30 AM at 70 AM Modulation Source 400 Hz or 1 kHz front panel BNC connector provided at nominally 1 Vp into 600 ohms See also Modulation Generator Option 1E2 1 Vp into 600 ohms nominal required for full scale modulation High Low indicator provided for external signals lt 10 kHz Remote Programming Interface Control Languages Functions Controlled IEEE 488 Functions 4 8 Specifications GPIB IEEE 488 2 1987 with Listen and Talk SCPI version 1992 0 8656B and 8657 code compatibility All functions are programmable except the front panel power key the knobs the increment set key the arrow keys the reference keys and the rear panel display contrast control SH1 AHI T6 TEO L4 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO C0 E2 Environmen
57. oooo o a qooooo Ooooo E oaao MODULATION o 0000 p MEASURING RECEIVER INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn65a Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset FM mode Peak detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter Ui A WN Configure the Audio Analyzer 1 Distortion mode 2 30 kHz low pass filter Configure the 8648 1 Turn FM on press FM MOD ON OFF 2 Set therate press INT 1 kHz 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dBm 4 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Performance Tests FM Distortion Performance Test Measure Distortion 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results with the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648A Table 8 7 e 8648B Table 8 26 e 8648C Table 8 51 86480 Table 8 76 8648B C D Only The following steps are for the 8648B C D only For the 8648A this performance test is concluded Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 6 FM Distortion Equipment Setup 8648 UNDER TEST SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR og m uuu 7908 80 oooo 9 oooo 0m oooo oooo m A 5 poon MODULATION o Q OUTPUT pooooo o pooo INPUT 500 sn68a NOTE Use RF mixer MDC 164 when testing the 8648C D When testing
58. 1 08648 60146 1 MEMORY BOARD FIRMWARE KIT 1 08648 60165 1 MEMORY BOARD OPTION 1EP FIRMWARE KIT 1 1420 0338 1 BATTERY 3 0V 1 2AH 1 1252 2161 1 CONNECTOR RECT 24F 2 1252 1487 1 CONNECTOR RECT 9F RA 18 1250 1842 1 10 MHZINPUT BNC 19 1250 1842 1 10 MHZ OUTPUT BNC A3R6 2100 4507 1 CONTRAST POTENTIOMETER Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U A3S1 3101 2264 1 TIMEBASE ADJ SWITCH A4 08647 61045 1 STANDARD REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 6 5 Replaceable Parts 8648A Replaceable Parts Table 6 1 8648A Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description 08647 69045 1 STANDARD EXCHANGE REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A4 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A4 A4 08648 60042 1 OPTION 1E5 HIGH STABILITY REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08648 69042 1 EXCHANGE OPTION 1 5 HIGH STABILITY REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A4 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A4 A5 08648 60115 1 SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY 08648 69115 1 EXCHANGE SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A5 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A5 A5 08648 60124 1 SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY OPTION 08648 69124 1 EXCHANGE SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY OPTION 1 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A5 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A5 A6 08647 61032 1 OUTPUT ASSEMBLY Serial prefixes lt
59. 130 dBm 10 MHz to 4 GHz 134 dBM RF Input VSWR 1 1 5 External timebase input Sensor Module No Substitute 11722A RF Level Accuracy P Synthesized Freq range 11 5 to 1500 MHz 8663A FM Accuracy P Signal Generator Output level 16 dBm FM Distortion P Meets 8663A single sideband phase noise Phase M odulation Distortion P specifications Residual FM P Universal Freq accuracy 2 millihertz at 1600 Hz 5334B Pager Encoder Timebase P Counter Low Option 010 Accuracy Frequency Pager Encoder Timebase F req A Vector Signal FSK Deviation Accuracy 89441A FSK Deviation Accuracy P Analyzer 10 Hz at 4 8 kHz deviation FSK Deviation A Filter Path A a Required for testing 8648B D only b For use in testing 8648A Option only Service Post Repair Post Repair Table 5 2 Adjustments and performance Tests Required after Repair or Replacement of an 8648A Assembly Assembly Adjustments Performance Tests A1 Front Panel None RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A2 Power Supply All All A3 Motherboard Assembly All All A3A1 memory Board None Power on Self Test A3BT1 Battery DC DC FM Frequency Error A4 Reference Time Base DAC Residual FM Internal Timebase Aging Rate A5 Sig Gen Synth DCFM FSK Deviation b FM Accuracy FM Distortion Phase Modulation Distortion Residual FM Harmonics Spurious DC FM Frequency Error FSK Deviation Accuracy HF Power Le
60. 8 24 RF level accuracy 8 30 selection 7 54 spurious 8 27 performance verification cycle 8 2 plug 3 5 post regulator theory of operation 5a 8 post repair procedure 8648A 5 6 post repair procedures 8648B C D 5 6 power 3 3 cable 3 3 3 5 memory interface 1b 53 POWER DEL sequence 1b 34 POWER DEL sequency 1b 34 power level accuracy adjustment 7 28 power on symbol v power supply part number 6 3 6 6 6 12 theory of operation 5a 7 predistortion and detector offset adjustment 7 18 prelevel adjustment 7 19 preset conditions 1b 34 PREV 1b 31 printing test results 7 57 pulse modulation selection 1b 29 1b 30 Index Index pulse modulator theory of operation 5a 17 R rear panel 1b 49 recall 1 10 1 13 1b 40 1b 42 REF ON OFF 1b 3 REF SET 1 16 1b 2 reference theory of operation 5a 9 reference connectors 1b 49 reference kit part number 6 3 6 6 6 12 reference oscillator adjustment 7 5 REG 1a 8 1 13 1b 40 register 1b 39 clearing 1b 34 delete 1 11 REG 1 13 1b 40 remote interface 1b 51 renumbering 1a 12 RF output 1b 47 1b 48 sequence 1 8 total 16 40 remote interface memory 1b 52 removing software 7 41 repair 5 1 replaceable parts 6 1 results of tests saving 7 55 reverse power protection theory of operation 5a 16 reverse power 1b 48 RF ON OFF 1b 47 RF output 1 3 amplitude 1b 5 frequency 1b 5 ON OFF 1 3 RPG theory of operation
61. Front Panel Operation Messages Invalid units selection This message is displayed when units is pressed that is not valid for the active 0 function Check that the units key you select is labeled with the appropriate units for the value you are entering Increment value entry out of range This message is displayed when the INCR SET key is pressed and a value is entered that is not within the increment value range for the active function Refer to Increment Set in Chapter 1b Operation Reference for a listing of theincrement value ranges End of increment range This message is displayed when the or increment arrow key is pressed and the increment value does not set the instrument to a setting that is within the instrument s allowable range To view or change the increment value press the INCR SET key Refer to Increment Set in Chapter 1b Operation Reference for a listing of the increment value ranges Entered value out of range 0 This message is displayed when a value 15 entered that does not set the RF output signal 0 1 0 1 1 within the instrument s allowable range Refer to Function in Chapter 1b Operation Reference for information on the instrument s allowable ranges End of knob range This messageis displayed when the knob is turned but changing the selected digit would set the instrument to a valuethat is not within its allowable range Amplit
62. INPUT OUTPUT OPTION 1E2 MISCELLANEOUS 5961 4720 1 TRANSIT CASE 08648 10012 1 SERVICE SUPPORT SOFTWARE 08648 60175 1 KIT TEST POINT EXTENDER 08648 60180 1 SERVICE SOFTWARE KIT 6 8 g MP2 MP1U 4 Places 27 instead of W9 is used W7 with Option 1E6 7 2 W sA S W6 e 2 Places REAR VIEW R A6 MP8 Ses detailed figure on next MP 10 4 Places MP 17 A1A3 2 Places A1MP 1 5 5 2 S S S 19 2 Places N SX S SISIN A3J19 S Bg SESBR N ARR Q bs A3J18 NNA A A 9 Q AS or W18 on Option 1E2 T AIMP6 VEM 4 Places A1J1 amp rae e T Ld 8 8 8 MP3 N j 8 864U8B C D Replaceable Parts sn62d Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts 6 10 Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts 6 11 Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Figure 6 3 8648B C D Replaceable Parts A11 A12 a13 A14 Detailed View on64a2d 6 12 Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Table 6 2 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description Al 1 FRONT FRAME ASSY NOT AVAILABLE FOR REPLACEMENT 1 1 0960 08
63. Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Only Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Only Description This procedure checks the accuracy of the internal timebase The time required for a specific phase change is measured both before and after a specified waiting period The aging rate is inversely proportional to the absolute value of the difference in the measured times The overall accuracy of the internal timebase is a function of AR where TBC timebase calibration TE temperature effects AR aging rate LE line effects After the timebaseis adjusted thetimebase frequency should stay within the aging rate if the following things happen Thetimebase oven does not cool down Theinstrument keeps the same orientation with respect to the search s magnetic field Theinstrument stays at the same altitude Theinstrument does not receive any mechanical shock If the timebase oven cools the instrument power switch is set to off you may have to readjust the timebase frequency after a new warm up cyde typically however the timebase frequency returns to within 1 Hz of the original frequency NOTE The internal timebase can be tested after reconnecting AC power for 10 minutes but for best accuracy test again after the instrument has been on for 24 hours Frequency changes due either to a change in orientation with respect to the earch s magnetic field
64. MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 78 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 29 AM Accuracy Option 1 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 79 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 29 AM Accuracy Option 1E 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55
65. Program Code Implementation 2 46 GPIB Programming For users of 8656 57 compatible language the following table shows which program codes are implemented not all of the codes could be implemented 8656 57 Compatible Program Codes Program Parameter Comments Status Code Amplitude Modulation Function Entry Implemented Amplitude Offset Function Entry Implemented Amplitude carrier Function Entry Implemented Units Entry Implemented Units Entry Implemented Units Entry Implemented Step Down 4 Function Feature Implemented EMF Units Entry Implemented Frequency Modulation Function Entry Implemented Frequency carrier Function Entry Implemented Flexible Sequence Feature Implemented HI ALC Function Feature Implemented Hz Units Entry Implemented Increment Set Function Qualifier Implemented kHz Units Entry Implemented LO ALC Function Feature Not Implemented mV Units Entry Implemented Units Entry Implemented Percent Units Entry Implemented Phase Decrement Function Feature Pulse Modulation Fast Mode Phase Increment Not Implemented Function Entry Not Implemented Function Feature Not Implemented Pulse Modulation Function Feature Not Implemented Reverse Sequence Feature Implemented Program codes can be either upper or lower case T Either PC or can be used 8656 57 Compatible Program
66. Read theF SK deviation value at each symbol by using the marker function press Marker O or 1 2 9 sym record the marker value the second column of the table Calculatethe deviation error for each symbol by subtracting the desired deviation value from each marker value Record them in the fourth column of the table 7 Calculate the deviation error average and record it in the table 8 Repeat this measurement for the rest of the carrier frequencies and FSK modes listed in Table 8 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record 8 43 Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only Table 8 2 FSK Deviation Accuracy Work Table 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 Symbol Marker Desired Deviation Symbol Marker Desired Deviation Value Deviation Error Value Deviation Error Frequency 155 MHz FSK mode 1200 2 Frequency 280 MHz FSK mode 1200 2 Symbol rate 1200 sym sec Span 20 kHz Symbol rate 1200 sym sec Span 20 kHz 0 kHz 48kHz kHz 0 kHz 48kHz kHz 1 kHz 48kHz kHz 1 kHz 48kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz kHz 3 kHz 48kHz kHz 3 kHz 48kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz 2 5 kHz 48kHz kHz 5 kHz 48kHz kHz 6 kHz 48kHz kHz 6 kHz 48kHz kHz 7
67. The instrument requires periodic verification of performance Under normal use and environmental conditions an instrument should be calibrated every 2 years Normal useis defined to be about 2 000 hours of use per year Performance Tests Required Test Equipment Required Test Equipment e 8903B Option 051 Audio Analyzer Distortion accuracy 1 dB Residual distortion 80 dB at 80 kHz BW 30 kHz low pass filter AC level accuracy 4 CCITT weighting filter 8902A Measuring Receiver FM accuracy 2 of reading 1 digit AM accuracy 2 of reading 1 digit Range 150kHzto1300 MHz Filter 300 Hz high pass Filter 15 kHz low pass Detectors Peak e 8563E RF Spectrum Analyzer Frequency range 1MHzto4000 MHz Relative level accuracy 2 dB harmonic and spurious measurements 100 Hz digital resolution BW filter required for power accuracy Displayed average noise 100kHz 110dBm 1MHztolOMHz 130dBm 10MHzto4BHz 134dBm RF input VSWR 1 15 External timebase input e 8663A Synthesized Signal Generator Frequency range 11 5 MHz to 2500 MHz Output level 4 Hz at 4000 MHz Meets 8663A single sideband phase noise specifications 8 3 Performance Tests Req 8 4 uired Test Equipment 5350B Frequency Counter Frequency range 10Hzto20GHz Frequency accuracy 4 Hz at 4000 MHz Includes reference accuracy and counter accuracy MDC 174 RF Mizer M A Com
68. Use 2 press 500 For frequencies gt 500 MHz Uselnput 1 press AUTO Configure the 8648 1 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m 2 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure Frequency Accuracy 1 Set the frequencies shown in the test record 2 For each data point measure the carrier frequency with FM turned off press MOD ON OFF 3 Record the measured frequency in the test record 4 Compute the error difference and compare it to the corresponding limits 9 3 Supplemental Verification Tests CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Test Record e 8648A Table 9 1 8648B Table 9 2 8648C Table 9 3 8648D Table 9 4 8648A Option 1E5 Table 9 5 8648B Option 1E5 Table 9 6 8648C Option 1E5 Table 9 7 8648D Option 1E5 Table 9 8 Table 9 1 8648A Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 0 1 3 3 1 0 10 30 30 1 0 50 150 150 1 0 100 300 300 1 0 500 1500 1500 1 0 1000 3000 3000 1 0 Table 9 2 8648B Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 0 1 3 3 1 0 10 30 30 1 0 50 150 150 1 0 100 300 300 1 0 500 1500 1500 1 0 1000 3000 3000 1 0 2000 6000 6000 1 0 9
69. and Continuous 5 ppmt Data Rate Accuracy FLEX is a trademark of Motorola Inc t Specifications apply over the 25 5 C range Modulation Source Internal 400 Hz or 1 kHz or audio generator see Option 1E2 for characteristics front panel BNC connector provided at nominally 1 Vp into 600 ohms General Storage Registers 70 storage registers with sequence and register number displayed Up to 10 sequences are available with 30 registers each 4 12 Specifications Regulatory Information ISO 9002 Compliant Statement of Compliance Noise Declaration The 8648A B C D signal generators are manufactured in an ISO 9002 registered facility in concurrence with Agilent Technologies commitment to quality This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 348 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Notice for Germany Noise Declaration LpA lt 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz operator position normaler Betrieb normal position nach DIN 45685 19 ISO 7779 Specifications 4 13 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 anufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Ltd Manufactu
70. be sure the supply voltage is within the specified range Replacing the Fuse If a fuse failure is suspected replace the 250 V type F fuse part number 2110 0780 as follows 1 Unplug the power cord from the line module 2 usea flat blade screw driver to pry and unseat the fuse housing from the line module 3 Remove the cartridge and inspect the fuse positioned toward the front of the instrument 3 3 Installation Connecting AC Power Figure 3 1 Replacing the Fuse v fusermvl drw 3 4 Cable Part Number 8120 1351 8120 1703 8120 1369 8120 0696 8120 1378 8120 1521 8120 4753 8120 4754 8120 1689 8120 1692 8120 2104 8120 2296 8120 2956 8120 2957 8120 4211 8120 4600 8120 5182 8120 5181 Plug Description Straight BS 1363A 90 Straight AS 3112 90 Straight NEMA 5 15P 90 Straight NEMA 5 15P Straight CEE 7 VII 90 Straight SEV Type 12 90 Straight SR 107 2 D Straight 83 1 90 Straight 5132 90 E earth ground L line and N neutral b Plug identifier numbers describe the plug only The HP part number is for the complete cable assembly Figure 3 2 Power Cable and Mains Plug Length cm in 229 90 229 90 210 79 200 78 203 80 203 80 229 90 229 90 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78 200 78
71. chapter Procedure Figure 7 14 AM Level FE Test Setup 1 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR pooooooos o 20000000E e Output 8648 UNDER TEST an623a2d Figure 7 15 AM Level FE Test Setup 2 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR 20000000 e DIGITAL MULTIMETER Output 8648 UNDER TEST an624a2d 7 16 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 16 Location of J 31 and J 32 on the Motherboard U B WN A3 Motherboard an619a2d With the line power turned off install the Test Point Extender on J 31 31 pin Lis the rear pin on the right edge of connector J 31 If jumper J 32 is installed on the motherboard remove it Turn on the line power Connect the equi pment as shown above Preset all of the equipment Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC Adjustments Manual Adjustments Predistortion and Detector Offset 8648B C D Only Some versions of hardware do no have the following potentiometers Do not run this adjustment if the potentiometers are not present Description This adjustment sets up the Detector Offset potentiometer on the A10 frequency extension board and the Predistortion potentiometer on the A6 output board while measuring the power at the RF Output connector With the DUT set to 100 MHz the Detector O
72. it is the offset between the reference value and the output power To exit the reference mode press REF ON OFF You can then reset the output power to the desired level 1b 3 Operation Reference Function Function FUNCTION 1 eee FREQUE NCY T AMPLITUDE lt DO Q funckeys drw 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 The RF output frequency range for each model is shown in the following table When making frequency changes the instrument does not turn off the RF output However the power does blank for a few milliseconds when crossing the frequencies at 249 501 1001 1260 1600 2001 2520 and 3200 MHz Model Frequency Range 8648A 100 kHz to 1000 MHz 8648B 9kHz to 2000 MHz 8648C 9 kHz to 3200 MHz 8648D 9 kHz to 4000 MHz Frequency switching typically takes less than 75 ms at frequencies lower then 1001 MHz and less than 100 ms at higher frequencies 1b 4 Operation Reference Function 2 AMPLITUDE The RF output amplitude range is shown in the following table When making amplitude changes the instrument does not turn off the RF output The period of any over or under ranging that may occur during level transitions is typically less than 30 ms Output Amplitude Ranges Model Frequency Range Amplitude 8648A 100
73. the failure is most likely the A3 board Replace the board 616 Description Cause What To Do 617 Description Cause What To Do 618 Description Cause What To Do 619 Description Cause What To Do 620 Description Cause What To Do 625 Description Cause What To Do Service Error Messages AM modulation path failure The AM path detector indicates a failure at the output of the A3 board Either the signal output has failed or the detector has failed Replace the A3 board FM modulation path failure The FM path detector indicates a failure at the output of the board Either the signal output has failed or the detector has failed Replace the A3 board PM modulation path failure The PM path detector indicates a failure at the output of the A3 board Either the signal output has failed or the detector has failed Replace the A3 board modulation 20 dB step failure The 20 dB step attenuator has failed The A3 board has failed Replace the A3 board Comm failure A serial communication failure has occurred with the indicated assemblies Either the A3 controller has failed or the indicated assembly has failed If one assembly has failed check the indicated assembly If multiple failures have occurred check the controller first n either case both the controller and the assembly should be checked ROM checksum failure The A3 controller has detected a mismatch in reading data fr
74. the symbol Setting the Message The message menu looks like the following FREQUENCY 0505005 EE J MESSAGE NO 1 MESSAGE LENGTH 40 0123456 0 Q mE O encode4 MESSAGE NO is defined as the following where X represents the phase setting 0 Arbitrary message set from the external controller using the GPIB capability The data must be entered in units of works Refer to SOU Rce PAGing F ORMat POCSag FLEX FTSARBitrary DE Fine lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt and Using the Buffer Memory for the Arbitrary Messages in Chapter 2 This arbitrary message buffer is divided into multiple segments by assigning 1b 23 Operation Reference Function START BATCH and STOP BATCH in the following menu FREQUENCY NENNEEEEEEEN MODULATON SN AMPLITUDE E START BATCH 000 STOP BATCH 127 1 E Q encode44 cdr The allowable ranges for both are 000 to127 1 Displays 0123456 2 Displays ABCDEFG 3 Displays TEST PAGING POCSSAG 4 Displays ALP
75. 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 66 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 16 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 249 9 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 67 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 16 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 400 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9
76. 10 MHz REF LEDs ok voltages ok OUTPUT ok FAA 05301 EI Power to Voltage Module 1 0 display ok Distribution ok Specifications SESS A 9 6 g 7 chklst c tif 5b 2 Troubleshooting Information AC Mains Line Fuse Removal AC Mains Line Fuse Removal To Remove the Fuse 1 Unplug the power cord from the mains line module 2 Usea flat bladed screw driver Figure 5b 1 to pry loose and unseat the fuse housing from the line module 3 Remove the cartridge and inspect the fuse nearest the front of the instrument Figure 5b 1 Fuse Removal fusermvl drw 5 3 Troubleshooting Information Modulation Test Points and Power Supply LEDs Modulation Test Points and Power Supply LEDs Figure 5b 2 Location Diagram 05 304 5v Q bs 305 5v F1 DS 301 38V 05 302 12V Obs 303 12v sn612a 5 4 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution Power Supply Distribution Figure 5b 3 Bottom View of Motherboard with Cover Removed
77. 151 55 0 1 2 150 152 55 0 12 167 7 55 0 12 172 312 55 0 1 2 227 92 55 0 1 2 232 304 55 0 1 2 241 759 55 0 1 2 241 1000 55 0 1 2 242 274 55 0 1 2 8 84 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 36 DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test Frequency Frequency Limits Hz Frequency Deviation FM Off FM On Uncertainty MHz kHz Hz Hz Lower Measured Upper Hz 100 1 100 100 1 0 100 5 100 100 1 0 100 9 9 100 100 1 0 500 1 100 100 1 0 500 5 100 100 1 0 500 9 9 100 100 1 0 1000 1 100 100 1 0 1000 5 100 100 1 0 1000 9 9 100 100 1 0 1500 2 200 200 1 0 1500 9 9 200 200 1 0 1500 19 9 200 200 1 0 2000 2 200 200 1 0 2000 9 9 200 200 1 0 2000 19 9 200 200 1 0 8 85 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74
78. 1EP Only 1a 30 1b Operation Reference This chapter describes each of the instrument s functions including all of the front panel keys the rear panel connectors and the optional remote interface and memory interface This information is presented in the same functional groups as the front panel key functional groupings NOTE Option 1EP adds a pager encoder capability to the standard functions Consequentl y the front panel of the Option instrument is different from the standard instrument s front panel The green and blue labels are incorporated for the pager encoding settings only Therefore these keys have multiple functions on instruments with Option 1b 1 Operation Reference Frequency and Amplitude Frequency and Amplitude 1 2 3 4 treqkeys drw The knob and reference set keys work similarly for both frequency and amplitude settings 1 Knob Turn the knobs to increment or decrement the frequency and amplitude settings The knobs are always active when the instrument is in local operation If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the knob in the AMPLITUDE ENCODER block is used to select the desired setting for each pager encoder parameter 2 Digit Select Arrow Keys Press these digit select arrow keys to select the digit to be changed with the knob NOTE The knobs increment th
79. 2 5 Service This chapter provides procedures for troubleshooting your instrument to the assembly level It is organized in four sections Chapter 5 introductory information shipping instructions complete list of equipment required for all adjustments and performance tests post repair instructions safety notes Chapter 5a simplified block diagram of instrument s operati on theory of operation for each major assembly Chapter 5b troubleshooting checklist acmains line fuse removal modulation test points and power supply LEDs diagram power supply distribution diagram instrument block diagram Chapter 5c service error messages including description of the error possible causes and resolutions 5 1 Service Shipping Your Instrument Back to Agilent Technologies Shipping Your Instrument Back to Agilent Technologies If it becomes necessary to ship your instrument back to Agilent Technologies use the original packaging or something comparable that provides sufficient padding to protect the instrument See Chapter 3 Installation for more detailed packaging information Fill out a blue repair tag and attach it to the instrument Repair tags are located at the end of this manual behind the index A list of Agilent Technologies offices is located at the front of this book 5 2 Service Recommended Test Equipment Recommended Test Equipment The fol
80. 2 150 148 55 0 12 150 149 55 0 12 150 151 55 0 1 2 150 152 55 0 12 167 7 55 0 12 172 312 55 0 1 2 227 92 55 0 1 2 232 304 55 0 1 2 241 759 55 0 1 2 241 1000 55 0 1 2 242 274 55 0 1 2 8 110 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 61 DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test Frequency Frequency Limits Hz Frequency Deviation FM Off FM On Uncertainty MHz kHz Hz Hz Lower Measured Upper Hz 100 1 100 100 1 0 100 5 100 100 1 0 100 9 9 100 100 1 0 500 1 100 100 1 0 500 5 100 100 1 0 500 9 9 100 100 1 0 1000 1 100 100 1 0 1000 5 100 100 1 0 1000 9 9 100 100 1 0 1500 2 200 200 1 0 1500 9 9 200 200 1 0 1500 19 9 200 200 1 0 2000 2 200 200 1 0 2000 9 9 200 200 1 0 2000 19 9 200 200 1 0 2500 4 400 400 1 0 2500 19 9 400 400 1 0 2500 39 9 400 400 1 0 3200 4 400 400 1 0 3200 19 9 400 400 1 0 3200 39 9 400 400 1 0 8 111 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0
81. 28 ENTER P7195 Value 28 Epp BIHAHD Value 12 40 IF 1 RPP is engaged IF 1 THEH Iz reverse power input corrected YH BE IF RE Y THEH GUTPUTP 13 STAT OH T Line 10 Queries the condition of the POWer register Line 20 Enters the condition of the POWer register into the variable Value Line 30 Uses the HP BASIC command BINAND to check the contents of bit 0 in Value If bit 0 is a 1 Rpp will equal 1 Line 40 Checks if the RPP condition is 1 and if true prints that the RPP is engaged Line 50 Checks if RPP condition is 1 and if true asks if the situation has been corrected Line 60 Checks if the answer was yes to correction and if true turns the RF output on to reset the RPP Unspecified Power Amplitude Entry Status This instrument provides a message if an amplitude entry is requested above 10 dBm and less than or equal to 13 dBm or if an attenuator hold range is exceeded see operating part of manual When an unspecified amplitude is entered the front panel display will read Amplitude exceeds specified range but must be queried for GPIB reporting Example Check the Condition of Unspecified Power Entry OUTPUT 719 STAT QUES POM COND in ENTER Fist Value Fou spec BIHAHD Value 4G IF Pow zpec z THEH Amplitude unspecified S8 Line 10 Queries t
82. 3 BUSY This light is turned on while memory registers are being copied from one device to another Attempting to operate the instrument or memory interface while this light is on may cause the memory data to be corrupted The light will turn off when the copy is complete 1b 53 Operation Reference Function 1b 54 1 Operation messages This chapter provides descriptions for both front panel and GPIB operation messages For information about service messages numbered 500 and above refer to Chapter 5c Service Error Messages 1c 1 Operation messages Front Panel Operation Messages Front Panel Operation Messages SEQ X SAVE __ XXX registers available This message is displayed when the SAV key is pressed to inform you of how many registers are still available If a register is available enter the two digit number of the register you wish to save SEQ X REG XXX has not been saved This messageis displayed when an attempt is madeto recall a register that has not been saved in the sequence Check to be sure that the appropriate sequence is selected and that you have entered the correct register number SEQ X DEL Enter number to delete This message is displayed when the DEL key is pressed Enter the number of the memory register you wish to delete When a register is deleted the settings saved in it are erased and the register number is removed from the sequence SEQ X has no registers saved in it This me
83. 3 TheHP8648 Motherboard Repair Utility window is displayed so that the instrument information can be edited and stored the motherboard Refer to Figure Edit the information in this window to reflect the actual changes SAHP8648 Motherboard Repair Utility establish communication with the DUT Enter the DUT current address Enter the desired Serial Number 3538401234 Please enter the HP IB address to Enter the desired A11 Attenuator Numbers Last 4 digits of 5 digit Serial part number number Progress Indicator BORO Get Data Send Data Cancel 7 60 Select the desired Model lt gt lt gt HP8B548C lt gt HP8B548D 1E2 y Select the installed Options C 1E5 O O RF REMAINS IN SAME STATE AUDIO OSCILLATOR HIGH STABILITY TIMEBASE PULSE MODULATION HIGH POWER PAGER ENCODER Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Instrument Serial Number 1 Enter the complete serial number of the instrument that has been changed Instrument Model Number 2 Select the model number of the instrument that has been changed Only one model number may be selected Attenuator ID Number 3 For 8648B C D models only enter the last four digits of the 11 attenuator serial number For 8648A these fields are given a default state of not applicable N AO and may not be changed Opt
84. 30 STATe STATe ON OFF 1110 Turns AM modulation ON or OFF AM is not turned on by just setting AM DEPTh Turning AM modulation ON will not automatically turn OFF any other types of modulation Turning any or all modulation types ON or OFF must be done explicitly If a modulation type is turned ON while another modulation type is ON an execution error 221 is generated and the state of the instrument is unchanged RST value is OFF SOURce SOURce INTernal 1 EXTernal EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Selects AM source value is INTernal INTernal2 is the internal Option 1E2 Modulation Generator EXTernal COUPling COUPling DC Sets source coupling for AM The GROund parameter defined by the 1991 SCPI Command Reference 17 1 9 2 is not supported RST value is DC INTernal 1 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets the frequency of the AM internal signal source Legal values are 400 Hz and 1 kHz RST value 15 1 kHz INTernal2 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets the AM modulation frequency using the internal audio generator in the Option 1EP and the internal modulation generator in the Option 1 2 Legal values are 20 Hz to 10 kHz for the Option 1EP and 10 Hz to 20 kHz for the Option 1E2 RST value is 1 kHz GPIB Programming 2 21 CAL Subsystem DM Subsystem Option LEP Only Note 2 22 GPIB Programming INTernal2 FUNCtion
85. 32 Configure the Power Meter sods wep Laco Cb PERRA pex ak b ded d 8 32 Configure the SGABBICID ki RR Gu A C KORG ADR Kb Kn OR RR 8 32 Measure High Level Power Accuracy lt 13 4 8 32 Test Record TES RA IER 8 32 Contigurethe 8648 Option IEA ccs ka E 8 33 Measure the High Power Level 8 33 PEREO sinc oie eae dane eh eee hae ea gee 8 34 Configure the Power Meter i vei ec ace ERE Foe ds ceed eee se eee vedas PE 8 34 Measure Low Level Power accuracy 20 dBm 8 34 Test RECO xxx EK eR Peeks ewe TER TEER E REE ES EERE 8 34 Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E6 Only 8 35 Connect the Test Equipment ssis iste paseo ewe pue ceeds ceed PERO PEE 8 35 Configure the SpecirumaAnalyze siia 8 35 Configure the 648 2 ERU E Gcr ERNE EEA ke PEER SOUTER 8 35 Measure the ONON Rat Gis aa sudes a ida Saned da EE X a I a FE pean 8 36 Test Record TERRE SAG RE Hees 8 36 Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1 6 8 37 C
86. 3836A 3836U 08648 60186 1 OUTPUT ASSEMBLY Serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U 08647 69032 1 EXCHANGE OUTPUT ASSEMBLY KIT Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 08648 69186 1 EXCHANGE OUTPUT ASSEMBLY KIT Serial prefixes 2 3847A 3847U 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A6 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A6 A7 08647 61803 1 1GHZATTENUATOR KIT 08647 69803 1 EXCHANGE ATTENUATOR KIT A9 9135 0270 1 FILTERED LINE MODULE 0361 1265 2 RIVETS HOLDS 9 TO MP1 14 08648 60126 1 AUDIO GENERATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E2 08648 69126 1 EXCHANGE AUDIO GENERATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY OPTION 1 2 08648 60374 1 AUDIO GENERATOR UPGRADE KIT OPTION 1E2 A30 08648 60030 1 PAGER ENCODER ASSEMBLY OPTION 6 6 Replaceable Parts 8648A Replaceable Parts Table 6 1 8648A Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description 08648 69030 1 EXCHANGE PAGER ENCODER ASSEMBLY OPTION 1 B1 3160 0866 1 FAN TBAX F1 2110 0780 1 FUSE 250 V NOT SHOWN MP1 08647 61025 1 ASSEMBLY CHASSIS KIT For serial prefixes 3836A 3836U also order 08647 61030 MP2 08647 00026 1 COVER CARDBOX MP3 08647 00030 1 COVER MOTHERBOARD MP4 08647 00031 1 COVER RF MP5 08647 00020 1 MOUNT POWER SUPPLY MP6 08648 00012 1 CLAMP MEMORY BOARD BRACKET MP7 NOT ASSIGNED MP8 08647 00028 1 COVER INSTRUMENT MP9 5041 3621 1
87. 4 Supplemental Verification Tests CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Table 9 3 8648C Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 0 1 3 3 1 0 10 30 30 1 0 50 150 150 1 0 100 300 300 1 0 500 1500 1500 1 0 1000 3000 3000 1 0 2000 6000 6000 1 0 3000 9000 9000 1 0 3200 9600 9600 1 0 Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 0 1 3 3 1 0 10 30 30 1 0 50 150 150 1 0 100 300 300 1 0 500 1500 1500 1 0 1000 3000 3000 1 0 2000 6000 6000 1 0 3000 9000 9000 1 0 3200 9600 9600 1 0 4000 12000 12000 1 0 Table 9 4 8648D Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Supplemental Verification Tests CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Table 9 5 8648A Option 1E5 Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 2 0 2 0 1 0 50 8 0 8 0 1 0 100 15 0 15 0 1 0 500 75 0 75 0 1 0 1000 150 150 1 0 Table 9 6 8648B Option 1E5 Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz
88. 400 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 6 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 8 132 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 81 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz Rad Lower Measured Upper 0 250 5 0 1 0 26 100 5 0 1 0 26 400 5 0 1 0 26 500 5 0 1 0 26 750 5 0 1 0 26 1000 5 0 1 0 26 Table 8 82 PhaseModulation Distortion Performance Test Part 2 Limits RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648D 8663A 8902A Rad MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 15 7 0 1 0 26 2000 2001 5 15 7 0 1 0 26 2500 2501 5 15 14 0 1 0 26 3200 2500 700 14 0 1 0 26 3800 2500 1300 14 0 1 0 26 8 133 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 83 Residual FM Performance Test Limits Hz RF Frequency LO Frequency Input Frequency Uncertainty 8648D 8663A 8902A Upper Measured Hz MHz MHz MHz 10 11 5 700 7 0 45 100 101 5 700 7 0 45 248 249 5 700 7 0 45 251 252 5 700 4 0 35 400 401 5 700 4 0 35 501 502 5 700 7 0 45 750 751 5 700 7 0 45 1000 1001 5 700 7 0 45 1500 1501 5 700 14 0 75 2500 2501 5 700 28 1 5 2750 250
89. 47 7 48 7 49 emf 1b 33 ENTER 1b 32 environment 3 9 equipment required 5 3 performance tests 8 3 supplemental verification tests 9 2 European Community trademark v exiting software 7 57 EXT AC 1b 45 EXT DC 1b 45 extender test point 7 2 external pulse input 1b 50 external source 1b 46 F fan part number 6 6 6 12 filter path adjustment 7 35 firmware output part number 6 6 firmware upgrade kit part number 6 3 6 12 FM 1b 5 frequency 1 3 1b 4 frequency extension adjustment 7 20 theory of operation 5a 14 frequency extension kit part number 6 12 front frame kit part number 6 3 front panel theory of operation 5a 5 FSK deviation adjustment 7 34 fuse 3 3 G GPIB 1b 38 address 1b 38 GPIB cable 7 2 grounding 3 3 H HF power level accuracy adjustment 7 28 1b 45 humidity 3 6 INCR SET 1 5 ranges 1b 31 installation 3 1 connect power cable 3 3 replacing the fuse 3 3 shipping the signal generator 3 9 storing the signal generator 3 8 turn on the signal generator 3 6 unpack 3 2 installing the software 7 37 instruction manual symbol v instrument preset settings 1b 34 INT 1kHz 16 44 INT400 Hz 1b 44 interface bus 7 2 internal reference oscillator adjustment 7 5 ISM 1 A symbol vi K keyboard theory of operation 5a 5 knob 1b 2 L level modulation 1b 46 RF output 1b 5 LF output level adjustment 7 31 Index Index LF
90. 6 Click Remove 32 7 Click Close 33 Adding Datapacks The addition of datapacks is accomplished using the Datapacks dialog box The Datapacks window allows for the addition of datapacks for the test procedures being used to verify the performance of the DUT Follow these instructions to add a datapack 1 Login 2 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 7 50 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Select Datapacks from the File drop down menu Datapacks wk794a 4 Click Add 35 5 Usingthe standard file search procedure select the datapack that you are adding and dick OK The selected datapack should now be displayed in the Datapacks dialog box 6 Click Close 37 Removing Datapacks Removing datapacks is accomplished using the Datapacks dialog box 1 Login 2 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 7 51 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Select Datapacks from the File drop down menu Datapacks wk796a 4 Select the datapack dp file to be removed 38 5 Click Remove 39 6 Click Close 40 7 52 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Running the Service Support Software Starting the Software For MS Windows version 3 x 1 Open the Program Manager window 2 Open the Agilent Service Support program group 3 Select the Agilent Service Support icon For MS Windows 95 98 NT 1 Select Start 2 Select Agilent
91. 8 9 10 111 8 9 140 11 Segment No GPIB Capabilities The instrument is designed to be compatible with a controller that interfaces in terms of the bus codes summarized in the table This table describes each of the interface functions that are available with this instrument as defined by the IEEE 488 2 1987 Table 2 3 IEEE 488 2 Capabilities 3 Tristate 1 Mbps max Controller Electrical Interface GPIB Programming 2 43 GPIB Connector Information General Purpose Interface Bus Signal Ground Shield Connect to earth ground P O Twisted Pair With 11 ATN Should be grounded 10 SRQ near termination of P O Twisted Pair With 9 IFC other wire of twisted P O Twisted Pair With 8 NDAC pair P O Twisted Pair With 7 NRFD b P O Twisted Pair With 6 DAV REN DIO8 DIO4 DIO7 DIO3 DIO6 DIO2 DIO5 DIO1 jies Isometric Thread M3 5 x 0 6 24 Pin Micro Ribbon Series 57 Connector Logic Levels The General Purpose Interface Bus Logic levels are TTL compatible that is the true 1 state is 0 0 Vdc to 0 4 Vdc and the false state 0 is 2 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc Mating Connector 1251 0293 Amphenol 57 30240 Mating Cables Available 10833A 1 meter 3 3 ft 10833B 2 meter 6 8 ft 10833C 4 meter 13 2 ft 10833D 0 5 meter 1 6 ft Cabling Restrictio
92. 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 Table 8 73 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 RF LO Input Limits kHz Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Uncertainty 8648D 8663A 8902A kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2500 2501 5 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 2500 2501 5 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3200 2500 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 3200 2500 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3800 2500 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 3800 2500 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 8 124 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 74 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1 2 Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 67
93. 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 86 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 249 9 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 87 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 400 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 49 0 22 15
94. 90 84 96 1 0 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 70 65 75 0 8 400 90 84 96 1 0 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 70 65 75 0 8 700 90 84 96 1 0 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 70 65 75 0 8 1000 90 84 96 1 0 8 57 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 8 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 70 65 75 1 5 2 90 84 96 1 9 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 70 65 75 0 8 248 90 84 96 1 0 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 70 65 75 0 8 400 90 84 96 1 0 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 70 65 75 0 8 700 90 84 96 1 0 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 70 65 75 0 8 1000 90 84 96 1 0 8 58 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 9 AM Accuracy Option 1E2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 70 65 75 1 5 2 90 84 96 1 9 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 70 65 75 0 8 248 90 84 96 1 0 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 70 65 75 0 8 400 90 84 96 1 0 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 70 65 75 0 8 700 90 84 96 1 0 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 10
95. ARES SRE ERSTE SCR Y ROC N SEC RR 1b 34 gt T D acp a Eh we a ed 1b 38 MeV aces UPPER DERE TORE STORET OHS 1b 39 Modulation SOUS o Eo ed OI pe d 1b 43 QUEDUE iras gue YO bu CERRO RUE AO OUR CR Eee whe R 1b 47 ETE CETTE TOO E D EDIT 3 EE EE TN 1b 49 Remote Interface Accessory 0 n 1b 51 Memory Interface Accessory Lau roca xd X Xa ao ee OR CA GE oe els 1b 53 1c Operation messages Front Panel Operation Messages scans cR RR REOR ERROR deans KATE RI S AUR CAR 1c2 GPIB Command M siis uud eds s RR CR iios RU X ea 1c 5 GPIB 1c8 GPIB Device Specific EFO S usd uc aceto Rice th Hes glos eo 1c9 GPIB QUAY EVO Sucks ok tae ico ur deat teen 1c10 ceci osi m RT EIS 1c 11 2 GPIB Programming Pe EC P Tcp 2 1 Programming Guidelines za eee Gh aed dad Rad idee bebe 2 2 GPE DEMIO en deed Rk PORES GAN dee Aol 2 2 What is Programmes s sas hate a phe Ion BREN 2 2 PEUT 2 2 Error MESIO dor qi ate dor deor ador qd i ate Reefer se ite 2 2 Programming cnc ide egies ehe doa qu Gude ga Roe
96. Codes continued Recall 0 9 Feature Implemented Recall 0 99 Reverse Power Protection Reset Standby On RF Off Feature Implemented Feature Implemented Feature Not Implemented Feature Not Implemented Function Feature Not Implemented RF On Function Feature Implemented RF Dead Full Attenuator Function Feature Implemented Sequence Feature Implemented Save 0 9 Feature Implemented Save 0 99 Feature Implemented External Modulation Source Source Qualifier Implemented Internal 400 Hz Modulation Source Source Qualifier Implemented Internal 1 kHz Modulation Source Source Qualifier Implemented Modulation Source Off Source Qualifier Implemented DC FM Function Entry Implemented Step Up 1 Function Feature Implemented pV Units Entry Implemented Volts Units Entry Implemented Numerals 0 9 Data Entries Implemented Minus Sign Data Entry Implemented Decimal Point Data Entry Implemented Percent Units Entry Implemented Program codes can be either upper or lower case T Either PC or can be used The source of reverse power must be removed 8 The 8648 does not implement this command but if R2 is received R5 is executed GPIB Programming 2 47 Receiving the Clear The signal generator responds to a clear message by presetting the Message _ instrume
97. D 2500 MHz 13 to 136 dBm lt 4000 MHz 10 to 136 dBm Maximum Leveled Option 1EA Option 1EA and 1E6 100 kHz 17 dBm 13 dBm 100 MHz 20 dBm 13 dBm typically 16 dBm 1000 MHz 20 dBm 18 dBm lt 1500 MHz 19 dBm 17 dBm lt 2100 MHz 17 dBm 15 dBm lt 2500 MHz 15 dBm 13 dBm lt 4000 MHz 13 dBm 11 dBm Typical for f lt 250 kHz Combining Option 1E6 with 1EA reduces output levels by 2 dB below 100 MHz only 13 dBm typically 16 dBm is specified DBM B 15 24 3200 4002 FREQUENCY MHz Figure 4 1 Typical Output Power with Option LEA Specifications 4 3 Display Resolution 0 1 dB Accuracy 11 gt 100 4 lt 100 4 f lt 100 kHz 1 0 dB 3 0 dB f lt 2500 MHz 1 0 dB 1 0 dB f lt 3200 MHz 1 5 dB 3 0 dB f lt 4000 MHz 2 0 dB 3 0 dB Accuracy is valid from maximum specified output power to 127 dBm Below 127 dBm accuracy is typically 3 0 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 2500 MHz and is not specified for frequencies outside of this range t Accuracy applies at 25 5 C and typically degrades up to 0 5 dB over 0 to 50 C or at output power levels gt 13 dBm i Accuracy is typical for fc lt 250 kHz Reverse power protection 2000 MHz 50 watts into 50 ohms 4000 MHz 25 watts into 50 ohms SWR output 6 dBm typical 249 kHz 2500 MHz lt 4000 MHz Spectral Purity dtd idi i e
98. ENAB NR1 Returns contents of enabled event registers for frequency extension calibration STAT QUES CAL FEXT ENAB Returns contents of the pager encoding condition register Option 1EP STAT QUES PAG COND STAT QUES PAG ENAB NR1 Enables NR1 event registers for pager encoding Option 1EP STAT QUES PAG EN AB Returns contents of enabled event registers for pager encoding Option 1EP SYST LANG COMP SCPI STAT QUES PAG EVEN Sets the signal generator to 8656 57 compatible or SCPI language Returns any system error message SYST ERR SYST VERS Returns a formatted numeric value corresponding to the SCPI version number for which the instrument complies 2 10 GPIB Programming Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions continued atenieni IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Resets the signal generator to a default state see SCPI Command Reference Returns the instruments identity Executes an instrument self test WAI Instrument waits until previous commands are completed CLS ESE dec num data Clears status and event registers Enables Standard Event Status Register bits Queries the Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE Queries the Standard Event Status Register ESR Enables the Operation Complete bit of the Standard Event Status Regi
99. Inc Frequency range RF and LO ports 1MHzto 2800 MHz Frequency range IF port 1MHzto2000 MHz Maximum input LO port 26 dBm MDC 164 RF Mizer M A Com Inc 8648C D only Frequency range RF andLO ports 500MHzto 9000 MHz Frequency range IF port 10MHzto2000 MHz Maximum input LO port 24 dBm 438 Power Meter Instrumentation accuracy 0 5 Power reference accuracy 0 95 8481D Option H70 Power Sensor Frequency range 100 kHz to 4 2 GHz Power range 70dBmto 20 dBm Maximum SWR 100 2 300 2 1 12 300kHzto2GHz 1 1 15 2GHzto4 2GHz 1 1 4 Power linearity 30to 20 dBm 1 Cal factor accuracy lt 1 6 8482A Power Sensor Frequency range 100 kHz to 4 2 GHz Power range 30 dBm to 13 dBm Maximum SWR 100 kHz to 300 kHz 1 1 6 300 kHzto 1 MHz 1 1 12 1 MHzto2 GHz 1 1 1 2 GHzto 4 2 GHz 1 1 1 Performance Tests Required Test Equipment Cal factor accuracy RSS lt 1 6 8491A B Option 006 6dB Attenuator no substitute 8493A Option 010 10 dB Attenuator no substitute 11722A Sensor Module no substitute 8116A Pulse F unction Generator for use with 8648B C D Option 1E6 only Frequency 10MHz Dutycyde 50 Output TTL square wave 54100A Oscilloscope for use with 8648B C D Option 1E6 only Bandwidth 1GHz 5334B Option 010 Universal counter for use with 8648A Option 1EP only Frequency accu
100. Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 2 0 2 0 1 0 50 8 0 8 0 1 0 100 15 0 15 0 1 0 500 75 0 75 0 1 0 1000 150 150 1 0 2000 300 300 1 0 Supplemental Verification Tests CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Table 9 7 8648C Option 1E5 Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 2 0 2 0 1 0 50 8 0 8 0 1 0 100 15 0 15 0 1 0 500 75 0 75 0 1 0 1000 150 150 1 0 2000 300 300 1 0 3000 450 450 1 0 3200 480 480 1 0 Limits Hz Frequency Uncertainty MHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 2 0 2 0 1 0 50 8 0 8 0 1 0 100 15 0 15 0 1 0 500 75 0 75 0 1 0 1000 150 150 1 0 2000 300 300 1 0 3000 450 450 1 0 3200 480 480 1 0 4000 600 600 1 0 Table 9 8 8648D Option 1E5 Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Supplemental Verification Tests 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 9 2 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Equipment Setup 3458A DIGITAL MULTIMETER 500 RESISTOR on67bd Configure the Multimeter DMM e Function ACV Range AUTO Connect the Positive and Ground leads
101. PAG FLEX FTD CODE string 2 8 GPIB Programming Modulation continued Starts encoding Stops encoding Sets the number of transmissions Count 1 and collapse cycle 0 represent single mode Counts 0 to 255 represent burst mode Count 0 represents continuous mode Sets DM modulation to FSK2 or FSK4 Sets DM modulation on or off Sets DM modulation deviation Sets DM modulation polarity to normal or inverse Sets DM modulation filter on or off Sets the pager format to POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD RESYNC or PN15 Sets the data rate for the specified pager format Selects the message to be encoded Sets the user definable message Sets the message length Sets the arbitrary message Sets the start frame FLEX FLEX TD or start batch POCSAG Sets the stop frame FLEX FLEX TD or stop batch POCSAG Sets the type of message to be sent Sets the type of numeric message Sets the number of numeric vectors to be sent Sets the cycle number for FLEX FLEX TD Sets the frame number for FLEX FLEX TD Returns the current cycle number during encoding Returns the current frame number during encoding Sets the phase for FLEX FLEX TD Sets the collapse cycle for FLEX FLEX TD Sets the pager code for FLEX FLEX TD format The frame phase collapse cycle and short long address are automatically determined TRIG COUN DM FORM DM STAT DM DEV DM POL DM FILT STAT PAG SEL PAG POCS FLEX FT
102. PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD ISTop STATe STATe ON OFF 1 110 Sets the instrument behavior as follows when a stop event occurs RST value is OFF ON 1 Terminates the encoder signal output immediately OFF 0 Terminates the encoder signal output just before the next instance the pager is on If TERMinator STATe is set to ON the encoder generates the asynchronous frame when the pager is on HEADer STATe STATe ON OFF 1 110 Sets the header on or off Header is the idle frame which is sent before the actual message RST value is ON TERMinator STATe STATe ON OFF 110 Sets the terminator on or off Terminator is the asynchronous frame which is sent at the end of the message stream RST value is ON VECTor VECTor STANdard SPECial Sets the type of numeric message RST value is STANdard STANdard Displays the received numeric message on the pager under test SPECial Converts the received numeric message to the pre defined message and displays it on the pager under test HBINary HBINary BIT1 BIT8 BIT16 Sets the bits per character of HEX Binary message RST value is BITI BIT1 1 bit per character BIT8 8 bits per character BIT16 16 bits per character GPIB Programming 2 33 2 34 GPIB Programming SOURce PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD DCALI STATe STATe ON OFF 1 110 Sets the dummy call function to ON or OFF RST value is OFF ON Activate
103. PRINT Ext Mod Input High Low Detected 58 OUTPUT 71393 eC END Line 10 Enables bits 0 and 1 decimal equivalent 3 in the MODulation register Enabling these bits masks other bits in the MODulation register from reporting their status in the summary bit to QUEStionable Line 20 Enables bit 7 decimal equivalent 128 in the QUEStionable register Enabling this bit masks other bits in the QUEStionable register from reporting their status in the summary bit to STATus Line 30 Enables bit 3 decimal equivalent 8 of the STATus register Enabling this bit masks other bits from reporting Line 40 Uses the HP BASIC command SPOLL Serial Poll to see if the service request bit is reporting any interrupts Line 50 Clears all status registers Clearing the status registers is not absolutely necessary but is used here because of the unknown state of the instrument GPIB Programming 2 15 Reverse Power Protection Status 2 16 GPIB Programming This instrument provides protection from signals inadvertently applied to the RF output of the instrument This protection is commonly called reverse power protection RPP The instrument automatically detects the reverse power which in turn disconnects the instrument s RF output When the RPP engages the front panel display will read RF OFF but must be queried for GPIB reporting Example Check the condition of the RPP OUTPUT STATIGUES POH COHOT
104. SSID CCOD value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID TMF value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID FOFF lt value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID ADDR value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID CHAN value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID AREA value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID MULT value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID TMF value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID FOFF lt value PAG FTD REP value PAG FLEX FTD VECT PAG FLEX FTD HBIN Sets the bits per character of HEX Binary message Sets the dummy call on or off PAG FLEX FTD DCAL STAT PAG FLEX FTD DCAL ADDR 1 2 PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SEL PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID LID PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID CZON PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID CCOD PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID TMF PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID FOFF PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID ADDR PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID CHAN PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID AREA PAG FLEX F TD ROAM NID MULT PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID TMF PAG FLEX FTD ROAM NID FOFF PAG FTD REP PAG FTD RCO Sets the dummy call address 1 and 2 Selects the roaming mode Sets the SSID local ID of the pager Sets the SSID coverage zone of the pager Sets the SSID country code of the pager Sets the SSID traffic management flag Sets the SSID frame offset Sets the NID address Sets each RF channel of the NID roaming Sets the NID area code Sets the extension of Network Address Set
105. Test Equipment e 5316B Frequency Counter 5071A primary Frequency Standard Procedure Turn off power to the signal generator 2 Set therear panel TIMEBASE ADJ UST switch toon 1 SeeFigure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Timebase Adjust Switch Location T joooooooooooooooQ 10 MHz REF 10 MHz AUXI DISPLAY INPUT OUTPUT GONTRAST ILLIARY f f S INTERFACE c an66abe 3 Turn on power tothe signal generator and wait for the self tests to run 4 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 7 3 The DUT is the signal generator under test Figure 7 3 Internal Reference Oscillator Adjustment Setup DUT COUNTER FREQUENCY STANDARD External RF Output RF pes ire an627a2d 7 5 Adjustments Manual Adjustments 5 Follow the instructions on the signal generator s display and adjust the knobs until the frequency counter reads 100 MHz within 1 Hz resolution 6 When the adjustment is complete turn off the signal generator 7 Set the rear panel TIMEBASE ADJ UST switch to off 0 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Pager Encoder Timebase Frequency Adjustment Use this procedure to adjust the pager encoder timebase frequency Required Test Equipment 5334B Option 010 Universal Counte
106. To Do 5c 6 200 kHz reference missing at synth The A5 module indicates that the 200 kHz reference signal from the A4 module is not being detected Either the A4 module has failed to output the 200 kHz reference signal or the A5 module is failing to detect the signal Check the 200 kHz reference output of the A4 module at the input to the A5 module Reference out of lock at 10 MHz The module indicates that the 10 MHz reference VCO is out of lock Either the A4 module has failed or a bad external referenceis connected Disconnect any external reference and power up the instrument again or replace the A4 module if the error is still present with no external reference out of lock at 1 GHz Referenc The module indicates that the 1 GHz reference is out of lock Either the A4 module has failed or a bad external reference is connected Replace the A4 module 400 Hz modulation source failed The A3 board indicates that the 400 Hz modulation source is not present Either the 200 kHz reference signal from the A4 module has failed or the A3 has failed Check the 200 kHz reference output of the A4 module at the input to the A3 board 1 kHz modulation source failed The board indicates that the 1 kHz modulation source is not present Either the 200 kHz reference signal from the A4 modulation source has failed or the A3 board has failed H owever if the 400 Hz modulation source has already been tested
107. Types AUDIO ANALYZER DIGITAL OLT METER FUNCTION GENERATOR 6 Models HP8903A Equipment 18 p wk799a 20 7 45 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 1 Select the Device Type of the test equipment to be removed 15 Select the serial number of the test equipment to be removed from the Equipment field 17 Click Remove 18 4 Click Close 19 Editing Test Equipment Editing test equipment parameters is accomplished using the Test Equipment dialog box Test Equipment B Device Types AUDIO ANALYZER DIGITAL OLT METER FUNCTION GENERATOR 6 Models wk799a 20 Select the Device of the test equipment to be edited 15 Select the model of the test equipment to be edited from the Models field 16 Select the serial number of the test equipment to be edited 17 Click Edit 20 Change the field parameters as necessary Click OK 12 Click Close 19 Adding Device Drivers CAUTION The following three procedures Adding Removing Device Test E qui pment Drivers Adding Removing Test Drivers and Adding Removing Datapacks are included for informational purposes These procedures should only be 7 46 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software used when instructions are provided describing which drivers or datapacks need replacement or removal Follow these instructions to add test equipment drivers to the program 1 Log into the softwar
108. as well The following table shows an example of the conversion from capcodes to the parameters Note that the values of COLLAPSE CYCLE and FRAME are changed Capcode ADDRESS ADDRESS1 ADDRESS2 FRAME PHASE COLLAPSE TYPE CYCLE A0012477 SHORT 0045245 None 011 4 2A0012477 SHORT 0045245 None 011 2 1272A0012477 SHORT 0045245 None 127 2 1b 13 Operation Reference Function DUMMY CALL inserts a message with all 5s in all non call phases This is required by the FLEX TD standard RCR STD 34A for sensitivity testi ng ON Default setting Activates the dummy call function for equalizing the FSK deviation An address for the non call phases must be set OFF Does not activate the dummy call function Idle frames are set in the non call phases The address menu will display the following information gt FREQUENCY MENS MODULATION EH AMPLITUDE iu ADDRESS TYPE SHORT ADDRESS1 0045245 encode41 cdr oojji ADDRESS TYPE selects the address length SHORT Short address LONG L ong address ADDRESS1 is the 7 digit short address or the primary address of the long address ADDRESS2 is the 7 digit secondary address of the long address This is displaye
109. at the home area 0 to 63 RST value is 0 NID ADDRess ADDRess lt NR1 gt Sets the NID address 2058240 to 2062335 RST value is 2058240 CHANnel CHANnel lt NR1 gt Sets the RF channel number 0 to 7 RST value is 0 AREA AREA lt NR1 gt Sets the service area identification 0 to 31 RST value is 0 MULTiplier MULTiplier lt NR1 gt Sets how much the network address is extended 0 to 7 RST value is 0 TMF TMF lt NR1 gt Sets the NID traffic management flag 0 to 15 RST value is 2 GPIB Programming 2 35 Note 2 36 GPIB Programming For FLEX TD only SOURce PAGing FORMat FTD REPeat REPeat lt NR1 gt Sets the number of repeats 0 to 3 RST value is 0 RCOunt Returns the current number of repeats during encoding For POCSAG SOURce PAGing FORMat POCSag TYPE TYPE TONE NUMeric ALPHanumeric ALPH7 ALPH8 Sets the type of message RST value is NUMeric ALPH7 and ALPH8 are entered in hex binary codes and can be used for displaying two byte characters for example Chinese characters through a conversion table Refer to POCSAG in Chapter 1b FUNCtion FUNCtion lt NR1 gt Sets the POCSAG function bit 0 200 1 201 2 210 3 11 RST value is O CODE CODE lt NR1 gt Sets the 7 digit pager capcode address for POCSAG RST value is 0000000 PM Subsystem SOURce PM DEViat
110. cable connections these connections are required to perform the automated tests and adjustments Test Point E xtender One additional adapter is required to perform the adjustments Several adjustments use J 31 as test point on the motherboard of the DUT The adapter is used to extend the 31 test point so that it can be accessed for the adjustments The 31 Test Point Extender part number 08648 60175 and service support software can be obtained together by ordering part number 08648 60180 You can also build the 31 Test Point Extender by using the following instructions J 3lisa six pin connector on the motherboard The text point extender consists of a six pin connector housing attached to six crimped wires that will plug into 31 The six wires should be of different colors sothat you can differentiate between the wires with just a glance A good method of differentiating between the wires is by using the resistor color code values to identify the pin number For example the value of orange the resistor color code is 3 so the orange wire is connected as pin of the test point extender Adjustments Test Equipment The recommended part numbers for the test point extender are shown below Table 7 1 31 Test Point Extender Parts List Description Part Quantity Number Connector housing 6 pin 1251 5981 1 Crimp connectors 1251 5216 6 Wire 22AWG brown color code value 1 8150 0007 1 foot Wire 22AWG
111. f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 38 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 13 12 14 0 15 10 9 11 0 15 4 3 5 0 15 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 15 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 12 NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 39 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 249 9 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 400 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 999 9 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 1500 19 17 5 20 5 0 23 NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the 8 92 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 40 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test with Option 1EA and 1E6 Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 13 11 5 14 5 0 23 249 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 400 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 999 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 1500 17 15 5 18 5 0 23 NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test
112. from the Input 2 Wire connector across a 50Q resistor 1 4 W 0 196 tolerance Configure the 8648 Set the frequency press FREQUENCY 9 kHz e Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 10 dBm Connect the BNC cabletothe RF OUTPUT of the 8648 the BNC splitter to the other end of the BNC cable attaching the splitter s positive lead tothe side of the resistor that is connected tothe HI lead from the DMM the splitter s ground lead tothe side of the resistor that is connected to the LO lead from the DMM e Turn on the RF output press RF ON OFF Measure RF levels 1 Set the amplitudes shown in the test record 9 8 Supplemental Verification Tests 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test 2 For each data point measure the AC voltage Vac dropped across the resistor 3 Record the measured result in the test record 4 Record the test results and compare the results with the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648B Table 9 9 e 8648C Table 9 10 86480 Table9 11 Table 9 9 8648B 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits kHz Power Uncertainty Level Lower Measured Upper dB dBm 10 596 841 0 21 0 188 265 0 21 10 59 84 021 20 19 27 0 21 30 6 0 8 0 0 21 40 1 9 2 7 0 21 50 0 566 0 894 0 25 60 0 179 0 283 0 25 70 0 055 0 094 0 39 Supplemental Verification Tests 9 kHz RF Le
113. kHz to 1000 MHz 10 to 136 dBm 8648B C D gt 2500 MHz 13 to 136 dBm gt 2500 MHz 10 to 136 dBm 8648B C D 100 kHz H7 to 136 dBm with Option IEA 1000 MHz 20 to 136 dBm lt 1500 MHz 19 to 136 dBm lt 2100 MHz 17 to 136 dBm lt 2500 MHZ 15 to 136 dBm gt 2500 MHz 13 to 136 dBm 3 FM AM Press FM to set the peak deviation for frequency modulation Then usethe data entry keys to enter the desired value of deviation The values allowed depend on the RF frequency selected See Chapter 4 Specifications for peak deviation specifications Press AM to set the amplitude modulation range Then use the data entry keys to set the desired value of range Values from 0 through 10096 are allowed Press FM to set the peak deviation for phase modulation Then use the data entry keys to enter the desired value of deviation The values allowed depend on the RF frequency selected See Chapter 4 Specifications for peak deviation specifications 1b 5 Operation Reference Function Setting Up the Pager Encoder NOTE The pager encoder mode is available only on instruments with Option Option 1EP adds pager encoding signaling capabilities to the standard functions Consequently the front panel of the Option 1EP instrument is different from the standard instrument s front panel The green and blue labels are incorporated for the pager encoding settings only Therefore these keys have multiple func
114. messages 3 6 Installation Connecting to Other Instruments Connecting to Other Instruments Coaxial mating connectors used with the signal generator should be either 50Q BNC or 50Q type N male connectors that are compatible with those specified in UL MIL C39012 3 7 Installation Storing the Signal Generator Storing the Signal Generator Theinstrument should be stored in a clean dry environment The following environmental limitations apply to both storage and shipment e temperature 40 C to 70 C humidity lt 95 relative altitude 15 300 meters 50 000 feet NOTE The cabinet should only be cleaned using a damp cloth 3 8 Installation Shipping the Signal Generator Shipping the Signal Generator Containers and materials identical to those used in factory packaging are available through Agilent Technologies If the instrument is being returned to Agilent Technologies for servicing attach a tag indicating the type of service required return address model number and full serial number Also mark the container FRAGILE to assure careful handling In any correspondence refer to the instrument by model number and full serial number If you are using other packaging follow the guidelines below 1 Wrap theinstrument in heavy paper or plastic 2 Usea strong shipping container A double wall carton made of 2 4 M Pa 350 psi test material is adequate 3 Use enough shock absorbing material 75 to 10
115. of 300 registers available in the instrument Theregisters can be used in the sequences in any combination such as 10 sequences of 30 registers each or 3 sequences of 100 registers each as long as the total does not exceed 300 registers It is not possible to have all 10 sequences each contain 100 registers as that would be 1000 registers If Option is present there are a total of 70 registers A available ur FREQUENCY NENNEN MODULATION Si AMPLITUDE Hz FM 3 00kKz 136 0dBm REG 01 kHz OFF RF OFF p FREQUENCY DATA AMPLITUDE E s e 9 3 A n 0 TEST2 drw SEQ 9 RAM 300 REG Memory key entries are automatically terminated after you enter the last digit Register key entries SAV DEL and REG require two digits Sequence key entries SEQ require one digit 1b 39 Operation Reference Function H0 memkeys drw 1 SAV Press SAV and a register number 00 through 99 to save the current operating settings in a memory register All front panel settings except the knob digit positions and the GPIB address will be saved in the register When you press the SAV key a message is displayed to tell you the total number of registers s
116. on OUTP STAT Turns the RF output off Sets the amplitude of the RF output to the POW AMPL desired value and units value may be up to 4 digits plus a sign if applicable e g 127 1 or maximum resolution of 1 dB 001 mV 01 units may be DBM UV MVEMF UVEMF DBUV DBUVEMF If in reference mode only DB or DBM are allowed Turns automatic attenuator control on normal POW ATT AUTO setting Turns automatic attenuator control off and holds present attenuator setting Sets a reference to the value in units as described in setting amplitude Reference state must be on to be active Sets reference to on making all amplitude POW REF STAT changes relative to the reference Sets reference to off making all amplitude changes absolute Sets the RF frequency to the value and units value may be up to 9 digits with a maximum of 10 Hz resolution units may be MHZ KHZ or HZ Sets a reference to the value in units as FREQ REF described in setting frequency Reference state must be on to be active Sets reference to on making all frequency FREQ REF STAT changes relative to the reference Sets reference to off making all frequency changes absolute Amplitude Modulation AM DEPT value PCT AM STAT ON AM STAT OFF AM SOUR INT AM SOUR INT2 AM SOUR EXT AM SOUR INT EXT AM INT FREQ 1 KHZ AM INT FREQ 400 HZ AM INT2 FREQ value units
117. on62bd Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset 2 RF power mode tuned RF level mode for levels lower than 10 dBm 3 Connect the measuring receiver and 8648 timebases 4 Set to measure in dBm press LOG LIN 8 30 Performance Tests RF level Accuracy Performance Test NOTE Enter the power sensor s calibration data into the measuring receiver and zero the sensor module Refer to the measuring receiver s operating manual Configure the 8648 1 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 2 Turn modulation off press MOD ON OFF Measure Amplitudes 1 For each frequency the measuring receiver must be calibrated for tuned RF level operation 2 Set the frequency and amplitude shown in the test record 3 Measure the amplitude shown in the test record 4 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648A Table 8 16 e 8648B Table 8 37 e 8648C Table 8 62 e 86480 Table 8 87 8648B C D Only The following steps are for the 8648B C D only For the 8648A this performance test is concluded 8 31 Performance Tests RF level Accuracy Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 17 Equipment Setup for 8648B C D gt 1300 MHz 8648B C D UNDER TEST POWER METER RF OUTPUT 10 d ATTENUATOR Configure the Power Meter 1 Connect the 8482A power sensor to the power meter 2 Connect the power sensor to the power meter POWER REF
118. or alphabetic characters entered by way of the DATA and MODULATION source blocks SHIFT If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the rad dBuV key functions as a SHIFT key This key lets you input alphabetical characters using the DATA and MODULATION SOURCE blocks when in the pager encoder mode 2 Backspace Press when entering a numeric value to backspace and remove the last digit entered 1b 32 Operation Reference Function 3 emf Press these keys to display the amplitude value indicated on the key label in electromotive force units Emf is the RF output voltage with load It is twice the output voltage with a 50 ohm load 4 Press this key at any time while you are entering an amplitude or reference offset value to change the sign of the value 1b 33 Operation Reference Function Instrument Preset POWER lt Turn the instrument on while pressing the backspace key amp to perform an instrument preset The instrument will power up to factory defined settings shown in the following table Save and recall registers are not affected by this operation POWER DEL Turn the instrument on while pressing the memory DEL key to perform a clear memory This function erases all save recall registers sets the GPIB address to 19 and performs an instrument preset where the instrument powers up to factory defined settings shown in the following table NOTE This will cause an error me
119. output 3 Zero and calibrate the power meter Configure the 8648B C D 1 Connect the power sensor to the 8648 RF OUTPUT connector 2 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 13 dB m 3 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure High Level Power Accuracy lt 13 dBm Enter the frequencies and power levels shown in the test record Make sure the power sensor cal factors are entered correctly for each frequency Do not test below 20 dBm with this test setup 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648B Table 8 38 e 8648C Table 8 63 e 8648D Table 8 88 8 32 Performance Tests RF level Accuracy Performance Test NOTE For 8648B C D instruments without Option 1EA high power skip ahead to Configure the Power Meter All others continue with the next step Configure the 8648 Option 1EA 1 2 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 10 dB m Turn the Rf output on press RF ON OFF Connect the power sensor directly to the 8648 RF OUTPUT connector Measure the High Power Level Accuracy 1 measure the RF power at each frequency listed in Table 8 1 and record the measurement in the first row of the table Connect the 10 dB attenuator between the 8648 RF OUTPUT connector and the power sensor Measure the RF power at each frequency listed in Table 8 1 and record the measurement in the second row of the table Calculate the
120. power level accuracy adjustment 7 32 line module part number 6 6 6 12 LO 1b 45 LOCAL 1b 38 M manual adjustments 7 4 memory 1 7 1b 39 clearing 1b 34 interface 1b 53 remote interface 1b 52 sequence 1 8 MOD INPUT OUTPUT 1b 46 MOD ON OFF 1b 44 modulation 1 4 1 21 1b 5 HI LO 1b 45 level 1b 46 OFF 1b 45 source 1b 43 1b 46 modulation distribution theory of operation 5a 8 modulation generator 1b 44 assembly description 5a 18 motherboard 7 2 audio path calibration 7 24 theory of operation 5a 8 motherboard kit part number 6 3 6 6 6 12 N NEXT 1b 31 offset 1 16 160 3 ordering parts 6 1 output level frequency extension adjustment 7 20 level output adjustment 7 15 part number 6 12 theory of operation 5a 11 5a 12 packaging 3 9 pager encoder assembly description 5a 19 part number 6 6 timebase frequency adjustment 7 7 pager encoding 1 23 parts list 6 1 PC requirements 7 36 performance tests 8 1 AM accuracy 8 16 AM accuracy Option 1E2 8 17 AM distortion 8 19 DC FM frequency error 8 28 FM accuracy 8 7 FM accuracy Option 1E2 8 10 FM distortion 8 13 FSK deviation accuracy 8 40 harmonics 8 26 internal timebase aging rate 8 46 pager encoder timebase accuracy 8 39 phase modulation distortion 8 21 power level accuracy 8 49 pulse modulation on off ratio 8 35 pulse modulation rise time 8 37 required test equipment 8 3 residual FM
121. red color code value 2 8150 0022 1 foot Wire 22AWG orange color code value 3 8150 0017 1 foot Wire 22AWG yellow color code value 4 8150 0038 1 foot Wire 22AWG green color code value 5 8150 0011 1 foot Wire 22AWG blue color code value 6 8150 0014 1 foot f you constructed your own test point extender you can usethis table to record your color code so that it can be readily identified in the future Enter your J31 Test Point Extender Color Code Here Pin1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Figure 7 1 J 31 Test Point Extender Crimp Connector 6 ee D N 22 AWG Wire 6 1 Foot Pieces 6 Pin Connector Housing EN md 5 2 an620a2d Adjustments Manual Adjustments Manual Adjustments This section documents the following manual adjustments Internal Reference Oscillator Adjustment Pager Encoder Timebase Frequency Adjustment Adjustments Manual Adjustments Internal Reference Oscillator Adjustment Use this procedure to adjust the internal timebase reference DACs The internal reference oscillator is adjusted with two DACs one for coarse tuning and one for fine tuning Using the two DACs the internal reference oscillator can be adjusted to the resolution of the frequency counter used NOTE This manual adjustment can be replaced by performing the automated Time Base DAC calibration instead Required
122. set set the frequency to 100 MHz and the amplitude to 100 dBm oO N FREQUENCY M MODULATION EN I E I C 100 00000 MHz 100 0 dBm CA 50 URL C3 CJ pm doa ln a l oja o MM E FREQUENCY 1 0 0 incr drw Using the Knob 2 Increment the amplitude using the knob Press when you wish to adjust the increment resolution x FREQUENCY MODULATION SS 100 00000 MHz 101 0 dBm iner2 drw Using the Increment Keys 3 Enter a frequency increment of 25 kHz The symbol is displayed when you press INCR SET to indicate that the displayed valueis theincrement set value 1a 5 Operation Examples Incrementing or Decrementing the RF output Signal FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE Ee 25 00000 kHz 101 0 dBm incr3 drw INCR FREQUENCY SET 4 Increment the Rf output frequency in 25 kHz steps The increment keys affect the last FUNCTION selected FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE OR 9M 1a 6 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers Using the Memory Registers The memory regi
123. signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the and keys function as the PREV and NEXT keys to change the blinking first character between each parameter when in the pager encoder mode 1b 31 Operation Reference Function Data OQ C nooo eu nnn 00 00 10 E datakeys drw 1 MHz dBm kHz mV uV rad dBuV Press a units key after you enter a value This terminates the entry Note that the units keys in the left column are each labeled with an amplitude unit the bottom and a frequency or modulation unit on the top The instrument applies the appropriate unit for the function value you are entering The bottom key in the row for instance terminates entry in radians an amplitude entry in dBuV NOTE M emory register selections sequence selections and HP IB address entries do not require a units key to terminate the entry These entries are automatically terminated after the last digit is entered Units Conversion You can change the units of the displayed frequency or amplitude value by selecting the FUNCTION frequency or amplitude and then pressing a units key Theinstrument will convert the displayed value to the equivalent value for the units key you pressed ENTER If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the MHz dB m key functions as an ENTER key The ENTER key must be used to store any numeric
124. sym sec Span 20 kHz 0 kHz 48kHz 2 0 kHz 48kHz 2 1 kHz 48kHz kHz 1 kHz 48kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz 2 2 kHz 48kHz kHz 3 kHz 48kHz J kHz 3 kHz 48kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz kHz 4 kHz 48kHz 2 5 kHz 48kHz kHz 5 kHz 48kHz kHz 6 kHz 48kHz J kHz 6 kHz 48kHz 2 7 kHz 48kHz kHz 7 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz 2 9 kHz 48kHz J kHz 9 kHz 48kHz kHz Average Sum 3 10 _____ 2 Average Sum 3 10 _____ 2 Frequency 325 MHz FSK mode 6400 4 Frequency 930 MHz FSK mode 6400 4 Symbol rate 3200 sym sec Span 50 kHz Symbol rate 3200 sym sec Span 50 kHz 0 _____ 2 48kHz 2 0 kHz 48kHz kHz 1 kHz L6kHz 1 kHz L6kHz 2 _ kHz 48kHz kHz 2 kHz 48kHz 2 3 kHz Ll6kHz kHz 3 kHz L6kHz 2 4 kHz 48kHz 4 kHz 48kHz kHz 5 kHz L6kHz kHz 5 kHz L6kHz J kHz 6 kHz 48kHz kHz 6 kHz 4 8kHz kHz 7 kHz L6kHz 2 7 kHz L6kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 8 kHz 48kHz kHz 9 kHz 16kHz J kHz 9 kHz L6kHz kHz Average Sum 3 10 kHz Average Sum 3 10 kHZ Test Record e 8648A Option Table 8 18 8 45 Performance Tests
125. the 8648B either RF mixer MDC 174 or MDC 164 may be used 8 14 Performance Tests FM Distortion Performance Test Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 1 Amplitude 16 dBm 2 Frequency CW LO frequencies on test record 3 Modulation off Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results with the limits in the test record Test Record 8648B Table 8 27 e 8648C Table 8 52 86480 Table 8 77 Performance Tests AM Accuracy Performance Test AM Accuracy Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 7 AM Accuracy Equipment Setup MEASURING RECEIVER 8648 UNDER TEST pooooo n n mu o 00 INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn64a Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset AM mode Peak detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter A W N Configure the 8648 1 Turn AM on press AM MOD ON OFF 2 Set the rate press INT 1 kHz 3 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure Depths 1 Enter the amplitudes frequencies and depths shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648A Table 8 8 e 8648B Table 8 28 e 8648C Table 8 53 e 8648D Table 8 78 8 16 Performance Tests AM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 Only AM Accuracy Pe
126. the ME iS SAGE 4 ENGTH is 5 the message which is displayed and will be sent out is actually 01234 1b 11 Operation Reference Function Setting the Encoding Mode The number of times a message is transmitted and the level of that transmission are determined by the following menu BURSTS 003 a E FREQUENCY C J MODE BURST AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm an61 MODE determines whether the message will be output once or multiple times when INCR SET START STOP is pressed SINGLE Outputs the message once BURST Outputs the message the number of times specified in the BURSTS field 3 times in this example CONT Outputs the message continuously until the INCR SET START STOP key is pressed a second time Note The collapse cycle described later on in this section will determine how often the message will be transmitted per cycle AMPLITUDE sets the output signal level of the carrier BURSTS sets the number of times the message will be transmitted This parameter is displayed only when the MODE parameter is set to BURST The allowable range is 1 to 256 RF OFF is displayed below the amplitude setting when the RF output is turned off To toggle the RF signal o
127. the RF channel within the address field in predicted frames The allowable range is 2058240 to 2062335 RF CH Represents each RF channel obtained by the formula as follows RF CH Modulo 8 of Integer RF Freq z channel space z Theallowable range is O to 7 AREA Defines the service area identification The allowable range is 0 to 31 MULTIPLIER Defines how much the network address is extended The allowable rangeis O to 7 NID TMF Defines NID traffic management flag This value is automatically set when the capcode address is entered in the PAGER CODE data field The allowable range is to 15 Message During Encoding To start and stop encoding after selecting all pager encoder parameters press the INCR SET START STOP key Thefollowing display is shown during encoding a pager under test FREQUENCY MSN MODULATION AMPLITUDE MESSAGE NO 6 AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm CYCLE 00 FRAME 000 PHASE A REPEAT 0 encode28 drw 1b 17 Operation Reference Function NOTE REPEAT is displayed additionally only if FLEX TD is selected in the format menu If MESSAGE NO is set to 0 the display is changed as follows
128. the instrument This chapter contains the following information Required Test Equipment List A list of all the equipment required to perform these manual performance tests For a comprehensive list of all test equipment required to perform these tests plus the manual adjustments and the automated adjustments and performance tests see Chapter 5 Service Performance Tests The manual and automated performance tests required to verify the signal generator to its specifications Most of these performance tests are performed manually however there is a single automated performance test The Power Level Accuracy performance test is the automated test If this test is run the RF level Accuracy performance test one of the manual tests does not need to be performed The description for this automated performance test is located after the descriptions for the manual performance tests Refer to Service Support Software in Chapter 7 Adjustments for information on using the service support software that runs this performance test Test Records A test record for each model of the 8648 is located at the end of this chapter These test records are used to record the measurements for the manual performance tests K eep these copies as masters and use a photocopy for each calibration See Chapter 4 Specifications for the specifications for each 8648 model Performance Tests Calibration Cycle Calibration Cycle
129. 0 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 50 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 20 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 50 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 100 0 1 0 16 3800 2500 1300 20 0 1 0 16 3800 2500 1300 50 0 1 0 16 3800 2500 1300 100 0 1 0 16 8 127 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 78 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 128 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 78 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 129 Performance Te
130. 0 10 330 100 Table 8 75 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E 2 Part 2 RF LO Input Limits kHz Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Uncertainty 8648D 8663A 8902A kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2500 2501 5 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 2500 2501 5 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3200 2500 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 3200 2500 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3800 2500 1300 5 4 730 5 270 50 3800 2500 1300 10 9 580 10 420 100 8 125 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 76 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper 10 5 0 1 0 16 10 50 0 1 0 16 10 100 0 1 0 16 100 5 0 1 0 16 100 50 0 1 0 16 100 100 0 1 0 16 400 5 0 1 0 16 400 30 0 1 0 16 400 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 5 0 1 0 16 756 25 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 100 0 1 0 16 1000 5 0 1 0 16 1000 50 0 1 0 16 1000 100 0 1 0 16 8 126 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 77 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 2 RF LO Input Limits Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Uncertainty 8648D 8663A 8902A kHz Lower Measured Upper MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 5
131. 0 12 172 312 55 0 1 2 227 92 55 0 1 2 232 304 55 0 1 2 241 759 55 0 1 2 241 1000 55 0 1 2 242 274 55 0 1 2 8 136 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 86 DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test Frequency Frequency Limits Hz Frequency Deviation FM Off FM On Uncertainty MHz kHz Hz Hz Lower Measured Upper Hz 100 1 100 100 1 0 100 5 100 100 1 0 100 9 9 100 100 1 0 500 1 100 100 1 0 500 5 100 100 1 0 500 9 9 100 100 1 0 1000 1 100 100 1 0 1000 5 100 100 1 0 1000 9 9 100 100 1 0 1500 2 200 200 1 0 1500 9 9 200 200 1 0 1500 19 9 200 200 1 0 2000 2 200 200 1 0 2000 9 9 200 200 1 0 2000 19 9 200 200 1 0 2500 4 400 400 1 0 2500 19 9 400 400 1 0 2500 39 9 400 400 1 0 3200 4 400 400 1 0 3200 19 9 400 400 1 0 3200 39 9 400 400 1 0 4000 4 400 400 1 0 4000 19 9 400 400 1 0 4000 39 9 400 400 1 0 8 137 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6
132. 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 112 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 249 9 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 113 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 62 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1
133. 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 68 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 16 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 512 5 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 69 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 16 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz
134. 0 250 28 1 5 3000 2500 500 28 1 8 3200 2500 700 28 2 0 3450 2500 950 28 2 0 3700 2500 1200 28 2 5 8 134 Table 8 84 Harmonics Performance Test 8648D 8566B Limits dBc Frequency Harmonic Uncertainty MHz Frequency Upper Measured dB MHz 1 2 30 0 1 2 2 4 30 0 1 2 5 10 30 0 12 10 20 30 0 12 20 40 30 0 1 2 100 200 30 0 1 2 100 300 30 0 1 2 300 150 30 0 1 2 500 1000 30 0 1 2 500 1500 30 0 1 2 600 1200 30 0 1 2 600 1800 30 0 1 2 700 1400 30 0 1 2 700 2100 30 0 1 2 800 1600 30 0 1 2 800 2400 30 0 1 2 900 1800 30 0 1 2 1000 2000 30 0 1 2 1100 2200 30 0 1 2 1200 2400 30 0 1 2 1500 3000 30 0 2 0 1990 995 30 0 1 2 2000 3000 30 0 2 0 3200 1600 30 0 1 2 3400 1700 30 0 1 2 3550 1800 30 0 1 2 4000 2000 30 0 1 2 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record 8 135 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 85 Spurious Performance Test 8648C Limits dBc Amplitude Frequency Spur Uncertainty dBm MHz MHz Upper Measured dB 4 242 274 55 0 12 247 259 55 0 1 2 6 1 999 55 0 1 2 1 1000 55 0 1 2 41 1000 55 0 1 2 61 1000 55 0 1 2 91 1000 55 0 12 102 286 55 0 12 137 315 55 0 1 2 150 148 55 0 12 150 149 55 0 12 150 151 55 0 1 2 150 152 55 0 12 167 7 55
135. 0 HZ PM INT2 FREQ lt value gt lt units gt PM INT2 FUNC SHAP lt shape gt PM EXT COUP DC PM EXT COUP AC Pulse Modulation Option 1E6 PULM STAT ON PULM STAT OFF Eliminates FM offset Set FM deviation in kHz lt value gt from 0 00 to 9 99 and 10 0 to 99 9 lt value gt may also be entered in Hz HZ Sets FM on AM and PM must have state off Sets FM off Selects internal source for FM Selects internal source 2 for FM Options 1E2 amp only Selects external source for FM Selects internal and external sources Selects internal 1 kHz frequency Selects internal 400 Hz frequency Sets the internal modulation generator 1E2 or the internal audio generator 1EP frequency to the value and units Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Sets the internal modulation generator waveform to the shape shape may be SIN TRI SQU or SAW Options 1E2 amp LEP only Selects external 4 coupling for FM Selects external ac coupling for FM Sets phase modulation in radians RAD lt value gt from 0 00 to 9 99 and 10 0 Sets PM on AM and FM must have state off Sets PM off Selects internal source for PM Selects internal source 2 for PM Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Selects external source for PM Selects internal and external sources Selects internal 1 kHz frequency Selects internal 400 Hz frequency Sets the internal modulation generator 1E2 or the internal audio generator 1E
136. 0 MHz 5071A or Internal Timebase Aging Rate P Frequency Stability gt 1x 10 19 5061A B Internal Reference Oscillator A Standard Manual Adjustment Time Base DAC A Table 5 1 Recommended Test quipment Service Recommended Test Equipment Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Use Model Performance Test P Adjustment A Supp Verification Test V Pulse F unction Frequency 10 MHz 8116A Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio P Generator Duty cyde 50 Pulse Modulation Rise Time P Output TTL square wave RF Mixer Freq range RF and LO ports M A ComInc FM Accuracy P 1MHzto2800MHz MDC 174 FM Distortion P Freq range IF port 1 MHz to 2000 MHz Phase Modulation Distortion P Maximum input LO port 26 dBM Residual FM P RF Mixer Freq range RF and LO ports M A ComInc FM Accuracy P 500 MHz to 900 MHz MDC 164 FM Distortion P Freq range IF port 10 MHz to 2000 Phase M odulation Distortion P MHz Residual FM P Maximum input LO port 24 dBM RF Spectrum Freq range 1 MHz to 4000 MHz 8563E Power Level Accuracy P Analyzer Relative level accuracy harmonic and Harmonics P spurious measurements 2 dB Spurious P 1Hzdigital resolution BW filter required Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio P for power accuracy Time Base DAC A Displayed average noise HF Power Level Accuracy A 100 kHz 110 dBm LF Power Level Accuracy A 1 MHz to 10 MHz
137. 0 millimeter layer 3 to 4 inches around all sides of the instrument to provide a firm cushion and to prevent movement in the container Protect the front panel with cardboard 4 Seal the shipping container securely 5 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to assure careful handling 3 9 Installation Shipping the Signal Generator 3 10 Specifications This chapter contains specifications and supplemental characteristics for the 8648A B C D synthesized signal generators m Specifications describe the instrument s warranted performance over the 0 to 50 C temperature range and apply after 30 minute warm up unless otherwise noted All performance below a carrier frequency of 250 kHz is typical Supplemental characteristics shown in italics are intended to provide information useful in estimating instrument capability in your application by describing typical but non warranted performance The regulatory information is located in the last section of this chapter Options Option Specifications The 8648A B C D synthesized signal generator specifications refer to several options Those options are described below Option 1EA High power 8648B C D only m Option 1EP Pager encoder signaling includes modulation generator functionality of Option 1E2 8648A only Not available with Option 1E2 m Option 1E2 Modulation generator Not available with Option 1EP m Option 1E5 High stability time
138. 00 70 65 75 0 8 1000 90 84 96 1 0 8 59 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 9 AM Accuracy Option 1E 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 70 65 75 1 5 2 90 84 96 1 9 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 70 65 75 0 8 248 90 84 96 1 0 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 70 65 75 0 8 400 90 84 96 1 0 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 70 65 75 0 8 700 90 84 96 1 0 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 70 65 75 0 8 1000 90 84 96 1 0 8 60 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 10 AM Distortion Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 90 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 90 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 90 0 3 0 70 700 30 0 2 0 39 700 90 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 90 0 3 0 70 6 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 90 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 90 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 90 0 3 0 70 700 30 0 2 0 39 700 90 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 90 0 3 0 70 8 61 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 11 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test
139. 00 MHz When the RF output is gt 1000 MHz the AM signal is routed to the A10 frequency extension module When internal modulation is turned on the signal is also routed to the front panel MOD INPUT OUTPUT connector External signals are also routed through the modulation distribution block External signals can be either ac or dc coupled The modulation signals can be checked at 31 4 for the FM signal while the AM signal is available at 31 1 RF lt 1000 MHz 31 3 RF gt 1000 MHz The controller contains the microprocessor memory serial 1 for the other assemblies GPIB front panel control and serial interface for the external control options Memory is broken into four sections EEPROMs ROM volatile SRAM and non volatile battery backed SRAM The ROMs are contained on a separate memory board A3A 1 The power supply provides 15 V 5 V and 38 V tothe motherboard The post regulation circuitry contains regulators for 12 V 12 V 5 V shown as 45 V F 1 424 V and 48 V There is additional circuitry to derive a filtered 5 V from the power supply for the digital circuitry The 12 V 48 V and 45 V regulators are driven by the 15 V supply from the 2 assembly The 12 V regulator is driven by the 15 V supply and the 424 V regulator is driven by the 38 V supply There are indication LEDs on the motherboard for the 38 V lt 12 V 5 V and 5 V F 1 power supplies The diagnostic latches latch signa
140. 000000000 OOOO00000000000000000000 00000000000000 o00000 000000000 00000000000000 00000000000000 000090 0000600000 00000000000000 o00000 000000000 TETIT 10 MHz 10 MHz REF L A e 1 2 ot 1a 1 10 MHz REF INPUT and OUTPUT These connectors provide the input and output ports for the instrument s ti mebase reference Theinstrument will lock to a 2 MHz 5 MHz or 10 MHz external reference source connected to the input that is within 5 ppm When the internal timebase is being used the output connector provides a 10 MHz 1 Vrms level signal 2 DISPLAY CONTRAST This knob controls the front panel display contrast Display contrast can be optimized for viewing the display from above below or directly in front of it 3 AUXILIARY INTERFACE Connect the 83300A Remote I nterface or the 83301A M emory Interface to this connector for operation with the instrument Refer to Remote Interface and Memory Interface in 1b 49 Operation Reference Function this section for information about operating these devices TX Data output 5 Volts RX Data input d CTS input RTS output icnecter drw 4 Line Voltage Connector For info
141. 02A Upper Measured Hz MHz MHz MHz 10 11 5 700 7 0 45 100 101 5 700 7 0 45 248 249 5 700 7 0 45 251 252 5 700 4 0 35 400 401 5 700 4 0 35 501 501 5 700 7 0 45 750 751 5 700 7 0 45 1000 1001 5 700 7 0 45 1500 1501 5 700 14 0 75 2500 2501 5 700 28 1 5 8 108 Table 8 59 Harmonics Performance Test 8648C 8566B Limits dBc Frequency Harmonic Uncertainty MHz Frequency Upper Measured dB MHz 1 2 30 0 1 2 2 4 30 0 1 2 5 10 30 0 12 10 20 30 0 12 20 40 30 0 1 2 100 200 30 0 1 2 100 300 30 0 1 2 300 150 30 0 1 2 500 1000 30 0 1 2 500 1500 30 0 1 2 600 1200 30 0 1 2 600 1800 30 0 1 2 700 1400 30 0 1 2 700 2100 30 0 1 2 800 1600 30 0 1 2 800 2400 30 0 1 2 900 1800 30 0 1 2 1000 2000 30 0 1 2 1100 2200 30 0 1 2 1200 2400 30 0 1 2 1500 3000 30 0 2 0 1990 995 30 0 1 2 2000 3000 30 0 2 0 3200 1600 30 0 1 2 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record 8 109 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 60 Spurious Performance Test 8648C Limits dBc Amplitude Frequency Spur Uncertainty dBm MHz MHz Upper Measured dB 4 242 274 55 0 12 247 259 55 0 1 2 6 1 999 55 0 1 2 1 1000 55 0 1 2 41 1000 55 0 1 2 61 1000 55 0 1 2 91 1000 55 0 12 102 286 55 0 12 137 315 55 0 1
142. 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 117 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 63 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 13 12 14 0 15 10 9 11 0 15 4 3 5 0 15 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 15 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 12 2499 13 12 14 0 32 10 9 11 0 32 4 3 5 0 32 5 9 6 9 4 0 32 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 25 3200 13 11 5 14 5 0 46 10 8 5 11 5 0 46 4 2 5 5 5 0 46 5 9 7 4 4 4 0 46 15 9 17 4 14 4 0 41 f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the 8 118 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 64 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 13 11 5 14 5 0 23 249 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 400 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 999 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 1500 17 15 5 18 5 0 23 2100 15 13 5 16 5 0 40 2500 13 11 5 14 5 0 58 3200 11 9 0 13 0 0 58 NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is
143. 1200 bps 2400 240012 bps PAGER TYPE UMERIC Numeric type ONE ONLY Tone only type LPHANUM 8BIT 8 bit coded alphanumeric type entered by hex binary code N T ALPHANUM 7BIT 7 bit coded alphanumeric type entered by hex binary code A A LPHANUMERIC 7 bit coded alphanumeric type NOTE The ALPHANUM 7BIT and ALPHANUM 8BIT types can be used for displaying two byte special characters for example Chinese characters through a conversion table The following examples show how the actual bit streams are transmitted if BOA1 is set to the message MESSAGE NO 6 1b 22 Operation Reference Function For ALPHANUM 8BIT First Byte Second Byte MSB LSB MSB LSB Bit number b8 b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bil b8 b7 b5 b3 b2 b1 Bit streams 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Characters B 0 A 1 For ALPHANUM 7BIT The eighth bit b8 is ignored as follows First Byte Second Byte MSB LSB MSB LSB Bit number b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Bit streams 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 Characters B 3 0 2 1 When converting the binary data stream to 2 level FSK the first bit out becomes the least significant bit LSB of the 2 level symbol with the following bit the most significant bit MSB of
144. 15 13 5 16 5 0 58 3200 13 11 5 14 5 0 58 4000 13 11 0 15 0 0 58 NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 90 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test with Option 1EA and 1E6 Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 13 11 5 14 5 0 23 249 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 400 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 999 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 1500 17 15 5 18 5 0 23 2100 15 13 5 16 5 0 40 2500 13 11 5 14 5 0 58 3200 11 9 0 13 0 0 58 4000 11 9 0 13 0 0 58 8 145 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 91 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 4 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 16 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 16 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 16 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 16 2499 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 16 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 16 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 16 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 16 3200 25 9 27 4 24 4 0 19 35 9 37 4 34 4 0 19 45 9 47 4 44 4 0 19 55 9 57 4 54 4 0 19 3200 25 9 27 9 23 9 0 21 35 9 37 9 33 9 0 21 45 9 47 9 43 9 0 21 55 9 57 9 53 9 0 21 8 146
145. 1E5 8 46 Bese IG MER Mer 8 46 Connect the Test Equipment ssis ese ces ee RR 8 47 Contigare rhe Ds a we we 8 47 Measure the Phase Change 8 48 Wet RE M PET Lr 8 48 Power Level Accuracy Performance Test Automated 8 49 T M I rS 8 49 Required Test Equipment ois ei s ue I PER RERO RERO 8 49 8 49 Test 8 52 0020 TEST REO O aao Ib Do 8 72 8648C Test Re iia ccu yu RE eee reir EGE TOWLE eee EELS EGER 8 96 Contents BOSC Test RECO sexs CREE dE RO ERU CO SESS NEES BERET REGE db o 3 8 122 9 Supplemental Verification Tests Required Test EQUIDIDECIELISE ilia daa hd reme bara ode b RR Re Roe e EO d aen 9 2 CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification 9 3 Connect the a rubr RR aXX bad Era e en Fide 9 3 Configure the Frequency 9 3 the HOS TFT 9 3 Measure ACCURACY dee nese 9
146. 24 output level 7 15 output level frequency extension 7 20 pager encoder timebase frequency 7 7 altitude 3 6 AM 1b 5 level adjustment 7 12 level and distortion adjustment 7 10 level FE adjustment 7 16 modulator adjustment 7 21 AM level and distortion 7 10 amplitude 1 3 1b 5 RF OFF 1b 47 attenuator 1b 47 part number 6 6 6 12 theory of operation 5a 13 5a 15 ATTN HOLD 1b 47 audio generator adjustment 7 27 internal 1b 44 audio path calibration 7 24 audio source 1b 45 automated adjustments 7 9 auxiliary interface 1b 49 backspace 1b 32 bus 7 2 busy 1b 53 calibration 8 2 Canadian Standards Association v carton 3 9 CE mark v clearing all registers 1b 34 clearing memory 1b 34 clearning memory 1b 34 computer requirements 7 36 connection ac power 3 3 to other instruments 3 7 container 3 9 contrast 1b 49 predistortion and detector offset 7 18 controller prelevel 7 19 theory of operation 5a 8 reference oscillator 7 5 copy 1b 53 time base DAC 7 23 CSA mark v adjustments automated 7 9 D dts DAC calibration 7 23 TNT damage 3 2 Index 1 1 Index datapacks adding 7 50 removing 7 51 DCFM adjustment 7 26 delete DEL 1 11 delta 1b 3 detector offset adjustment 7 14 7 18 device drivers adding 7 46 removing 7 47 display 10 2 1b 31 REG 1 7 SEQ 1 7 theory of operation 5a 5 distortion adjustment 7 10 drivers 7 46 7
147. 3 des eevee 9 4 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test 9 8 ConnecEthe Test EguUIpMeEn a oe nce doce sedora a em on epe dioe aded obe Snes dd 9 8 Configure the Multimeter DMM eee RH un 9 8 CODITBUEG DG ONG a do BARR ce Re boa hae 9 8 Measure aera heehee lado DREGE so 9 8 DOSE lA Rah rr 9 9 xvii Contents xviii 1 Operation Operation contains the following information e 1 Operation Provides a quick overview of the instrument s operation e la Operation Examples provides examples to help you learn how to operate the instrument 1b Operation reference Provides quick access to information about each of the instrument s functions e 1 Operation Messages Provides information about both front panel and GPIB remote operation messages NOTE For Information about service messages numbered 500 and above refer to Chapter 5c Service Error Messages 1 1 Operation Quick Overview Quick Overview Figure 1 1 The 8648 Signal Generator pdctover drw 1 Power Key Press POWER to power up the instrument The instrument powers up to the same state it was in when power was tu
148. 4 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 143 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 88 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 13 12 14 0 15 10 9 11 0 15 4 3 5 0 15 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 15 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 12 2499 13 12 14 0 32 10 9 11 0 32 4 3 5 0 32 5 9 6 9 4 0 32 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 25 3200 13 11 5 14 5 0 46 10 8 5 11 5 0 46 4 2 5 5 5 0 46 5 9 7 4 4 4 0 46 15 9 17 4 14 4 0 41 4000 13 11 0 15 0 0 46 10 8 0 12 0 53 4 2 0 6 0 0 53 5 9 7 9 3 9 0 53 15 9 17 9 13 9 0 48 8 144 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record NOTE If the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 89 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 249 9 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 400 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 999 9 20 18 5 21 5 0 23 1500 19 17 5 20 5 0 23 2100 17 15 5 18 5 0 40 2500
149. 47A 3847U 3 Output Level AM Level FE Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U 5 Predistortion and Detector Offset Not used on some versions of hardware 6 Prelevel 7 Output Level FE 8 AM Modulator 9 Time Base DAC 10 Motherboard Audio Path 11 DCFM 12 Audio Generator 13 HF Power Level Accuracy 14 LF Output Level 15 LF Power Level Accuracy 16 F SK Deviation 17 Filter Path Note Before performing these automated adjustments e Ensure that the Device Under Test DUT and all test equipment have been turned on at lease 45 minutes Shorter warm up times may result in improper adjustment Ensurethat all GPIB connections are securely made between the test equipment the DUT and the PC 7 9 Adjustments Manual Adjustments AM Level and Distortion 8648A Only Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U Description This adjustment adjusts AM level accuracy and distortion on the output module It also zeros the general loss and attenuation arrays It uses the DVM to measure the dc voltages that are being adjusted on the output module Required Test Equipment e Function Generator DVM j 31Test Point Extender refer to the Test Point Extender section at the front of this chapter Procedure Figure 7 6 AM Level and Distortion Test Setup 1 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR pgoooooos o 00000000E Output 8648 UNDER TE
150. 5 64 5 0 61 8 80 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 30 AM Distortion Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 70 0 3 0 70 700 30 0 2 0 39 700 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 6 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 70 0 3 0 70 700 30 0 2 0 39 700 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 8 81 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 31 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz Rad Lower Measured Upper 0 250 5 0 1 0 26 100 5 0 1 0 26 400 5 0 1 0 26 500 5 0 1 0 26 750 5 0 1 0 26 1000 5 0 1 0 26 Table 8 32 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Part 2 Limits RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648B 8663A 8902A Rad MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 7 0 1 0 26 2000 2001 5 700 7 0 1 0 26 Table 8 33 Residual FM Performance Test Limits Hz RF Frequency LO Frequency Input Frequency Uncertainty 8648B 8663A 8902A Upper
151. 56 1 1 2 0960 0856 1 A1A3 08648 60178 1 FLEX CIRCUIT 1 4 2090 0362 1 DISPLAY VFD 2x40 Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 2090 0312 1 DISPLAY LCD 2x40 Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 1 1250 1811 1 A1MP1 08648 60189 1 FRONT FRAME KIT Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 60022 1 FRONT FRAME KIT Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U A1MP2 08647 40008 1 KEYPAD A1MP3 08647 00004 1 DISPLAY MOUNT A1MP4 08647 00019 1 COVER DISPLAY A1MP5 01650 47401 1 KNOB CURSOR A1MP6 01650 47401 1 KNOB CURSOR 08648 80059 1 NAME PLATE 8648B 08648 80060 1 NAME PLATE 8648C 08648 80043 1 NAME PLATE 8648D A2 0950 2293 1 POWER SUPPLY A3 08648 60614 1 MOTHERBOARD ASSY Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 60314 1 MOTHERBOARD ASSY Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 08648 69614 1 EXCHANGE MOTHERBOARD KIT Serial prefixes gt 3836A 3836U 08648 69314 1 EXCHANGE MOTHERBOARD KIT Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U 1 08648 60146 1 MEMORY BOARD FIRMWARE KIT 1 1420 0338 1 BATTERY 3 0V 1 2AH 1 1252 2161 1 CONNECTOR RECT 24F 2 1252 1487 1 CONNECTOR RECT 9F RA 18 1250 1842 1 10 MHZINPUT BNC 19 1250 1842 1 10 MHZ OUTPUT BNC A3R6 2100 4507 1 CONTRAST POTENTIOMETER Serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U A3S1 3101 2264 1 TIMEBASE ADJ SWITCH A4 08647 61045 1 STANDARD REFERENCE ASSEMBLY Replaceab
152. 5a 5 RPP part number 6 12 running adjustments 7 56 performance tests 7 56 S safety class 1 3 3 safety earth ground 3 3 SAV 1b 40 SAVE 1b 40 SAV 1 8 SEQ 1 8 sequence 1b 51 SEQ 1b 41 total 1b 39 service information 5 1 support software 7 36 SHIFT 1b 32 shipping instructions 5 2 the signal generator 3 9 sig gen synth kit part number 6 3 6 6 theory of operation 5a 10 sig gen synth kit part number 6 12 software adding test equipment 7 42 administration 7 42 editing test equipment 7 46 installation 7 37 removing test equipment 7 45 starting 7 53 source 1b 43 1b 46 standby symbol vi START STOP 1b 31 starting the software 7 53 status 1b 38 storing 3 8 supplemental verification tests 9 1 9 kHz RF level accuracy 9 8 frequency accuracy 9 3 required test equipment 9 2 support software 7 36 synthesizer theory of operation 5a 10 T TCXO 5a 19 temperature 3 6 terminate 1b 39 test drivers adding 7 48 Index Index removing 7 49 test equipment recommended 5 3 test point extender 7 2 test record 8648A 8 52 8648B 8 72 8648C 8 96 8648D 8 122 test results printing 7 57 reviewing 7 56 saving 7 55 theory of operation 10 MHz 5a 9 Al 5a 5 A10 5a 14 11 5a 15 12 5a 16 A13 5a 17 A2 5a 7 A3 5a 8 A4 5a 9 A5 5a 10 A6 5a 11 5a 12 A7 5a 13 attenuator 5a 13 5a 15 controller 5a 8 display 5a 5 frequency extension 5a 14 front panel 5
153. 6 1000 5 0 1 0 16 1000 50 0 1 0 16 1000 100 0 1 0 16 8 100 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 52 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 2 Limits RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648C 8663A 8902A kHz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 50 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 50 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 20 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 50 0 1 0 16 3200 2500 700 100 0 1 0 16 8 101 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 53 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 102 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 53 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2
154. 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 103 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 54 AM Accuracy Option 1E 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 104 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 54 AM Accuracy Option 1 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 105 Performance Test
155. 64 may be used Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 1 Amplitude 16 dBm 2 Frequency CW LO frequencies on test record 3 Modulation off Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record 8 8 Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performance Test Test Record e 8648B Table 8 23 e 8648C Table 8 48 86480 Table 8 73 8 9 Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 Only FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E 2 Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 3 FM Accuracy Equipment Setup for Option 1E2 MEASURING RECEIVER 8648 UNDER TEST nn Dongan Poo n n rnm o 00 INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn64a Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset FM mode peak detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter uro ow om Configure the 8648 1 Turn FM on press FM MOD ON OFF PressINT 1 kHz until the modulation generator Option 1E2 sine waveform is activated Set the rate press 1 kHz Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF amp N Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record 8 10 Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performa
156. 8 54 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 6 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E 2 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 8 55 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 7 Distortion Performance Test Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper 10 5 0 1 0 16 10 50 0 1 0 16 10 100 0 1 0 16 100 5 0 1 0 16 100 50 0 1 0 16 100 100 0 1 0 16 400 5 0 1 0 16 400 30 0 1 0 16 400 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 5 0 1 0 16 756 25 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 100 0 1 0 16 1000 5 0 1 0 16 1000 50 0 1 0 16 1000 100 0 1 0 16 8 56 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 8 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 70 65 75 1 5 2 90 84 96 1 9 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 70 65 75 0 8 248
157. 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 88 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 512 5 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 89 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dB
158. 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 138 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 249 9 13 12 14 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 139 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 87 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1
159. 9kHzto 2000 MHz 8648C 9 kHz to 3200 MHz 8648D 9 kHz to 4000 MHz The frequency bands are 0 1 to 249 MHz 249 to 501 MHz 501to 1001 MHz 1001 to 2001 MHz 2001 to 4000 MHz The output amplitude range is from 10 to 136 dBm except for frequencies 2500 M Hz on the 8648B C D where the higher end of the range is 13 dBm The 8648A B C D supports AM FM and phase modulation The possible modulation sources are internal 400 Hz or 1 kHz source external ac or dc coupled source internal 1 kHz plus external dc coupled source internal variable frequency waveform source Option 1E2 only 5 4 Theory of Operation A1 Front Panel 1 Front Panel The front panel contains two RPGs rotary pulse generators the keyboard and the display Thetwo RPGs one for frequency and one for amplitude are connected directly to the controller on the A3 board Each RPG receives power and ground from the controller Each RPG returns two out of phase pulsed lines when the knob is turned The keyboard is a matrix of keys as shown in Table 5 1 on page 5 6 The keyboard is scanned by the controller Scanning pulses are sent alternately to the keyboard rows and are read back on the columns when a key is pressed The controller determines which key was pressed based on the row that was pulsed and the column that the signal was returned on The column lines are pulled up through resistors and are pulsed low when a key is pressed The row output
160. ABO Chinese for Taiwan part number 08648 90002 Option 1 Korean part number 08648 90006 Option AB2 Chinese for PRC part number 08648 90004 Option ABE Spanish part number 08648 90003 Option ABD German part number 08648 90019 Option ABF French part number 08648 90020 Option ABJ Japanese part number 08648 90005 Accessories Transit Case Part number 5961 4720 Remote Interface 83300A Memory Interface 83301A Modulation Adds variable frequency modulation source This functionality is also Generator included with the pager encoder signaling Option 1EP Option 1E2 Waveforms sine triangle square and sawtooth or ramp Frequency Range Sine 10 Hz to 20 kHz Square Triangle Sawtooth or ramp 100 Hz to 2 kHz Useable from 10 Hz to 20 kHz However bandwidth limitations may result in waveform degradation Refer to AM FM and Phase Modulation Rate specifications External AC mode Frequency Accuracy Typically 0 01 Frequency Resolution 1 Hz 3 digits or 10 Hz displayed Depth and Deviation Accuracy 1 kHz sine Refer to AM FM and Phase Modulation Accuracy specifications 4 10 Specifications Output Front Panel BNC Nominally 1 Vp Pulse Modulation Option 1E6 On Off Ratio 2000 MHz 4000 MHz Maximum Pulse Repetition Rate 10 MHz Supplemental Information Pulse Input TTL level 15 V maximum Delay 60 ns typical Video Feedthrough 30 mV typical Pager En
161. ANALYZER HIGH FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER an68a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 23 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 8 51 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record 8648A Test Record Table 8 3 8648A Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Customer Tested By Model Ambieritemperature Serial Number Relative Humidity Options Line Frequency Firmware Revision Special Notes Hz nominal 8 52 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 4 8648A Test Record Model Report Number Date Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Audio Analyzer 2 Measuring Receiver 3 Spectrum Analyzer 4 Synthesized Signal Generator 5 Frequency Counter 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 53 Performance Tests 8648A Test Record Table 8 5 FM Accuracy Performance Test Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100
162. ATOR Set to on the asynchronous state signal is output in the frame where the next message was supposed to occur as determined by the collapse cycle Cycle 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 we 11 Frame 126 127 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a elu CC 1 idle message idle message idle message idle asyn chronous CC 2 idle message idle idle idle message idle idle idle message asyn chronous CONT Mode Example Start Cyde 10 Start Frame 127 Collapse Cycle 1 21 and 2 22 Stop Selected in frame f 1 Since HEADER is set to on the idle signal is output at Frame 126 With TERMINATOR Set to ON and IMMEDIATE STOP set to OFF selecting stop will replace the next message with the asynchronous signal Cyde 10 10 11 11 11 ae ce C C C C Frame 126 127 0 1 2 ENT f 1 2 f 3 f 4 1 idle message idle message idle message idle asyn chronous CC 2 idle message idle idle idle message idle idle idle asyn chronous SSID NID Roaming Example When the roaming function with SSID and NID is set to on with the following conditions the contents in each phase are shown in the following table 6400 bps 4 level FSK Call in Phase A Address Type Long Address 1b 19 Operation Reference Function Roaming Mode SSID NID
163. AVAS uices a c que dedica koe ue ERO A i ea doa 8 27 Test ROOK oca EE RVEES Ku ERLE TERRE EHS DERE RS 8 27 DC FM Frequency Error Performance lt 8 28 Connect the Test Equipment rire itt DINE RE 8 28 Configure the Frequency COUNTE 2 6 8 28 Configure the 8648 RR WEAR Ke ERAN 8 28 Measure caudas d ui b aded ook Ede dd up do PER A ca PESE dap tace RE dta 8 28 Test Record 6622 saiod RE ER Rak RA TIRAGE RE 8 29 RF level Accuracy Performance Test Lisssuas eiua echo tri ak p RRRER G Y ar E REA 8 30 oiu sess ep RU ERRARE ERR saky EEG Gp Ed dor Eu dioe 8 30 Connect the Tet E QUIBIDBCIE dua cba pad qai aca pd aede edel ace p 8 30 Configure the Measuring 8 30 Conde Brie uu ia baa dn udo ERR ea dep did eb de doloe pas 8 31 Measure Amplitud s ks rire eames ae eT DERE HS 8 31 ERE EE REPE 8 31 BOABBICID Only HERTEPPXRPERRERERR AREDISEGSERERE C ESECERERE Y 8 31 XV Contents Xvi Connect the Test Equipment issis deus ee ee bees 8
164. CY AMPLITUDE FM ENCODER 1 1 ENCODER NOTE Before selecting the pager encoder mode check that the correct pager carrier frequency and deviation have been set To select the pager encoder mode press FM ENCODER twice once to set FM deviation then again to toggle between the standard functions and the pager encoder mode The display will look likethe following LT EM ea d quu o6 nM MODULATION So 4 oo FORMAT FLEX i POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON 00 000 Q Encodel drw This format menu is always displayed first when the pager encoder mode is selected PREV and NEXT keys are used to move the blinking cursor between each parameter The knob in the AMPLITUDE ENCODER block is used to select the desired setting for each pager encoder parameter To start or stop encoding press INCR SET START STOP 1b 7 Operation Reference Function Setting the Format The format menu shown in the previous figure has the following settings FORMAT selects the pager protocol being tested Pseudorandom Sequence PN 15 FLEX FLEX format FLEX TD FLEX TD format POCSAG POCSAG format PN15 RESYNC SERVICE POLARITY selects the data polarity Normal Normal polarity
165. D PN15 RATE PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS SEL PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS DEF PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS LENG PAG POCS FLEX FTD ARB STAR PAG POCS FLEX FTD ARB STOP PAG FLEX FTD TYPE PAG FLEX FTD VECT PAG FLEX FTD NUMB PAG FLEX FTD CYCL PAG FLEX FTD FRAM PAG FLEX FTD CCOunt PAG FLEX FTD FCOunt PAG FLEX FTD PHAS PAG FLEX FTD COLL PAG FLEX FTD CODE Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions continued Command Statement PAG FLEX FTD ATYP SHOR LONG PAG FLEX FTD ATYP PAG FLEX FTD ADDR 1 2 value PAG FLEX FTD ADDR 1 2 PAG FLEX FTD IST STAT ON OFF PAG FLEX FTD IST STAT Sets the address type to short or long Sets the address 1 and 2 Sets the instrument behavior when a stop event occurs Sets the header for FLEX FLEX TD on or off Sets the terminator for FLEX FLEX TD on or off Sets the type of numeric message PAG FLEX FTD HEAD STAT ON OFF PAG FLEX FTD TERM STAT ON OFF PAG FLEX FTD HEAD STAT PAG FLEX FTD TERM STAT PAG FLEX FTD VECT STAN SPEC NUMB PAG FLEX FTD HBIN BIT1 BIT7 BIT8 BIT14 BIT16 PAG FLEX FTD DCAL STAT ON OFF PAG FLEX FTD DCAL ADDR 1 2 value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SEL NONE SSID NID PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID LID value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM SSID CZON value PAG FLEX FTD ROAM
166. DUT Then the actual voltage is measured and the target deviation set at DAC Offset percentage of the measured voltage The level DAC is adjusted for DAC Offset Percentage deviation and then the 100 level DAC value for external modulation measurements is calculated as shown DAC Value at DAC Offset Percentage DAC Offset Percentage 100 DAC Value Actual 3325B Voltage x Required Test Equipment e Function Generator DVM Measuring Receiver 7 24 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Procedure Figure 7 23 Motherboard Audio Path Test Setup BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR Ext Ref In _ lt o 20000000E og COOCOOO g Ll oO oo oo o o n B oo Q Input 50 W BNC TEE DIGITAL MULTIMETER 5 0000 oo GADS coon 0000000 oo an616a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 25 Adjustments Manual Adjustments DCFM 8648A B C D Description This adjustment is used to calibrate the DC FM Makesure that nothing is connected to the MOD INPUT OUTPUT connector on the DUT Required Test Equipment None Procedure Figure 7 24 DCFM Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST an610a2d 1 Connect the eq
167. Data set 14 frame MM UNDC N frame M mcm Idle of block 10 Data set 173 Data set 172 frame of block 10 Data set 175 Data set 174 frame Frame info upper The data to be sent by the DEFine command for the above example is as follows when the segment number of the buffer memory in which the data is stored is 8 8 16926 0 Buffer No Frame info Upper Frame info Lower 6464 2055 13920 32767 30150 16825 19824 14270 Data sets 0 to 7 22212 7882 0 0 1 1 0 0 Data sets 8 to 15 1 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 Data sets 16 to 23 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Data sets 168 to 175 m For POCSAG Buffer No Data set O Data set 31 Buffer No is the number of the buffer memory segment in which the data is stored 0 to 127 Data set 0 to Data set 31 are assigned as follows Data set 0 Upper 16 bits of 1st codeword of frame 0 Data set 1 Lower 16 bits of 1st codeword of frame 0 Data set 2 Upper 16 bits of 2nd codeword of frame 0 Data set 3 Lower 16 bits of 2nd codeword of frame 0 Data set 4 Upper 16 bits of 1st codeword of frame 1 Data set 31 Lower 16 bits of 2nd codeword of frame 7 LSB and MSB are defined as follows Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits MSB LSB 1 2 3 15 16 17 18 19 31 32 Note Note that the meanings of MSB LSB and upper lower are reversed b
168. ENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE BURSTS 001 AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm encode38 drw TS defines the number of data to make a pager resynchronized with this pager encoding signal One burst is 1 92s The allowable range is 000 to 256 0 represents the continuous mode NOTE This setting is required only when RESYNC is selected in the format menu The fl PREV and NEXT keys toggle the format menu and this BURSTS menu No other menus are displayed Message During Resynchronizing start and stop encoding after selecting all pager encoder parameters press the INCR SET START ST OP key Q PN15 FREQUENCY SN MODULATION AMPLITUDE RESYNC SENDING AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm encode37 drw If the RF output is turned off AMPLITUDE x xdBm will be substituted for RF OFF While encoding the blinking cursor is on the first character A of AMPLITUDE or R of RF OFF Setting the Data Rage f PN15 modulation is selected in the format menu the following parameters must be set to complete the pager encoder setup process D 9
169. EST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an69a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 14 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Output Level 8648A Only Description This adjustment creates the slope and offset calibration data for the output section This adjustment will not allow any calibration data to be stored unless all of the calibration data points are measured Required Test Equipment Power Meter Power Sensor Procedure Figure 7 13 Detector Offset Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an69a2d 1 Connect the equi pment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 15 Adjustments Manual Adjustments AM Level FE 8648B C D Only Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U Description This adjustment performs the AM Level adjustment on the frequency extension module by connecting the function generator and the DVM to motherboard connector J 31 This adjustment performs the two adjustments to the output board that require the use of the voltmeter It sets up the multiplexer on the output board to measure dc voltages while the potentiometers are being adjusted Required Test Equipment Function Generator DVM J31Test Point Extender refer to the Test Point Extender section at the front of this
170. FF dBuV freq Row 5 ADRS SAV REG f MOD INT EXT 3 13 memory ON OFF 400 Row 6 LOCAL DEL SEQ 1kHz INT EXT 3 14 memory EXT DC 1kHz DC Row 7 gt REF REF RF ATTN 3 15 ampl ampl SET ON OFF ON OFF HOLD ampl ampl Row 8 mV uV dBuV A3J 3 16 back space emf emf emf 5a 6 Theory of Operation A2 Power Supply A2 Power Supply The power supply is a switching power supply producing 4 voltages 5 V 15 V 15 V and 38 V The switching supply will only regulate when connected toa load The power supply receives mains line voltage through the power switch on the front panel and the line module on the rear panel Post regulation on the A3 assembly produces 12 V filtered 5 V 45 V 24V and 8 V The 424 V and 8 V are used only in the 8648B C D 5 7 Theory of Operation A3 Motherboard A3 Motherboard The motherboard contains four functional blocks modulation distribution controller post regulation and diagnostic latching The modulation distribution block produces two level calibrated modulation frequencies 1 kHz and 400 Hz The frequencies are derived by dividing a 200 kHz signal from the A4 reference module by 200 and 500 The internal signals are leveled by an amplifier and a 12 bit DAC When FM is enabled it is routed to the A5 sig gen synth module When AM is enabled it is routed to the A6 output module when the RF output frequency is lt 10
171. FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE 2 DATA FREQUENCY 9 Mas en a AMPLITUDE mv 6 ae emt D M 8 36 REF wW emt SET Bw m Ex EME ON OFF iyi JAMPLITUDE ENCODER INT Bt ON OFF 400 He AC 1 kHz INT EXT D 1 kHz DC RECALL 600 5 ATION SOURCE n MOD INPUT OUTPUT RE ON OFF HOLD RF OUTPUT A wsv 1a 2 7 i AM y MEMORY M saf PN sea E an 22a2d Operation Examples Setting the RF Output Signal Setting the RF Output Signal In this example you will set the frequency amplitude and modulation level of the RF output signal Setting the Frequency 1 Set the frequency to 100 MHz using the keys shown below the instrument diagram If you make a mistake while entering a value press lt to correct it UU Ann FREQUENCY _ MODULATION UE AMPLITUDE 1 00 00000 MHz colfon BONO FREQUENCY Setting the Amplitude functi drw 2 Set the amplitude to 100 dB m i F
172. GE READ EE d Kee Rd EE e 2 45 Program Code Implementation 2 46 Receiving the Clear Message deed ud eX RR de 2 48 Additional Programming Information sisse nes 2 48 3 Installation Unpacking Your Signal Generator lise 601 se she eR RR ERR d dd 3 2 PONE bug sien e RRS do dad ak eee Dai cR RO ein 3 3 Power Regu mibribs c oaa aucun Wedd Rus uc x Rok Sue D Oed Sus Hee 3 3 RESON Eun east Seka dust nea da 3 3 Turning On the Signal Genieratur iie sese t eR Ron a Ree RR once HR dee d 3 6 Connecting Eo Other Insbr iens sso deed xe kdo ao eg pss ACE dob RS RC Ros 3 7 storingthesional seca pue sd perdu REE dos SI LEN oed Baca 3 8 Shippingihe Signal GRE AE EA Sheree KR p A d 3 9 4 Specifications oA ee eee 4 1 pirn SDECHEEBEIOUEE 95 de da alba bl RR RC 4 1 Frequency Spec mel OI aoc uunc uds SR o XU fosse n RU d dod 4 2 Intenal Bererence Oscillator nc cece tothe nes Soaps Chee Ae RO addo isa pase gd 4 2 v 4 3 SUC al PUG
173. HANUMERIC 40CHARS TEST PAGING POCSAG 5 Displays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888 for LCD test with 40 characters of 8 6 User definable message up to 40 characters long set from the front panel E nter numeric messages with the keypad Al phanumeric messages require the rad dBuV SHIFT key to access the alphabetical characters blue letters above the keypad If required alphabetical characters are not available on the front panel send a message from an external controller over GPIB Refer to SOU Rce PAGing FORMat POCSag FLEX FTD MESS DE Fine string in Chapter 2 MESSAGE LENGTH specifies the maximum number of characters that will be sent out and displayed in the message field The allowable range is 1 to 40 After specifying the number of characters press MHz dB m ENTER to save the new value When the value of this parameter is equal to or greater than the length of the message the whole message will be sent out When the value of this parameter is less than the length of the message only the characters specified by this parameter are output For example if the MESSAGE NO is 1 0123456 and the MESSAGE LENGTH is 5 the message which is displayed and will be sent out is actually 01234 Setting the Encoding Mode The number of times a message is transmitted and the level of that transmission are determined by the following menu
174. Hz kHz Lower Measured Upper 10 5 0 1 0 16 10 50 0 1 0 16 10 100 0 1 0 16 100 5 0 1 0 16 100 50 0 1 0 16 100 100 0 1 0 16 400 5 0 1 0 16 400 30 0 1 0 16 400 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 5 0 1 0 16 756 25 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 100 0 1 0 16 1000 5 0 1 0 16 1000 50 0 1 0 16 1000 100 0 1 0 16 Table 8 27 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 2 Limits RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648B 8663A 8902A kHz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 50 0 1 0 16 1500 1501 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 10 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 50 0 1 0 16 2000 2001 5 700 100 0 1 0 16 8 76 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 28 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 77 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 28 AM Accuracy Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm
175. IB Programming GPIB Programming 2 2 3 Installation This chapter provides information about the following unpacking the signal generator connecting ac power turning on the signal generator connecting to other instruments storing the signal generator shipping the signal generator Installation Unpacking Your Signal Generator Unpacking Your Signal Generator 1 Unpack the contents of the shipping container 2 Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material insideis stressed keep them until you have checked the instrument for proper operation 3 Inspect the signal generator to ensure that it was not damaged during shipment If mechanical damage or defects have occurred notify the carrier as well as Agilent Technologies K eep the shipping materials for inspection by the carrier WARNING To avoid hazardous electrical shock do not connect ac power to the instrument when there are any signs of shipping damage to any portion of the outer enclosure cover and panels CAUTION Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument 4 for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then f
176. IEEE 488 1 1987 This standard defined the roles of instruments and controllers in a measurement system and a structured scheme for communication In particular IEEE 488 2 described how to send commands to instruments and how to send responses to controllers It defined some frequently used housekeeping commands explicitly but each instrument manufacturer was left with the task of naming any other types of commands and defining their effect IEEE 488 2 specified how certain types of features should be implemented if they were included in an instrument It generally did not specify which features or commands should be implemented for a particular instrument Thus it was possible that two similar instruments could each conform to IEEE 488 2 yet they could have an entirely different command set Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is the new instrument command language for controlling instruments that goes beyond IEEE 488 2 to address a wide variety of instrument functions in a standard manner SCPI promotes consistency from the remote programming standpoint between instruments of the same class and between instruments with the same functional capability GPIB Programming 2 1 Programming Guidelines GPIB Definition What is Programmable GPIB Address Error Messages Programming Language Query Advanced Programming 2 2 GPIB Programming GPIB the General Purpose Interface Bus is the instrumen
177. IEEE 488 2 status reporting will not be covered The above operating status will satisfy most needs for status reporting POWer Status Register NOTE Unmarked bits in registers do not POWer Summary Bit apply for normal operation status plitude These bits must be masked when querying status See the 3 QUEStionable Status Register programming examples 4 9 5 E 6 7 8 9 MODulation Summary Bit ER P M QUESHonable Lu wn JJ PAGing Summary Bit Ext Mod Level High Ext Mod Levat Low Unspecified Standard Event Status Register 0 Operation Complete Q H Request Control 1 3 Query Eror 2 a 4 Device Dependent Error 3 1 j 5 Execulion Error 4 7 Command Error 5 E 7 User Request 5 I Power On 7 L PAGIng Status Reginter Start of Frame Batch mum End of Encoding Ain bh On 2 C status drw Figure 2 1 8648 Status Register Model GPIB Programming 2 13 External Modulation Input Level Status 2 14 GPIB Programming External modulation input level status may be queried for high low or input level correct The instrument automatically detects the input level 1 Vpk into 600 ohms for full scale modulation and displays the result on the front panel display but must be queried for GPIB reporting Example Check the Condition of Modulation Input High or
178. J16 joi 27 12 157 DAC PLN 8 NC DATA pus A10 3 8 gt 5V A3J3 PINS 9 16 EN INT gt 10 gt L 38V LPF2 ROW 1 PIN 9 to ROW 1 8 lt 19 AOd20 W16 iid x d ROW 8 PIN 16 8 ATTEN CONTROL gt 1 gt SPARE CK 4 bo A11 rae SERIAL osp NON 1 0 bata 328 1 0 VOLATILE 2 SPARE EN w A3J22 SRAM 3 15 RPP RST ROME D GND 1 0 DISPLAY lt 1 lt pare 289 151 SWITCH ROM map yw BATTERY A3 S7 15V CONTROL GND 5V i54 DISPLAY 1 gt 45V CONTROL 1 abd 510 38V ue a MEMORY FREQUENCY mss MODULAT ON mmn AVPL I TUDE 22 5 EEPROM 100 00000 MHZ FM 3 00 kHz 100 0 dBm lt gt 4 R W 1 6 MOD GEN MOD GEN 1 52 a W18 FROM 42 5 gt NDAC FRONT PANEL MOD o GE eo I Sis 45v 8 INPUT OUTPUT TO A3J21 T 9 GPIB NORMAL NORMAL S16 SEND SRQ a DO PIN 7 11 07 to DO PIN 1 to D4 PIN 4 D7 PIN 14 1 05 13 to 07 PIN 16 sn64d j 8648B C D BLOCK DIAGRAM Sheet 1 of 2 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution 5b 12 8648B C D BLOCK DIAGRAM SH
179. LINE SWITCH KEY CAP MP 10 5041 8801 4 FOOT FULL MOD MP11 0515 2086 4 SCREW M4 x 07 7MM LG 90 DEG FLH HD MP12 0515 0372 22 SCREW MACH M3x0 5 8MM LG MP13 0515 0380 35 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 10M M LG MP14 0515 2243 4 SCREW MACH M4 0 12SEMPAN TX MP15 08647 40003 2 REAR FOOT HANDLE MP16 NOT ASSIGNED MP17 NOT ASSIGNED MP18 0361 1341 4 RIVET NYL 3 9DIA HOLDS B1TO MP1 MP19 2950 0054 2 NUT HEX 1 2 28 MP20 08648 00023 1 MOUNTING BRACKET FOR A30 OPTION 1EP S1 3101 2216 1 LINE SWITCH 0515 1940 2 SCREW MACH 2 5 6PCHPANTX P O S1 W1 08647 61007 1 MODULATION CABLE W2 08647 61011 1 DISPLAY CABLE W3 08647 21022 1 RF OUTPUT CABLE ATTENUATOR TO RF OUTPUT WA 08647 61005 1 POWER SUPPLY CABLE W5 NOT ASSIGNED 6 7 Replaceable Parts 8648A Replaceable Parts Table 6 1 8648A Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description W6 08647 61004 1 ASSEMBLY INCLUDES LINE SWITCH S1 AND WIRE HARNESS AND LINE MODULE A9 W13 8120 6792 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 TO 28 OPTION 1 W14 8120 6789 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 3TO 21 OPTION 1EP W15 8120 6788 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 2 TO INPUT OUTPUT OPTION 1EP W16 8120 6792 1 RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY AUDIO BIAS 14 1 18 OPTION 1 2 W17 8120 6789 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY AUDIO GEN 14 21 OPTION 1E2 W18 8120 6788 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL AUDIO CABLE 14 2 TO MOD
180. Local Channel ID Coverage Zone 55102 BIW111 Country Code Traffic Management Flag Frame Offset BIW101 1b 15 Operation Reference Function SSID NOTE NID Tests a pager in the SSID and NID modes The NID mode in addition to the SSID mode is a roaming network for covering wider multiple areas NID consists of a network address and a short message vector as follows SSI D1 BI W000 Local Channel ID Coverage Zone SSID2 BIW111 Country Code SSID Traffic Management Flag TMF Frame Offset BIW101 NID Network Address 21 bits Short M essage Vector RF Channel M Multiplier Service Area NID Traffic Management Flat TMF When ALPHANUMERIC is selected in the PAGER field and SSID NID is selected in the ROAMING MODE field the maximum allowable range of the MESSAGE LENGTH field is limited to 35 The following menu is displayed for setting the SSI D mode for a pager to be tested C FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE LOCAL ID 000 COVERAGE ZONE 00 COUNTRY CODE 0000 SSID TMF 02 Q encode25 drw LOCAL ID Defines the local channel ID of a pager under test The allowable range is 0 to 511 COVE RAGE ZON
181. Low 18 OUTPUT F 13 STATIGUES MOD COND SE EHTER 7133 Value 30 HodzBIBHRHHDCValue io 48 IF THEM PRINT Ext Mod Input Hiah 58 Mod BIHANDC value 27 BE IF Med 2 THEN FEIHT Ext Hod Input Low END Line 10 Queries the condition of the MODulation register Besides querying the condition you may also query if an event has occurred such as the external modulation input being high or low at some previous time Replace the COND with EVEN to read the event status Reading the event status clears the register Line 20 Enters the condition of the MODulation register into the variable Value Line 30 Uses the HP BASIC command BINAND to check the contents of bit O in Value If bit O is a 1 it will be reported as a decimal equivalent 1 and Mod will equal 1 Line 40 Checks if the MODulation condition is 1 and if true prints that the external modulation input is high Line 50 Uses the HP BASIC command BINAND to check the contents of bit 1 in Value If bit 1 decimal equivalent 2 is a 1 Mod will equal 1 Line 60 Checks if the MODulation condition is 2 and if true prints that the external modulation input is low Example Generate Service Request for External Modulation Input High amp or Low l8 OUTPUT 7129 STATI GUESS HOD EHRB QUTFUT 7132 STATI QUES EWAB tes 3B OUTFPLIT SRE 5 IF 7195 THEM
182. METER oo noon oo rararaca cac co nu Output 8648 UNDER TEST an617a2d Figure 7 10 AM Level Test Setup 2 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR 20000000 e DIGITAL MULTIMETER o00000 oo Dpooooo o000 Output 8648 UNDER TEST an618a2d 7 12 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 11 Location of J 31 and J 32 on the Motherboard OU PUN A3 Motherboard an619a2d With the line power turned off install the Test Point Extender J 31 J 31 pin Lis the rear pin on the right edge of connector 31 If jumper J 32 is installed on the motherboard remove it Turn the line power Connect the equi pment as shown above Preset all of the equipment Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC Adjustments Manual Adjustments Detector Offset 8648A Only Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U Description This adjustment sets up the output board to allow the detector offset potentiometer to be adjusted A high level reference is set up and then the DAC is reduced by 13 dB and the detector offset potentiometer is adjusted for 13 dB Required Test Equipment Power Meter Power Sensor Procedure Figure 7 12 Detector Offset Test Setup 8648 UNDER T
183. Measured Hz MHz MHz MHz 10 11 5 700 7 0 45 100 101 5 700 7 0 45 248 249 5 700 7 0 45 251 252 5 700 4 0 35 400 401 5 700 4 0 35 501 501 5 700 7 0 45 750 751 5 700 7 0 45 1000 1001 5 700 7 0 45 1500 1501 5 700 14 0 75 8 82 Table 8 34 Harmonics Performance Test 8648B 8566B Limits dBc Frequency Harmonic Uncertainty MHz Frequency Upper Measured dB MHz 1 2 30 0 12 2 4 30 0 1 2 5 10 30 0 1 2 10 20 30 0 1 2 20 40 30 0 1 2 100 200 30 0 1 2 100 300 30 0 1 2 300 150 30 0 1 2 500 1000 30 0 1 2 500 1500 30 0 1 2 600 1200 30 0 1 2 600 1800 30 0 1 2 700 1400 30 0 1 2 700 2100 30 0 1 2 800 1600 30 0 1 2 800 2400 30 0 1 2 900 1800 30 0 1 2 1000 2000 30 0 1 2 1100 2200 30 0 1 2 1200 2400 30 0 1 2 1500 3000 30 0 2 0 1990 995 30 0 1 2 2000 3000 30 0 2 0 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record 8 83 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 35 Spurious Performance Test 8648A Limits dBc Amplitude Frequency Spur Uncertainty dBm MHz MHz Upper Measured dB 4 242 274 55 0 12 247 259 55 0 1 2 6 1 999 55 0 1 2 1 1000 55 0 1 2 41 1000 55 0 1 2 61 1000 55 0 1 2 91 1000 55 0 12 102 286 55 0 12 137 315 55 0 1 2 150 148 55 0 12 150 149 55 0 12 150
184. OM is on the A3 assembly with the RAM Output tune cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A6 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A6 assembly replacethe A3 assembly which contains the RAM 5c 3 Service Error Messages 515 Description Cause What To Do 516 Description Cause What To Do 517 Description Cause What To Do 518 Description Cause What To Do 5c 4 Freq Ext level cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A10 freq ext assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A10 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM Config cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writ
185. Operation and Service Guide Agilent Technologies 8648A B C D Signal Generator Serial Number Prefixes This manual applies directly to the following model serial prefix combinations and below 8648A 8648B 8648C 8648D 3847A U 4037A U 4037A U 4037A U ES Agilent Technologies Part Number 08648 90048 Printed in USA March 2001 Supersedes September 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2001 Agilent Technologies WEEE Directive This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marking requirements The affixed label indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE Directive z Annex 1 this product is classed as a Monitoring and Control instrumentation product Do not dispose in domestic household waste To return unwanted products contact your local Agilent office or see http www agilent com environment product for more information x a Agilent Technologies Printed in USA June 2005 Contents 1 Operation OUK OVE 1 2 S LL o xad ex daa ride TREO NA 1 2 POENIS n C Mmm 1 2 3 Function and Data Keys ceece eee bees eG ben ERA PERS Y REA E EE RA RE 1 3 BR Rao sauer doe ded cdi wed cp gaan 1 4 cus seus gue
186. Option 1E5 Only Automated Performance Tests Power Level Accuracy 8 6 Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performance Test FM Accuracy Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 1 FM Accuracy Equipment Setup MEASURING RECEIVER 8648 UNDER TEST ooooo a mE n n rnm o 00 INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn64a Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset FM mode Peak detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 khz low pass filter BW N Configure the 8648 1 Turn FM on press FM MOD ON OFF 2 Set the rate press INT 1 Khz 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m 4 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record 8648A Table 8 5 8648B Table 8 22 8648C Table 8 47 8648D Table 8 72 8 7 Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performance Test 8648B C D Only The following steps are for the 8648B C D only For the 8648A this performance test is concluded Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 2 FM Accuracy equipment Setup for 8648B C D SYNTHESIZED 8648 UNDER TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR oureut Dus MEASURING o p 399 INPUT 500 sn67a NOTE Use RF mixer MDC 164 when testing the 8648C D When testing the 8648B either RF mixer MDC 174 or MDC 1
187. P CCITT weighting filter AM Modulator A Personal CPU 386 or better Any that Automated Adjustments and Computer Clock 33 MHz or faster meets the Performance Tests 8 Mb or more requirements Disk Drive 3 5 inch Hard Drive 350 Mb or more Monitor 16 color VGA MS Windows 3 x or MS Windows 95 98 NT GPIB Interface Card 82341C DVM Range 50 V to 50 V 3458A AM Level and Distortion A functions DC and AC AM Level A DC accuracy 0 01 AM Level FE A Input impedance gt 10 MW AM Modulator A AC range 100 kHz Motherboard Audio Path A AC accuracy 0 1 Audio Generator A LF Output Level A LF Power Level Accuracy A 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy V Frequency Freq range 10 MHz to 4000 MHz 5350B DC FM Frequency Error P Counter Freq accuracy 35 Hz at 4000 MHz CW Frequency Accuracy V Indudes reference and counter accuracy Service Recommended Test Equipment Table 5 1 Recommended Test Equipment Automated Adjustment Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Use Model Performance Test P Adjustment A Supp Verification Test V Frequency Resolution 0 1 Hz 5316B Internal Reference Oscillator A Counter Manual Adjustment Function Freq range 1 kHz 33120A AM Level and Distortion A Generator Amplitude 4 Vpk AM Level A DC output 4 Vdc AM Level FE A AM Modulator A Motherboard Audio Path A Measuring FM Accuracy 2 of
188. P frequency to the value and units Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Sets the internal modulation generator waveform to the shape shape may be SIN TRI SQU or SAW Options 1E2 amp 1EP only Selects external dc coupling for PM Selects external ac coupling for PM Switches pulse modulation on Switches pulse modulation off FM STAT FM SOUR FM INT FREQ FM INT2 FREQ FM INT2 FUNC SHAP FM EXT COUP PM DEV PM STAT PM SOUR PM INT FREQ PM INT2 FREQ PM INT2 FUNC SHAP PM EXT COUP PULM STAT ON PULM STAT OFF GPIB Programming 2 7 Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions continued Command Statement Pager Encoding Option 1EP INIT IMM ABOR TRIG COUN value DM FORM FSK2 FSK4 DM STAT ON OFF DM DEV value DM POL NORM INV DM FILT STAT ON OFF PAG SEL POCS FLEX FTD RESY PN15 PAG POCS FLEX FTD PN15 RATE value PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS SEL value PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS DEF string PAG POCS FLEX FTD MESS LENG value PAG POCS FLEX FTD ARB DEF value value PAG POCS FLEX FTD ARB STAR value PAG POCS FLEX FTD ARB STOP value FLEX FTD TYPE TONE NUM ALPH HBIN PAG FLEX FTD VECT STAN SPEC NUMB PAG FLEX FTD NUMB lt value PAG FLEX FTD CYCL value PAG FLEX FTD FRAM value PAG FLEX FID PHAS A B C D PAG FLEX FTD COLL value
189. PULSE MODULATOR ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E6 A14 08648 60126 1 AUDIO GENERATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E2 08648 69126 1 EXCHANGE AUDIO GENERATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E2 08648 60374 1 AUDIO GENERATOR UPGRADE KIT OPTION 1E2 6 14 Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Table 6 2 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description B1 3160 0866 1 FAN TBAX F1 2110 0780 1 FUSE 3A 250 V NOT SHOWN MP1 08647 61025 1 ASSEMBLY CHASSIS For serial prefixes lt 3836A 3836U also order 08647 61030 MP2 08647 00026 1 COVER CARDBOX MP3 08647 00030 1 COVER MOTHERBOARD MP4 08647 00031 1 COVER RF MP5 08647 00020 1 MOUNT POWER SUPPLY MP6 08648 00012 1 CLAMP MEMORY BOARD BRACKET MP7 NOT ASSIGNED MP8 08647 00028 1 COVER INSTRUMENT MP9 5041 3621 1 LINE SWITCH KEY CAP MP10 5041 8801 4 FOOT FULL MOD 11 0515 2086 4 SCREW 4 x 07 7MM LG 90 DEG FLH HD 12 0515 0372 18 SCREW MACH x 0 5 8MM LG MP13 0515 0380 35 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 10MM LG MP14 0515 2243 4 SCREW MACH 4 0 12SEMPAN TX MP15 08647 40003 2 REAR FOOT HANDLE MP16 0515 0669 1 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 30MM LG MP17 0515 0669 1 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 30 MM LG MP18 0361 1341 4 RIVET NYL 3 9DIA HOLDS 1 1 MP19 2950 0054 2 NUT HEX 1 2 28 MP24 2190 0584 3 WASHER LOCK M3 MP25 08648 00025 1 Z BRACKET MP26 08648 00026 1
190. Prefix 8648C Prefix 8648D Prefix 3636A and above 3643U and above 3623A and above 3642U and above 3623A and above 3642u and above 3613A and above 3642U and above TheVFD is a 2x40 display The intensity of this display is at 100 and cannot be adjusted 3 Function and Data Keys The keys in the FUNCTION and DATA blocks allow you to enter values for setting the frequency amplitude and modulation level of the RF output signal If Option 1EP is present the FM ENCODER key will toggle between pager encoder ENCODER mode and FM mode If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the rad dBuV key functions as a SHIFT key This key lets you input alphabetical characters using the DATA and MODULATION SOURCE blocks when you arein pager encoder mode If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the MHz dB m key functions as an ENTER key The ENTER key must be used to store any numeric or alphabetic characters entered by way of the DATA and MODULATION source blocks 1 3 Operation Quick Overview 4 Increment Set Keys When you press a FUNCTION key that function becomes the active function Press INCR SET to view or change increment value for the active function Press or at any time to change the active function setting by the increment value If Option LEP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode these keys have alt
191. QUENCY MODULATION OEHBBESSSHB 10 00000 AMHz mes ea EVE CfA 51010 ucc _ f 0 CJ CJ zn Q0 x 7 1 0 etm ref3 drw Atttention In the reference mode the output frequency equals the reference frequency the displayed offset frequency Turning the Reference Mode Off or On 4 Turn off the reference mode to display the actual output frequency i FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE a 490 00000 MHz rei4 drw 5 Turn on the reference mode without changing the reference frequency ae Lt px FREQUENCY MODULATION a AMPLITUDE EN 10 00000 MHz V J refS drw 1a 17 Operation Examples Offsetting the RF Output from a Reference 6 Change the displayed units to kHz Note that for amplitude reference settings are displayed in dB units only SSS ee ee Oojsjecoog sc Ky FREQUENCY MEI MODULATION MEN AMPLITUDE Ofoojonno dal 102 1 aC 10000 00 AkHz Clo C3 oO e o oje Q par ref6 drw S
192. RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM Replace the assembly Both the calibration ROM and RAM are on the A3 assembly FM sense cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A5 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If the failure is still present after replacing the A5 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM 5c 1 Service Error Messages 506 Description Cause What To Do 507 Description Cause What To Do 508 Description Cause What To Do 509 Description Cause What To Do 5c 2 FM mult cal restore failure After detecting a failure comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A5 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A5 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM Output level cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibrati
193. RE ERB Os TOES 8 19 Measure Distortion Amplitudes iiis sura senda ew od Phew ewe gaa aes 8 20 Test ROOK eee ee POOR TREES EWES EERE Ree E T DERE RS 8 20 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance 8 21 Connect the Test Equipment eieesieees eee tages booed 8 21 Configure the Measuring 8 21 Configure the Audio Analyzer deed rira news eb ewes a eRe es 8 21 OPE idc d 8 21 Measure Distortion vic nese eee eres DERE E 8 22 TESE REFS Pep duas bea doe aas 8 22 BbABBICID Only sees E EAR 8 22 Connect the Tes E QUIBIDIeRIE cis 1 dang qa dea ea back ua db ddr es 8 22 Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 8 23 Measure cst a6 4055 ka see kx deae ace saca aos RO E de 8 23 Test ROO ocaosako ERR SEA ERERU ORARE T PEW EE RN Aa RA EET ERAURSKTA EERE ES 8 23 Residual FM Performance Test ia ica us e ke e PEUPLE aca eae ae 8 24 Connect the Test Equipment sirs
194. REQUENCY M MODULATION SM AMPLITUDE a 100 00000 MHz 100 0 dBm AMPLITUDE 2 funct2 drw Turn on the RF Output 3 Press RF ON OFF toturn on the RF output RE OFF is displayed below the amplitude setting when the RF output is turned off 1a 3 Operation Examples Setting the RF Output Signal SSS FREQUENCY MENNENEEEEENN MODULATION E ALTUE C 100 00000 MHz 100 0 dBm RF OFF 100 00000 MHz 100 0dBm i O RF funct3 Setting the Modulation 4 Set the FM deviation to 3 kHz The modulation rate is displayed below the deviation setting Use the MODULATION SOURCE keys to select a modulation source and turn modulation on or off FREQUENCY EM NN MODULATION NE AMPLITUDE S 100 00000 MHz FM 3 00 kHz 100 0 dBm 1 kHz Bo 2 0 kHz mV funct4 drw 1a 4 Operation Examples Incrementing or Decrementing the RF output Signal Incrementing or Decrementing the RF output Signal this example you will increment the amplitude and frequency of the RF output signal Preliminary Steps 1 If they are not already
195. RT FRAME BATCH 0 STOP FRAME BATCH 127 DUMMY CALL OFF ADDRESS1 DUMMY CALL 0032769 ADDRESS2 DUMMY CALL 0000000 Instrument Preset Settings Operation Reference Function Function Parameter Setting Modulation FREQUENCY 1 00 kHz Generator SHAPE SINE Option 1E 2 1b 37 Operation Reference Function GPIB c OOO CJ CO Il J C9 C9 C9 C9 C3 CJ C3 C J f JO OOOO OOO ola HP IB hpibkeys drw 1 ADRS Press ADRS to view the instrument s GPIB address setting in the second line of the FREQUENCY display To change the address press ADRS and a two digit number For example enter 01 to set the address to 1 Acceptable HP IB addresses are 00 through 30 2 LOCAL Press LOCAL to return to front panel operation when the instrument has been set for remote operation The SEQ and REG fields will replace the HP IB status indications in the second line of the FREQUENCY display when the instrument is returned to local oper ation 1b 38 Operation Reference Function The memory keys allow you to save instrument settings into memory registers and recall the registers in a numeric sequence Up to 10 register sequences be defined 0 through 9 A sequence can contain up to 100 registers 00 through 99 There are a total
196. S 4 ON OFF 400 Hz AC X Y 2 1kHz INT EXT fse4 xj EXT 1kHz DC RECALL FREQUENCY 502 Setting Up Pager Encoding The following steps are required to set up pager encoding on the signal generator Details of setting each parameter are provided following this overview 1 Before entering the signal generator pager encoder mode set the correct carrier frequency and FM deviation for the pager under test The FM deviation is 4 8 kHz for FLEX and is 4 5 kHz for POCSAG 2 Press RF ON OFF toturn on the RF output RF OFF is displayed below the amplitude setting when the RF output is turned off 3 Enter the pager encoder mode by pressing FM ENCODER If FM wasn t the last active function press FM ENCODER twice 4 Set up the pager encoder parameters to meet the test requirements of your specific pager 1a 23 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only Use the U NEXT and PREV keys to scroll through the encoder parameters The cursor will blink around the first letter of the active parameter The NEXT key moves forward sequentially through each pager encoder parameter and the 7 PREV key moves backward sequentially To move between setting for each parameter rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob until the desired setting is displayed When characters are entered by way of the keypad such as the c
197. S THEM PRINT Encoding complete SE OUTPUT i19 SOLS BE EMD zo fh Line 10 Enables bit 1 decimal equivalent 2 in the PAGing register Enabling this bit masks other bits in the PAGing register from reporting their status in the summary bit to QUEStionable Line 20 Enables bit 12 decimal equivalent 4096 in the QUEStionable register Enabling this bit masks other bits in the QUEStionable register from reporting their status in the summary bit to STATus Line 30 Enables bit 3 decimal equivalent 8 of the STATus register Enabling this bit masks other bits from reporting Line 40 Uses the HP BASIC command SPOLL Serial Poll to see if the service request bit is reporting any interrupts 2 18 GPIB Programming Line 50 Clears all status registers Clearing the status registers is not absolutely necessary but is used here because of the unknown state of the instrument Example Check the start of each frame Ca oC Cu En mm i qon pi 6 Ca m e rd Pu oC EHD Line 10 Line 20 Line 30 Line 40 Line 50 OUTPUT 719 STRT BUES PRB EHRE 1 OUTPUT 718 STRT BUES EHRB 4096 OUTPUT 719 SRE 8 IF SPOLLEP199 THEM PRINT Encoding complete OUTPUT 71331 epu Enables bit 0 decimal equivalent 1 in the PAGing register Enabling this bit masks other bits in the PAGing register from reporting their status in the summary bit to QUEStionable Enables bit 12 decimal equivalent 4096 in the QUEStio
198. S1 Line Switch None RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy a Adjustment or performance test is automated b Option 1E5 only C Option 1E2 only 5 8 Service Safety Notes Safety Notes These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only WARNING To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened WARNING The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for ten seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply This is a Safety Class 1 Product provided with a protective earthing WARNING ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited WARNING For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuse only with same type and rating type F 250 V 3 A The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited 5 9 Service Safety Notes 5 10 5a Theory of Operation Use the simplified block diagrams and the circuit descriptions in this chapter to understand the instrume
199. ST an617a2d Figure 7 7 AM Level and Distortion Test Setup 2 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR E o20000008 20000000E DIGITAL MULTIMETER nuauua 0000000 Output 8648 UNDER TEST an618a2d 7 10 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 8 Location of J 30 J 31 and J 32 on the Motherboard OO UW BW A3 Motherboard an619a2d With the line power turned off install the Test Point Extender on J 31 J 31 pin Lis the rear pin on the right edge of connector J 31 If jumper J 30 is installed on the motherboard remove it If jumper J 32 is installed on the motherboard remove it Turn on the line power Connect the equipment as shown above Preset all of the equipment Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 11 Adjustments Manual Adjustments AM Level 8648B C D Only Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U Description This adjustment adjusts AM level accuracy on the output module It uses the DVM to measure the dc voltages that are being adjusted on the output module Required Test Equipment Function Generator e DVM J31Test Point Extender refer to the Test Point Extender section at the front of this chapter Procedure Figure 7 9 AM Level Test Setup 1 BNC TEE FUNCTION GENERATOR pooooooos o 00000000E DIGITAL MULTI
200. Service Software for PC s 3 Select Agilent Service Software 1 Login using the User nformation dialog box a In the User Name field type User Case is important b In the Password field type user c Click OK Identifying the DUT After logging in the DUT Selection dialog box is displayed DUT Selection Select An Instrument Family Select Model 8648 Serial Number Address 1 Ensure that 8648 is selected in the Select an instrument family list 2 In the Select model list select the instrument model of the DUT to be adjusted or tested 3 In the Serial Number box enter the complete serial number of the DUT 7 53 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 4 Inthe Address box enter the two digit GPIB address of the DUT Press the ADRS key to display the DUT s GPIB address 5 Select the OK button Selecting the Performance Test or Adjustments and the Test E quipment 1 oncethe DUT Selection dialog box has been completed the Select Test Equipment and Tests dialog box is displayed Select Test Equipment and Tests x TEST SELECTION TEST EQUIPMENT SELECTION Device Type AUDIO ANALYZER a DIGITAL VOLT METER FUNCTION GENERATOR m Model Required Test Equipment Available Test Equipment Serial Number Cal Due Date Selected Tests Selected Test Equipment Model Serial Number 2 Select either the Performan
201. Subharmonics output lt 4 4 lt 1001 MHz Output Impedance Nominally 50 ohms 3200 MHz 4000 MHz 44 Specifications Nonharmonics gt 5 kHz offset lt 4 dBm output level lt 249 MHz lt 1001 MHz lt 2001 MHz lt 4000 MHz Residual FM CCITT rms lt 249 MHz lt 501 MHz lt 1001 MHz lt 2001 MHz lt 4000 MHz SSB Phase Noise at 20 kHz offset typical at f 500 MHz at fe 1000 MHz at fe 2000 MHz at f 3000 MHz at f 4000 MHz Frequency Modulation Peak Deviation rates 25 Hz ac FM 249 MHz 501 MHz 1001 MHz 2001 MHz 4000 MHz Resolution 1096 peak deviation 2001 MHz gt 2001 MHz gt 10 to maximum peak deviation 2001 MHz gt 2001 MHz 7 Hz typically lt 4 Hz 4 Hz typically lt 2 Hz 7 Hz typically lt 4 Hz 14 Hz typically lt 8 Hz 28 Hz typically lt 12 Hz 120 d Bc Hz 116 dBe Hz 110 d Bc Hz 106 dBc Hz 104 dBc Hz 0 to 200 kHz 0 to 100 kHz 0 to 200 kHz 0 to 400 kHz 0 to 800 kHz Specifications 4 5 Deviation Accuracy internal 1 kHz rate lt 1001 MHz lt 2001 MHz lt 4000 MHz Rates Internal Option 1E2 External DC External AC Distortion 1 kHz rate THD N 0 3 to 3 kHz BW 1001 MHz 2001 MHz 4000 MHz 88 to 108 MHz Carrier frequency accuracy relative to CW in dc FM 1001 MHz 2001 MHz 4000 MHz 3 of FM deviation 30 Hz 3 of FM deviation 60 Hz 3 of FM deviat
202. T 6 16 7 Adjustments This chapter documents the adjustments for the 8648 and the service support software that is used for the automated adjustments There are both manual and automated adjustment procedures documented in this chapter This chapter is organized with the following order manual adjustments procedures automated adjustment descriptions service support software descripti on Refer to Table 5 2 for information regarding which adjustments should be performed after an assembly is repaired or replaced 7 1 Adjustments Test Equipment Test Equipment The required test equipment for the adjustments is listed in Table 5 1 Along with the required test equipment this table lists the critical specifications of each the recommended model number and the adjustments that this equipment is used to perform Equipment Setup for Automated Tests The complete test equipment setup includes the 8648 that is being tested the DUT a personal computer PC that runs the adjustment software and the various instruments that make up the electronic test equipment The PC must have a GPIB Interface Bus installed in one of its card slots The DUT is connected tothe PC s GPIB card via a GPIB cable Another GPIB cable connects the PC tothe electronictest equipment The electronic test equi pment must be connected together via additional GPIB cables NOTE Although the test setup illustrations do not show the PC or the GPIB
203. TOP BRACKET OPTION 1E2 MP27 0515 0664 1 SCREW MACH M3 x 12MM LG MP28 0515 0367 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 8MM LG S1 3101 2216 1 LINE SWITCH 0515 1940 2 SCREW MACH 2 5 6PCHPANTX P O S1 W1 08647 61007 1 MODULATION CABLE W2 08647 61011 1 DISPLAY CABLE W3 08648 20127 1 RF OUTPUT CABLE RPP TO RF OUTPUT Replaceable Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Table 6 2 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description WA 08647 61005 1 POWER SUPPLY CABLE W5 NOT ASSIGNED W6 08647 61004 1 ASSEMBLY INCLUDES LINE SWITCH S1 AND WIRE HARNESS AND LINE MODULE A9 W7 08648 20128 1 CABLE FREQUENCY EXTENSION TO ATTENUATOR W8 08648 20015 1 CABLE ATTENUATOR TO RPP W9 08648 20129 1 SEMI RIGID CABLE FREQUENCY EXTENSION TO PULSE MODULE OPTION 1E6 W10 08648 20130 1 CABLE PULSE MODULE TO ATTENUATOR OPTION W11 08648 60005 1 PULSE MODULE COAX ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E6 W12 08648 60006 1 PULSE MODULE CABLE ASSEMBLY OPTION 1E6 W16 8120 6873 1 RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY AUDIO BIAS 14 1 18 OPTION 1E2 W17 08648 80057 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY AUDIO GEN 14 21 OPTION 1E2 W18 08648 80056 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL AUDIO CABLE 14 2 TO MOD INPUT OUTPUT OPTION 1E2 MISCELLANEOUS 5961 4720 1 TRANSIT CASE 08648 10012 1 SERVICE SUPPORT SOFTWARE 08648 60175 1 KIT TEST POINT EXTENDER 08648 60180 1 SERVICE SOFTWARE KI
204. Y MODULATION AMPLITUDE OO PAGER CODE 0000000 SC ee CO 100 100 Encodel 2 drw PAGER CODE accepts only numeric characters up to 7 digits Use the numeric keys to enter the capcode Terminate your entry with the MHz dB m ENTER key Message During Encoding To start and stop encoding after selecting all pager encoder parameters press the a pager under test INCR SET START STOP key Thefollowing display is shown during encoding FREQUENCY EN MODULATION al AMPLITUDE MESSAGE NO 6 AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm encode34 drw NOTE If the RF output is turned off AMPLITUDE x xdBm will be substituted for RF OFF While encoding the blinking cursor is on the first character A of AMPLITUDE Or R of OFF 1b 25 Operation Reference Function RESYNC Setting the Encoding Mode The following parameters must be set to activate the resynchronization function for FLEX FLEX TD pager under test Q Q BUR S FREQU
205. a In other words the arbitrary messages cannot contain the following data and the 8648A Option 1EP automatically generates these data FLEX FLEX TD Sync 1 and Sync 2 data POCSAG Pre amble and the Synchronization Codeword data The data of each buffer memory segment can only be entered from the external controller using the SOURce PAGing FORMat POCS FLEX FTD ARBitrary DEFine GPIB command Refer to PAGing Subsystem Option LEP Only for the details of this command usage Since the arbitrary message cannot set the data rate and the modulation settings set them using the following commands m For FLEX FLEX TD PAG FLEX FTD RATE 1600 3200 6400 DM FORM FSK2 FSK4 DM DEV 4 8 KHZ DM STAT ON 1 m For POCSAG PAG POCS RATE 5121120012400 DM FORM FSK2DM DEV 3 KHZ DM STAT 0N 1 When transmitting the arbitrary message the start and stop segment numbers of the buffer memory can be specified The start and stop values are set in the Message Menu START FRAME and STOP FRAME for FLEX FLEX TD START BATCH and STOP BATCH for POCSAG from the front panel by the SOURce PAGing FORMat POCS FLEX FTD ARBitrary STARt and STOP GPIB commands from the external controller For example when the start and stop segment numbers of the buffer memory are 8 and 11 respectively and the encoding mode is burst the number of times is 2 the actual transmitted data is illustrated as follows Buffer Memory
206. a 5c and with your own troubleshooting style The troubleshooting reference information should contain the details needed as you follow your troubleshooting process This chapter contains the following troubleshooting reference information Troubleshooting checklist Use the troubleshooting checklist as a reminder of things to check AC Mains Line F use Removal Use these instructions to replace the AC mains fuse Modulation Test Points and Power Supply LEDs Diagram Use the diagram to check for the proper modulation reading and for a quick visual check that the power supply voltages are present Power Supply Distribution Diagram Use the diagram to identify the correct power supply voltage distribution Instrument Block Diagrams There are three instrument block diagrams one for the 8648A one for the 8648B C and one for the 8648D The block diagrams contain pin and connector designations as well as input output specifications See Chapter 5a Theory of Operation for the block diagram description 5b 1 Troubleshooting Information Troubleshooting Checklist Troubleshooting Checklist Does the Signal Generator Appear to Power Up Normally No Error Message Yes J Mains line Display J Chapter 5c J RF Output ok voltage ok Contrast ok EN M Y J Fan ok J Line Fuse ok J MOD INPUT N OUTPUT ok PS 6 Nu a Power Supply Power Supply J
207. a 5 keyboard 5a 5 modulation distribution 5a 8 motherboard 5a 8 output 5a 11 5a 12 post regulator 5a 8 power supply 5a 7 pulse modulator 5a 17 reference 5a 9 reverse power protection 5a 16 RPG 5a 5 sig gen synth 5a 10 synthesizer 5a 10 timebase 1b 49 adjustment 7 5 7 7 DAC calibration 7 23 TIMEBASE ADJ 16 50 U uninstalling the software 7 41 units conversion 1b 32 V verification tests 9 1 vernier 1b 47 Index
208. a burst sequence refer to FLEX FLE X TD Signaling Examples ON Default setting Outputs the re synchronization pattern OFF Does not output the re synchronization pattern NOTE If TERMINATOR is set to OFF the pager under test is not synchronized Therefore the pager can not be synchronized with the future page until the re synchronization pattern is sent To send the re synchronization pattern set TERMINATOR to ON in this menu or select RESYNC in the format menu Entering the Pager Capcode Address The pager code menu looks like the following eee D FREQUENCY ME MODULATION EN a C PAGER CODE A0012477 DUMMY CALL OFF ox encode40 cdr PAGER CODE accepts alphanumeric characters up to 16 digits Usethe numeric keys to enter the capcode To select an alphabetical character press rad dBuV SHIFT before the numeric key associated with the desired alphabetic character Terminate your entry with the MHz dB m ENTER key A FLEX FLEX TD pager s capcode contains address and protocol information Entering the capcode in the PAGER CODE data field automatically sets up the ADDRESS TYPE ADDRESS and ADDRESS2 in the address menu and the FRAME PHASE and COLLAPSE CYCLE in the protocol menu
209. actual attenuator value for each frequency the difference between the two measurements and record it in the third row of the table For each frequency listed in Table 8 1 set the 8648 amplitude to the level shown in the table and measure the RF power level through the 10 dB attenuator Record the measurement in the fifth row of the table Calculate the actual output power for each frequency the sum of the measured power and the attenuator value and record it in the test record Table 8 1 High Power Level Accuracy Work Table Frequency MHz 3 0 249 9 400 999 9 1500 2100 2500 3200 4000 Power without 10 dB Attenuator Power with 10 dB Attenuator Attenuator Value Amplitude Setting dBm 20 20 20 20 19 17 15 13 13 Measured Power Actual Output Power 7 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record 8 33 Performance Tests RF level Accuracy Performance Test Test Record 8648B Table 8 39 8648B with Options and1E6 Table 8 40 8648C Table 8 64 8648C with Options LEA and 1E6 Table 8 65 8648D Table 8 89 8648D with Options and 1E6 Table 8 90 Configure the Power Meter 1 Connect the 8481D Option H 70 power sensor to the power meter 2 Connec the power sensor through the 11709A 30 dB attenuator to the power meter Power Ref output 3 Zero a
210. ager Encoder 8648A Option 1 The encoder contains the DSP digital signal processor memory DAC serial 1 for the other assemblies timebase and output filters The pager encoder generates FLEX FLEX TD or POCSAG formatted 2 level or 4 level FSK signals It also generates variable frequency sine square triangle and saw or ramp waveforms When the instrument is either in the pager encoding settings state or using the variable frequency waveform source the encoder will work as an internal modulation source connected to the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port The modulated signal can be monitored from the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port as a 2 Vp p signal This assembly has a serial communication port and communicates with the main controller on the A3 motherboard through this port The calibration data for the encoder output level is stored in EEPROM on this assembly The memory consists of EEPROM SRAM and flash memory The flash memory stores the long pager message which will be generated by an external controller To achieve precise timing accuracy for pager protocol the encoder has its own timebase unit TCXO The DAC output signal is filtered by either the 10th order Bessel low pass filter dB at 3 9 kHz or 50 kHz cut off low pass filter 5a 19 Theory of Operation A30 Pager Encoder 8648A Option 1EP 5a 20 5b Troubleshooting Information This chapter is intended to be used in conjunction with the information in chapters 5
211. ameters except for CYCLE all automatically set when the capcode is entered the PAGER CODE data field CYCLE Defines the start cycle The allowable range is to 14 FRAME Defines the start frame where the message is located The allowable range is 0 to 127 PHASE Defines the phase for the pager The allowable ranage is A B C or D COLLAPSE CYCL E Determines how many times a message repeats within when BURST Or CONT is active once every 16 fra in the encoding MODE setting The default setting of 4 will repeat the message mes 2 The allowable range is 0 through 7 REPEAT displayed only if FLEX TD is selected in the format menu Defines the repetition transmission value Determines how many cycles the message will be repeated The allowable range is to 3 Setting the Roaming Mode FREQUENCY S MODULATION AMPLITUDE ROAMING MODE NONE Q encode24 drw ROAMING MODE determines the mode in which a pager is used NONE SSID Tests a pager without the roaming mode Tests a pager in the SSI D mode which responds to a simulcast transmission system SSI D consists of three words as follows 55101 BI WO000
212. apcode terminate the entry with the MHz dB m ENTER key 5 Start signaling the pager after all of the encoder parameters are set by pressing the INCR SET START STOP key Entering Pager Encoding Settings 1 Display the first pager encoder menu After setting your pager s carrier frequency and an FM deviation of 4 8 kHz for a FLEX pager on the signal generator press the FM ENCODER key once again to display the first pager encoder menu FORMAT The FM ENCODER key toggles between the frequency modulation menu and the pager encoder menu F j FREQUENCY MODULATION SEE europe p C C3 FORMAT FLEX L1 M POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON Encodel drw Selecting the Format Settings 2 Set FORMAT to FLEX POLARITY to NORMAL and FILTER to ON a With the blinking cursor on the of FORMAT set the FLEX format by rotating the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob until FLEX is displayed b Press the l NEXT key to move the blinking cursor to POLARITY then use the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob to set the polarity to NORMAL Using the l NEXT key and the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob set FILTER to ON 1a 24 Operation Examples Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only
213. ase C 3 for phase D Displays ABCDEFG where X phase B C D Displays TEST PAGING XXXXXXX where PHASE A PHASE B PHASE or PHASE D Displays ALPHANUMERIC 40CHARS TEST PAGING XXXXXXX where PHASE A PHASE B PHASE or PHASE D Displays 8888888888888888888888888888888888888888 for LCD test with 50 characters of 8 User definable message up to 40 characters long set from the front panel Enter numeric messages with the keypad Al phanumeric messages requirethe dBuV SHIFT key to access the alphabetical characters blue letters above the keypad If required alphabetical characters are not available on the front panel send a message from an external controller over GPIB Refer to SOU Rce Paging F ORM at POCSag FLEX FTD MESS DE Fine string in Chapter 2 ENGTH specifies the maximum number of characters that will be sent out and displayed in the message field The allowable range is 1 to 40 After specifying the number of characters press MHz dB m ENTER to save the new value When the value of this parameter is equal to or greater than the length of the message the whole message will be sent out When the value of this parameter is less than the length of the message only the characters specified by this parameter are output For example if the MESSAGE NO is 1 0123456 X and
214. ass filter 3 Set low input to ground Configure the 8648 1 Turn on press MOD ON OFF 2 Set therate press INT 1 kHz 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m 4 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 8 21 Performance Tests Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Measure Distortion 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648A Table8 11 8648B Table 8 31 e 8648C Table 8 56 e 8648D Table 8 81 8648B C D Only The following steps are for the 8648B C D only For the 8648A this performance test is concluded Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 11 Phase Modulation Distortion Equipment Setup for 8648B C D 8648 UNDER TEST SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR RF OUTPUT AUDIO ANALYZER nuu ooo 2o00 oooo num nooo MEASURING RECEIVER Foooo a n0000 n n MODULATION maman o C pooooo o poon OUTPUT INPUT 500 sn68a NOTE Use RF mixer MDC 164 when testing the 8648C D When testing the 8648B either RF mixer MDC 174 or MDC 164 may be used 8 22 Performance Tests Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 1 Amplitude 16 dBm 2 Frequency CW LO frequencies on test record 3 Modulation off Me
215. asure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648B Table 8 32 e 8648C Table 8 57 e 86480 Table 8 82 8 23 Performance Tests Residual FM Performance Test Residual FM Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 12 Residual FM Equipment Setup NOTE 8648 UNDER TEST SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR OUTPUT AUDIO ANALYZER nuu ood ood 2o00 num nooo MODULATION OUTPUT INPUT 500 sn68a Use RF mixer MDC 174 when testing the 8648A B C When testing the 8648D both RF mixer MDC 174 and MDC 164 are required Configure the Measuring Receiver 8 24 uBR WN FM mode Peak detector 50 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter Performance Tests Residual FM Performance Test Configure the Audio Analyzer 1 AC level mode 2 CCITT weighting filter 3 30 kHz low pass filter 4 Set low input to ground Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 1 Amplitude 16 dBm 2 Frequency CW LO frequencies on test record 3 Modulation off Configure the 8648 1 Turn modulation off press MOD ON OFF 2 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m 3 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and
216. ation with a frequency waveform combination simply pressing that modulation key AM FM or recalls the frequency waveform combination that was set up earlier For example an instrument is configured so the AM state is set up with a 2 kHz sine waveform the FM state is set up with a 500 Hz square waveform and the state is set up with a 5 kHz triangle waveform Then pressing either AM FM or will set the instrument to that modulation type with the frequency waveform combination to which it was previously set NOTE If another key for example FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE and so forth is pressed after a frequency and waveform combination is set pressing the INT 1kHz key once makes the INT 1kHz active Subsequent key presses toggles the instrument through its waveform choices 5 EXT AC EXT DC Press one of these keys to configure the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port as an ac or dc coupled input for modulating the carrier Calibrated modulation requires an audio source of 1 Vpk into 600 ohms For audio source frequencies of less than 10 kHz a or ro indicator will appear in the second line of the MODULATION display when the level of the source is not within approximately 5 of 1Vpk Acceptable Frequency Ranges for an External Audio Source Modulation Coupling Range FM EXTAC 1Hzto150 kHz EXT CC DC to 150 kHz EXT 20Hzto10 kHz 1Hzto25kHz EXT DC to25kHz
217. ation with the DUT lt gt HPBE48B p Enter the DUT current address lt gt lt gt 4 p Enter the desired 5erial Number Select the installed Options 3538401 234 C 1E5 HIGH STABILITY TIMEBASE LJ 1 PULSE MODULATION Enter the desired 11 Attenuator Numbers x Last 4 digits of 5 digit Serial part number number RF REMAINS IN SAME STATE 01234 012345678 C 1E2 AUDIO OSCILLATOR r Progress Indicator SOOO Get Data Send Data Cancel 7 59 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 4 When you have finished reading the information stored in the motherboard select the Cancel button to exit the program The Get Data button can be used if you are checking the data stored on additional motherboards Storing Information in the A3 motherboard To store information to the A3 motherboard follow these steps 1 Open the HP 8648 Motherboard Utility For MS Windows version 3 x a Open the Program Manager window b Open the Service Support program group c Select the HP8648 Motherboard Utility icon For MS Windows 95 98 NT a Select Start b Selec Agilent Service Software for PC s C Select HP8648 Motherboard Utility 2 When the User Information dialog box requesting a password is displayed type 8648 Then select the OK button
218. aute ERRORES ESAEREN DE is RARE 4 13 5 Service Shipping Your Instrument Back to Agilent 5 2 Recommended Test Equipment 0 000 eee e nh 5 3 qz DR Rocio Paca dab uc darc add ng d Mor ar dd Poe Reade ie ids 5 6 Sab DEOS Ls escaso a ad adatto du ds urat dcos dn ap acdc ases d a dta Qu Ge dic donata 5 9 5a Theory of Operation ae rn se Bande ade See pt Meh ese otc dena hed Sel 5a 4 APIO PAR sauces sees Lead Babee Gas dator eu tal bee LEASES DOS Caen ae es 5a 5 beets Sha Chee eee ae Shae 5a 7 AS OMe Os ode qa nnd fina DORE RAT PR esta dod b pa qub fa A 5a 8 AO REISFOER aas esis aes ens doe kh de oe else X doe dali nn erase ene tb cin d a ate 5a 9 Pe SIGS SoHE deed aR Lee TEE hee 5a 10 AG Output ORG Lad tiene ENR eee 5a 11 AG Output 4940 qa dades ui e pao dac citata e dado Re LAR ge 5a 12 A7 Attenuator exon Besa se deed xc Deb sce oi Robes db e P dob Re odo esed 5a 13 A10 Frequency Extension 8648 5a 14 AIL Attenuator 8648B C D h
219. b FREQUENCY MN MODULATION NN gt E EJ EH 0 CI MESSAGE NO 1 MESSAGE LENGTH 40 du HO 0123456 0 oomoo gog oO 4 7 NY 1b 10 ESSAGI Operation Reference Function E No is defined as the following where X represents the phase setting Arbitrary message set from the external controller using the GPIB capability The data must be entered in units of works Refer to TSOU Rce PAGing F ORMat POCSag FLEX FTD ARBitrary DEFine lt NR1 gt NR2 NR1 and Using the Buffer Memory for the Arbitrary Messages in Chapter 2 START FRAME and STOP FRAME are defined in the following menu Q FREQUENCY EN MODULATION AMPLITUDE START FRAME 000 STOP FRAME 127 O encode22 drw The frames between the START FRAME and STOP FRAME Will be transmitted The allowable ranges for both are 000 to 127 L ESSAGE I Displays 01223456 X where X 0 for phase A 1 for phase B 2 for ph
220. base Option 1E6 Pulse modulation 8648B C D only Specifications unique to instruments with Options 1E2 1E6 or 1EP are listed after the general specifications Specifications 4 1 E 07 9 9 9 9 T Frequency Specifications 100 kHz to 1000 MHz 9 kHz to 2000 MHz 9 kHz to 3200 MHz 9 kHz to 4000 MHz Resolution 0 001 Hz Display 10 Hz Accuracy Typically 321 0 6 x carrier frequency in Hz Typically 0 15a1 0 6 x carrier frequency in Hz for Option 1 5 After one hour warm up and within one year of calibration Switching Speed typical 1001 MHz gt 1001 MHz Internal Reference Oscillator Accuracy and stability typical calibration and Aging rate temperature effects line voltage effects adjustment dependent After one hour warm up and within one year of calibration Standard High Stability Timebase Timebase typical Option 1E5 Aging lt 2 ppm year lt 0 1 ppm year or lt 0 0005 ppm day Temperature lt 1 ppm lt 0 01 ppm typical Line Voltage lt 0 5 ppm N A After four days warm up and within one year of calibration t Specification applies at 25 5 C 1 Specification applies for a line voltage change of 5 4 2 Specifications External reference oscillator input Accepts 2 5 10 MHz 5 ppm and a level range of 0 5 V to 2 Vim into 50 ohms Output Range 8648A 10 to 136 dBm 8648B C
221. bration data for the output calibration The adjustment will not let you store away any calibration data unless all of the calibration data points are run Required Test Equipment Power Meter Power Sensor Procedure Figure 7 19 Frequency Extension Calibration Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an69a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 20 Adjustments Manual Adjustments AM Modulator 8648A Only Description This is the AM Accuracy adjustment for the 8648A This adjustment performs the two adjustments to the output board that require the use of the voltmeter It sets up the multiplexer on the output board to measure dc voltages while the potentiometers are being adjusted Required Test Equipment Measuring Receiver Function Generator AudioAnalyzer DVM J 31Test Point Extender refer to the Test Point Extender section at the front of this chapter Procedure Figure 7 20 AM Modulator Test Setup AUDIO ANALYZER DIGITAL MULTIMETER nena 2000 qc on 0000000 Ei 0 ooon so MEASURING RECEIVER Time Base Ref Output 10 MHz Input FUNCTION GENERATOR _M o 00000000E Q Modulation Output b000 00000 e
222. ce Tests radio button to display the list of automated performance tests or the Adjustments radio button to display the list of automated adjustments 3 Fromthe list of performance tests or adjustments select the tests or adjustments that you will perform on the DUT Select the test name by clicking on it The selected tests are highlighted You can select all of the performance tests or adjustments with the Select All button You can unselect all of the selected tests or adjustments with the Unselect button As each test or adjustment is selected the test equipment required to perform the test or adjustment is removed from the list Only the test equipment for the highlighted tests is displayed in the list 4 Oncethetests are highlighted identify all test equipment listed in theRequired Test Equipment box To identify a test equipment instrument a Select the type of device from the Device Type list b Select the model number from the Model list for the device 7 54 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Select the device s serial number from the Available Test Equipment list d Select the Add button to add the device to the list in the Selected Test Equipment box The following buttons are available for the Selected Test Equipment box Add Copies the test equipment highlighted in the Available Test Equipment box to the Selected Test Equipment box Remove Removes the highlighted test equipment from the Selecte
223. coder Signaling Option 1EP Frequency Accuracy with Option 1E5 Typically 0 1521 0 6 x carrier frequency in Hz or 0 092x10 x carrier frequency in Hz within 90 days of calibration After one hour warm up and within one year of calibration Specifications 4 11 Frequency Modulation FSK Deviation Accuracy with Option 1EP 60 Specifications apply over the 25 5 C range 4 8 kHz deviation Meets FLEX requirements at 274 to 288 322 to 329 929 to 982 MHz Pager Signaling POCSAG FLEXTM and FLEX TD Supported Pager Protocols POCSAG Speed 512 1200 and 2400 bps Tone only Numeric Alphanumeric Alphanumeric entered by hex bin code Pseudo noise 15 stage Message Format FLEX FLEX TD Speed 2 Level FSK 4 Level FSK Message Format 1600 and 3200 bps 3200 and 6400 bps Tone only Numeric standard special and numbered Alphanumeric HEX Binary Pseudo noise 15 stage Re synchronization Short Long SSID NID Address Type Supported Roaming Method Messaging Accessible From Front Panel or GPIB Message Types Five fixed built in one user defined Message Length Repetition Modes Messaging Accessible Only Over GPIB 40 characters maximum Single Burst Continuous Message Type arbitrary user defined Batch Length FLEX FLEX TD POCSAG Repetition Mode 128 Frames 128 Batches Single Burst
224. colon The signal generator will be programmed to 3 kHz of deviation Semicolon A semicolon separates completed command statements FM SOUR EXT This command selects the external path for the modulation source FM EXT COUP AC This command selects ac coupling FM STAT ON This command changes the FM modulation to an on state modulation format must be turned on before it is active The other two modulation formats must be turned off prior to activating the desired modulation AM STAT OFF and PM STAT OFF GPIB Programming 2 3 Querying RF Frequency Programming RF Amplitude Programming Pulse Modulation Option 1E6 2 4 GPIB Programming 188 0 ENTER 7193 SEE P UTPLT 713 FREG CHT Freq zet EFequenc d isti Fr Line 100 This command outputs a query for the RF frequency setting You may attach a question mark to any of the signal generators commands to query its setting Line 200 This command enters the queried frequency setting into the variable Freq set Line 300 This command prints the queried frequency setting BLUTPUT 719 PPO AMPL 47 DBM cOUTPIZTRT DH POW AMPL This command programs the RF amplitude POW is 47 DBM higher than AMPL in the command hierarchy and OUTP STAT ON is separated by a colon The signal generator s RF amplitude will be programmed to 47 dBm This command changes the RF amplitude to an on state The RF amplitude defaults to a
225. compare the results to the limits in the test record NOTE The voltage displayed by the audio analyzer can be read as Hz For example 10 mV equals 10 Hz Test Record 8648A Table 8 12 8648B Table 8 33 8648C Table 8 58 8648D Table 8 83 8 25 Performance Tests Harmonics Performance Test Harmonics Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 13 Harmonics Equipment Setup SPECTRUM ANALYZER 10 MHz Ref 8648 UNDER TEST 10 MHz Ref RF Output an626a2d Configure the Spectrum Analyzer 1 Frequency span 500 kHz 2 Resolution BW 10 kHz 3 Video BW 30 kHz Configure the 8648 1 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 2 Turn the modulation off press MOD ON OFF 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m Measure Harmonic Levels 1 Measure the level of the 2nd 3rd and 1 2 harmonics shown in the test record 2 Convert the harmonic level to decibels below the fundamental dBc and compare the results to the corresponding limits Test Record e 8648A Table8 13 8648B Table 8 34 e 8648C Table 8 59 e 8648D Table 8 84 8 26 Performance Tests Spurious Performance Test Spurious Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 14 Spurious Equipment Setup SPECTRUM ANALYZER 10 MHz Ref Output 8648 UNDER TEST 10 MHz Ref RF Output an626a2d Configure the Spectrum Analyzer 1 Frequency span 500 kHz 2 Re
226. curacy Test Setup for Power Levels of gt 40 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST DIGITAL MULTIMETER 50 W RF Output Feed Through an625a2d 7 32 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 32 LF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup for Power Levels of lt 40 dBm SPECTRUM ANALYZER 8648 10MHz 10MH UNDER TEST Ref Out Ref ATTENUATOR an614a2d 1 Connect the equi pment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 33 Adjustments Manual Adjustments FSK Deviation Option 1EP Only Description This adjustment modifies the FM Multiplier and out of band arrays used by the signal generator synthesizer module The purpose is to provide a more accurate FM sensitivity calibration while operating with FSK modulation Required Test Equipment Vector Signal Analyzer Procedure Figure 7 33 FSK Deviation Test Setup VECTOR SIGNAL ANALYZER nan H 000 oo 000 00 Ext Ref Out Ext Ref In nanaannan Bano B Hz Ref Section an64a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 34 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Filter Path Option 1EP Only Description This adjustment creates a calibration array that optimizes deviation accuracy and nulls the carrier offset with two leve
227. d 1 26 Selecting the Pager Capcode lt 5 la 27 Selecting thie dc Rees Roe Eee 1 28 Selecting the Roaming Mode Settings eR Um non ee 1 29 ee ee er ee ree 1 29 Contents 1b Operation Reference Freeney eng AMOS enero Rte 1b 2 ace cite ty ad ee 1b 2 2 DIG Select AON a pois eho x d aci a a ox a ede d adiac aca 1b 2 ABEL BET eiu ebb PA Pa ePE 1b 2 a REP ON OEF Ro ap D neo dug denda 1b 3 RECHT uad dim SOSA ESI E E Udo MIRI ET d rk M RYE ee ae DR 1b 4 ipa aoo cade ac a bees ac ded 1b 4 Z AMPELHTUDIE iau Papa BG aca 10 5 Bete By poe wa ded be Qe P E ee ce edo 10 5 Setting Up the Pager Encoder ices sige naesedeecagee Y Wir 1b 6 Piles BISOUS i da doe Y ini ac awh a ae e e E 1b 29 Lrerement SOC 6 SS GREE SEES TPE ie BH ES vdd 1b 31 LE d oe o ege dox pO e ede camen ae ee Eo c 1b 32 Preset EE ER
228. d Test Equipment box Clear Removes all of thetest equi pment from the Selected Test E qui pment box NOTE f necessary the test equipment GPIB address can be changed after it is 6 added to the Selected Test Equipment box Change the GPIB address by pressing the right arrow on the keyboard until the GPIB Address selection in the Selected Test Equipment box is selected The GPIB address is selected when it has a dark box around the selection Then typethe new GPIB address and press Enter to change the address e Repeat the previous steps for each test equipment instrument Once the test equipment has been identified select the Add button located above the Selected Tests box to add each of the highlighted tests or adjustments The tests or adjustments that were highlighted are now displayed in the list in the Selected Tests box The following buttons are available for the Selected Tests box Add Copies the test equipment highlighted in the list of tests and adjustments to the Selected Tests box Remove Removes the highlighted tests and adjustments from the Selected Tests box Clear Removes all of the tests and adjustments the Selected Tests box If the appropriate tests or adjustments are listed in the Selected Tests box and the appropriate test equipment is listed in the Selected Test Equipment box select the OK button Saving the Test Results 1 When the Save As dialog box is displayed select the File Name box an
229. d compare it to the corresponding limits 8 28 Test Record e 8648A Table 8 15 8648B Table 8 36 e 8648C Table 8 61 86480 Table 8 86 Performance Tests DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test 8 29 Performance Tests RF level Accuracy Performance Test RF level Accuracy Performance Test NOTE This performance test is an adequate substitute for the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test If the preferred Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed this performance test is not required Description This power accuracy verification procedure directly measures the full performance of the 8648A For the 8648B C D direct measurements can only be made over the full dynamic range up to 1300 MHz The measuring receiver verifies the operation of the ALC and step attenuator over its full dynamic range 13 dBm to 127 dBm for frequencies less than 1300 MHz Two power meters are used to verify operation at frequencies greater than 1300 MHz down to 60 dBm Historically testing of the 8648B C D demonstrates that low level performance at frequencies less than 1300 MHz is indicative of low level performance at greater than 1300 MHz Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 16 Equipment Setup for 8648A and 8648B C D lt 1300 MHz 10 MHz EXT REF INPUT 10 MHz REF OUTPUT oooon e ooooo 290000 o coopop o 8648A B C D RF UNDER TEST OUTPUT SENSOR MODULE
230. d enter the desired name for the file The results file name suffix is log The results are saved automatically to the log file You may select the directory into which you would like to save the file by changing the drive and folder in this window This fileis a text file and can be viewed using many text editors Once you have selected the drive folder and assigned a file name select the OK button to save these settings for when the tests are complete 7 55 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Running the Tests and Adjustments 1 In the Agilent Service Support Software main window select the Run button to start the automated tests or adjustments displayed in the Selected tests box The software steps through the tests or adjustments sequentially 2 Follow the instructions displayed on the PC Each automated adjustment is described in this chapter and the performance tests are described in Chapter 8 Reviewing the Test and Adjustment Results Once the tests have finished running the Agilent Service Support Software main window displays the results Selected Tests displays the name of the selected tests the pass fail status P F of each Selected Test Results Current test that has been run the total number of points that each test checks and the number of points that passed and failed for each test The pass fail status indicates a failure if any point in that test fails shows the results of
231. d only when ADDRESS TYPE S set to LONG If DUMMY CALL is ON the following address menu is displayed FREQUENCY EN MODULATION AMPLITUDE ADDRESS DUMMY CALL SHORT ADDRESS1 0032769 O encode23 drw ADDRESS TYPE DUMMY CALL displays the address type used in the non call phases automatically set SHORT Short address LONG Long address ADDRESS1 is the 7 digit short address or the primary address of the long address ADDRESS2 is the 7 digit secondary address of the long address This is displayed only when ADDRESS TYPE DUMMY CALL iS LONG NOTE To equalize the FSK deviation the addresses for DUMMY CALL should contain an equal number of 1 and 0 1b 14 Operation Reference Function Setting the Protocol The protocol menu displays the following information when A0000001 is the previously entered capcode FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE C CYCLE 00 FRAME 000 PHASE A COLLAPSE CYCLE 0 REPEAT 0 These par
232. dBm lt 2 5 GHz S 416 1972 55 2x SEE SHEET s 54088 ATTEN 10 dBm gt 2 5 GHz J29 10 gt 38 1 of 2 S 6 5098 THRU J16 6 8 gt 412V 60dB ATTEN T 7 gt J29 7 8 gt 8V CAL V gt 10 gt 424V 416 5 775 45V ROM J16 18 20 gt 12V t Corrier AM MOD Ref Level 9 kHz 4 0 GHz J29 3 gt DAC Typically 5 to 3 0 dB above m ALC DET 4 P MHz Front Panel Settings oO lt 1000 MHz us 8648B C D BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET Z OF 2 Troubleshooting Information Power Supply Distribution 5b 14 5c Service Error Messages This chapter describes service error messages Front panel and GPIB operation messages are covered in Chapter 1c Operation Messages 502 Descripti on Cause What Do 503 Descripti on What ToDo 504 Descripti on Cause What ToDo 505 Description Cause What To Do Updated cal file The RAM calibration file has been updated from the calibration ROM This is normal when a module is replaced This message requires no action Cal corrupt restored After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was done This message requires no action Modulation cal restore failure After detecting a failure comparing calibration data between RAM andthe calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to
233. e FSK level the data rate must be set properly For example when you want to set the data rate to 6400 bps 4 level FSK for FLEX pagers send the following commands PAG FLEX RATE 6400 DM FORM FSK4 DM DEV 4 8 KHZ DM STAT ON SOURce FM DEViation DEViation lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets FM deviation RST value is 3 kHz STATe STATe ON OFF 110 Turns FM modulation ON or OFF FM is not turned on by just setting FM DEViation Turning FM modulation ON will not automatically turn OFF any other types of modulation Turning any or all modulation types ON or OFF must be done explicitly If a modulation type is turned ON while another modulation type is ON an execution error 221 is generated and the state of the instrument is unchanged RST value is OFF SOURce SOURce 1 1 EXTernal EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Selects FM source RST value is INTernal INTernal2 is the internal Option 1E2 Modulation Generator EXTernal COUPLing COUPling DC Sets source coupling for FM The GROund parameter defined by the 1991 SCPI Command Reference 17 4 9 2 is not supported RST value is DC INTernal 1 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets the frequency of the FM internal signal source Legal values are 400 Hz and 1 kHz RST value is 1 kHz INTernal2 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets the FM modulation frequency u
234. e and enter your password The Select Test Equipment and Tests window is displayed Click cancel 2 In the File drop down menu select Test Equipment Drivers This selection allows for the addition or removal of software drivers for the test equipment being used to verify the performance of the DUT Test Equipment Drivers Drivers Version Device Type Models Supported 62 DRVSNSOR DLL wk765a 3 add a device driver to the existing list of test equipment drivers click Add 22 4 Using the standard file search procedure select the driver that you are adding and click OK The selected driver should now be displayed in the Test Equipment Drivers dialog box 5 Click Close 24 Removing Device Drivers Removing device drivers is accomplished using the Test Equipment Drivers dialog box 1 Login 2 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 7 47 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Select Test Equipment Drivers from the File drop down menu Test Equipment Drivers 65 Drivers Version Revision 1 10 DRV4400 DLL DRV53131 DLL Device Type DRV8553 DLL FUNCTION GENERATOR DRV8553 DLL DRV8902 DLL 1 DRV8903 DLL Models Supported DRY 8904 DLL HP33120A DRV89441 DLL DRVSHS OH DLL wk766a 4 Select the driver dll file to be removed 26 5 Ensurethat the information displayed in the Version Device Type and Models Supported fields reflects the current in
235. e instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 23 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Motherboard Audio Path All 8648A B C D This adjustment calibrates the internal and external audio paths of the motherboard by determining the full scale 100 DAC values required for the audio path calibration For internal modulation measurements the DAC is set to a percentage DAC Offset Percentage of its value The percentage is 70 for the 8648A and 90 for the 8648B C D At each DAC value the corresponding output depth deviation is measured with the measuring receiver and the slope of the DAC is calculated using the following Measured Depth Deviation Pac oier Percentage x 4095 Slope The slope determines the actual value of the DAC required to set the modulation level at the exact DAC Offset Percentage The DAC is fine tuned by measuring the output depth deviation and adjusting the DAC until the resulting depth deviation is within a specified tolerance The final value of the DAC for internal modulation measurements is calculated as follows DAC Value at DAC Offset Percentage DAC Value mn Offset Percentage 100 The difference between internal and external modulation involves compensating for the inaccuracies of the external function generator First the voltage level of the function generator is set to 1 083 volts not 1V to compensate for the mismatch between its 600 ohm output and the 50 ohm input of the
236. e number 0 through 9 to select a register sequence When you select a sequence the number of the sequence appears in the display along with the number of the first register saved in the sequence The instrument is set to the operating settings saved in the first register If no registers have been saved in the sequence a message is displayed to let you know NOTE Selecting the sequence you are currently in is a quick way to return tothe beginning of the sequence A sequence can include up to 100 registers 00 through 99 There are a total of 300 registers availablein the standard instrument and 70 registers in and instrument with Option 1EP pager encoder installed Registers are automatically assigned to the currently selected sequence when they are saved The registers saved in any given sequence are independent from the registers in any other sequence This allows you to create up to ten different register sequences Consequently it is possible to have up to ten registers with the same number for example REG 01 each assigned to a different sequence and each with different operating settings saved in it 1b 41 Operation Reference Function 5 DEL Press DEL and a register number 00 through 99 to delete that register The specified register is deleted from the currently selected sequence only but registers in other sequences you have set up are not affected After you have deleted a register you will not be able to recall that reg
237. e selected digit only For information about incrementing by an arbitrary value using the increment set keys see Increment Set in this chapter 3 REF SET Press REF SET toturn on the reference mode and to set the current RF output setting as the reference value The reference value is stored in non volatile memory until you replace it by pressing REF SET again When you press REF SET the A symbol is displayed between the value and the units When appears the displayed valueindicates the offset between the reference value and the RF output signal 1b 2 Operation Reference Frequency and Amplitude The RF output signal is not changed when you press this key Units When you press REF SET for frequency values can be entered in MHz or kHz For amplitude values can be entered in any of the amplitude units provided but they are displayed in dB only 4 REF ON OFF Press REF ON OFF toturn off the reference mode if it is on or to turn on the reference mode without changing the reference value When you turn on the reference mode the displayed value indicates the offset between the reference value and the current RF output setting TheRF output signal is not changed when you press this key Output Power Trouble If the RF output power seems too low look for A in the display between the power level value and the dB indicator The A tells you that reference mode is turned on The displayed valueis not the output power level
238. e used to save the settings that are saved in register 00 SEL UR FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE 10 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 00 insseq3 drw 4 Save the recalled settings into register 01 Register 00 can now be used to save the new settings ia MS FREQUENCY A MODULATION NE AMPLITUDE 10 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 01 insseq4 drw Saving a New Register 5 Set the frequency to 8 MHz LM BEER EN Eee a rr RE FREQUENCY m MODULATION AMPLITUDE IIIA COESIRE sss gt 8 00000 MHz gG C3 ES E31 C3 C3 C3 CADO EE TC EXE Apso gua IG ooo oja FREQUENCY 8 insseg5 drw 1a 14 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers 6 Save the settings in register 00 Press f to check the new sequence M ac FREQUENCY MODULATION EEEEEEEEEEENN AMPLITUDE ENNENNEER 8 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 00 2 insseq6 drw 1 15 Operation Examples Offsetting the RF Output from a Reference Offsetting the RF Output from a Reference I
239. ed unless all of the calibration data points are measured Required Test Equipment e DVM 500 Feedthrough Procedure Figure 7 30 LF Output Level Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST DIGITAL MULTIMETER 50 W RF Output Feed Through an625a2d 1 Connect the equi pment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 31 Adjustments Manual Adjustments LF Power Level Accuracy Most 8648B C D 8648B C Frequency Range Early versions of the 8648B and 8648C havea frequency range that begins at 100 kHz rather than 9 kHz If the DUT has a frequency range that begins at 100 kHz do not run this adjustment Description This adjustment covers the frequency range of 9 to 100 kHz and the dynamic range of 0 to 100 dBm Initially the spectrum analyzer is checked to verify that its noise floor and any residuals are at least 20 dB below the lowest signal measured If a residual is detected the frequency is shifted plus or minus 25 Hz If the noise floor is too high the adjustment is exited Signal levels between 0 and 40 dBm are measured directly with a digital voltmeter DVM Lower signal levels are measured using the spectrum analyzer All spectrum analyzer measurements are relative to the 40 DVM measurement Required Test Equipment DVM Spectrum Analyzer 6 dB Attenuator 500 Feedthrough Procedure Figure 7 31 LF Power Level Ac
240. elerenoe Val Le a cie i i asc Vas qi aec la 16 HAE EAT EMEA a au a ecu em Re enn es ey kone oed dence dedos la 17 Holding the Output Attenuator la 19 Set Ibo Level acu dd Shee ee Chee Rothe Sout Oke Papx dde TER X 1 19 Holding Hie AEFOODBEOE tg ipo 1 19 Adjusting te Amnlibade aue dee pd mule Pctro dre 1 20 Setting a User Selectable Modulated Frequency and Waveform pion er LEP eoe D tens Eb RR OR b sr at disc 1 21 Setting mhe 1 21 Setting the Modulated la 21 Setting the Modulated Frequency iius scabs deeds bend deed sade RR OR X 1 22 Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option Only la 23 Up Paes ENCAN 655 isk epe ney gatur CE x bdo d due 1 23 Entering Pager Encoding SettingS 0 0 c cece eee ens 1 24 Selecting the Format Seri is x rox RR RR OR X 1 24 Selecting the Data Rate and Pager Settings 1a 25 Selecting the Message SAUNOS uses ces kan ager deserted ROO Re dice 1 26 Selecting the Transmission Repetitions an
241. er Option 1EP Only Selecting the Message Settings 5 You may choose one of the five fixed messages only numbers one and five are useful for numeric pagers or you may define your own message For this example use your own phone number as the user defined message a Set MESSAGE NO to 6 and MESSAGE LENGTH to 40 using the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob and the key b Press the NEXT key again to select the FREE MESSAGE parameter c Enter your phone number with the numeric keys and terminate your entry with the MHz dB m ENTER key Em CUTE ERR JI TN TN FREQUENCY 1 MODULATION 1 1 AMPLITUDE Bb j MESSAGE NO6 MESSAGE LENGTH 40 eU cud FREE MESSAGE an610abc Press the NEXT key to moveto the next page Selecting the Transmission Repetitions and Amplitude 6 Set MODE to SINGLE and AMPLITUDE to0 0 dBm usingthe AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob and the NEXT key Enter the numeric values using the numeric keys and the MHz dB m ENTER key MODE SINGLE AMPLITUDE 0 0dBm www FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUD Q wiwwwwv
242. erformance Tests 8648B Test Record 8648B Test Record Table 8 20 8648B Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Customer Tested By Model Ambieritemperature Serial Number Relative Humidity Options Line Frequency Firmware Revision Special Notes Hz nominal 8 72 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 21 8648B Test Record Model Report Number Date Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Audio Analyzer 2 Measuring Receiver 3 Spectrum Analyzer 4 Synthesized Signal Generator 5 Frequency Counter 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 73 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 22 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 Table 8 23 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 Limits kHz RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648B 8663A 8902A kHz H
243. ernate functions If Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the INCR SET key functions as a START STOP key This key starts or stops any pager encoding activity In addition in this mode the ff and function as PREV and NEXT keys These keys let you move the blinking cursor between each parameter when you are entering the pager encoding settings 5 Knobs The knobs are always active when the instrument is in local front panel control Turn them to increase or decrease the frequency or the amplitude of the RF output Press next to each knob to adjust the knobs resolution Press REF SET next to each knob to set the displayed value as the reference value and turn on the reference mode Press REF ON OFF to turn on and off the reference mode without changing the reference value When the reference mode is on the displayed value indicates the offset between the reference value and the RF output signal If Option is present and the signal generator is in the ENCODER mode the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob is used to enter a setting for a pager encoding parameter 6 MEMORY memory registers allow you to saveinstrument setups and recall them whenever you wish Press SAV and enter a two digit register number to savethe instrument s current settings To recall the settings press REG and enter the register number The arrow keys allow you to recall registers in numerical sequence You can arrange
244. ese supplemental verification tests For a comprehensive list of all test equipment required to perform these tests plus the manual adjustments the manual performance tests and the automated adjustments and performance tests see Chapter 5 Service Attention Before performing this test make sure the following conditions exist Thesignal generator has had at least a one hour warm up and has been calibrated within the last year The ambient temperature is 25 5 The line voltage change is less than 596 Supplemental Verification Tests Required Test Equipment List Required Test Equipment List 3458A Digital Multimeter DMM Range 50 V to 450 V Functions DC and AC DC accuracy 0 0196 Input impedance gt 10M AC range 1 kHz AC accuracy 0 1 5350B Frequency Counter Frequency range 10Hzto20 GHz Frequency accuracy 4 Hz at 4000 MHz Includes reference accuracy and counter accuracy e 8493A Option 010 10 dB Attenuator No substitutes 9 2 Supplemental Verification Tests CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test CW Frequency Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 9 1 Frequency Accuracy Equipment Setup 8648 UNDER TEST 53508 FREQUENCY COUNTER RF OUTPUT ATTENUATOR 10 dB on63bd Configure the Frequency Counter For frequencies 10 MHz Use Input 2 press 1 MQ For frequencies 10 MHz and 500 MHz
245. essage length is longer than the number set here then the message is truncated to the given length RST value is 40 SOURce PAGing FORMat POCS FLEX FTD ARBitrary STARt STARt lt NR1 gt Sets the start segment number of the buffer memory for the arbitrary message message 0 RST value is 0 STOP STOP lt NR1 gt Sets the stop segment number of the buffer memory for the arbitrary message message 0 RST value is 127 DEFine lt NR1 gt lt 1 gt lt NR1 gt Sets the data of a buffer memory segment for the arbitrary message message 0 Legal values for each lt NR1 gt are 32768 to 32767 RST value is null See Using the Buffer Memory for the Arbitrary Messages for the usage of the buffer memory for the arbitrary messages The contents of data to be filled in lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt format for the DEFine command depends on the pager format FLEX FLEX TD or POCSAG as follows For FLEX FLEX TD Buffer No Frame info upper l Frame info lower Data set 0 Data set n Buffer No is the segment number of the buffer memory in which the data is stored 0 to 127 Frame info upper and Frame info lower are the upper 16 bits and lower 16 bits of the frame information Each Data set n contains the upper 16 bits or lower 16 bits of the word as follows The total number of the data sets n depends on the data rate
246. ests Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Only 4 Time Division 5 5 Trigger Trigger Source CH 2 Trigger Mode Normal Trigger level OV If the signal drifts a full cycle 360 in less than 2 minutes refer to Chapter 7 and perform the Internal Reference Oscillator Adjustment After the adjustment restart this performance test Measure the Phase Change Time 1 5 Monitor the time the display Note the time required for 360 phase change 1 5 wait 3 to 24 hours Note now long you waited T2 h Repeat step 1 Record the phase change time 5 Calculate the aging rate as follows Aging Rate 1 10 MHz 1 T1 1 13 24 hours T 2 Example 1 351 seconds T2 3 hours T3 349 seconds 1 cyde 10 MHz 1 3515 1 3495 24h 3h 1 306x10 1 per day Record the test results and comparethe results to the limits in the test record NOTE If the absolute frequency of the standard and of the timebase oscillator are extremely close you can reduce the measurement time T1 T3 by measuring the time required for a phase change of less than 360 In step 6 change 1 cycle to 0 5 cycle for 180 or 0 25 cycle for 90 Test Record 8648A Option 1E5 Table 8 19 8648B Option 1E5 Table 8 44 8648C Option 1E5 Table 8 69 8648D Option 1E5 Table 8 94 8 48 Performance Tests Power Level Accuracy Performance Test Automated
247. etting a New Reference Value 7 Set the current output frequency as the new reference frequency at any time mU FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE MER 0 00 AkHz ref7 drw 1a 18 Operation Examples Holding the Output Attenuator Range Holding the Output Attenuator Range In this example you will hold the output attenuator so it does not change ranges when you change the amplitude setting This will prevent attenuator range changes from affecting the output signal Set the Amplitude Level 1 Set the amplitude level to 82 dBm Dp pe eum oo lo oss FREQUENCY MENS MODULATION AMPLITUDE OE BEEXEEE 82 0 dBm Sem 20 ED CO OO A n 2 y af Bc f AMPLITUDE ES 8 2 aa atint drw Holding the Attenuator 2 Hold the attenuator at this setting A o FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE t 82 0 dBm Cia QOO HOLD fo C3 HOLD atin2 drw 1a 19 Operation Examples Holding the Output Attenuator Range Adjusting the Amplitude 3 Adjust the amplitude setti
248. etween FLEX FLEX TD and POCSAG GPIB Programming 2 29 Note 2 30 GPIB Programming For FLEX FLEX TD SOURce PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD TYPE TYPE TONE NUMeric ALPHanumeric HBINary Sets the type of message RST value is NUMeric ALPHanumeric supports the 7 bit coded character set ISO IEC 646 only VECTor VECTor STANdard SPECial NUMBered Sets the type of numeric message RST value is STANdard STANdard Displays the received numeric message on the pager under test SPECial Converts the received numeric message to the pre defined message and displays it on the pager under test NUMBered The message numbers are assigned for each paging address separately starting at and progressing up to a maximum of 63 in consecutive order NUMBer NUMBer NR1 Sets the initial number of numeric messages to be sent 0 to 63 RST value is 0 HBINary HBINary BIT1 BIT7 BIT8 BIT14 BIT16 Sets the bits per character of HEX Binary message RST value is BIT1 BIT1 bit per character BITT 7 bits per character BIT8 8 bits per character BIT14 14 bits per character BIT16 16 bits per character CODE CODE string Sets the pager capcode address up to 16 characters The frame phase collapse cycle and short long address are automatically determined using the FLEX FLEX TD standard rule Setting each value after this command is sent overwrite
249. f there areregisters saved in sequence 0 the message shown in the display below will not appear Notethat the steps in this example will causethe settings in registers 00 01 and 02 of sequence 0 to be changed D Ct U peg e FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE my EO ee C3 SEQ 0 has no registers saved in it regseq1 drw SE Saving Settings in Registers 2 Set the frequency to 10 MHz E FREQUENCY MODULATION EN AMPLITUDE RR 10 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG regseq2 drw FREQUENCY MODULATION am AMPLITUDE 10 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 00 regseqa drw 1a 8 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers 4 Set the frequency setting to 11 MHz FREQUENCY am MODULATION AMPLITUDE 11 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 00 regseq4 drw 5 Save the instrument settings in register 01 FREQUENCY MODULATION a AMPLITUDE 11 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 01 regseqb5 drw
250. ffset potentiometer is adjusted for 10 dBm reading at the RF output Then the Predistortion potentiometer is adjusted for 17 5 dBm at the RF output These two adjustments are iterated between until both power levels are within 0 1 dBm of their respective power levels The DUT is set to 1 5 MHz and the predistortion potentiometer is adjusted for 17 0 dBm Required Test Equipment Power Meter Power Sensor Procedure Figure 7 17 Predistortion and Detector Offset Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an69a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 18 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Prelevel 8648B C D Only Description This adjustment creates the slope and offset calibration data for the preleveler calibration The adjustment will not let you store away any calibration data unless all of the calibration data points are run Required Test Equipment Power Meter Power Sensor Procedure Figure 7 18 Prelevel Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an69a2d 1 Connect the equi pment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 19 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Output level Frequency Extension Calibration 8648B C D Only Description This adjustment creates the slope and offset cali
251. formance debe due es CR ee 8 7 xiii Contents Connect the Test Equipment rsrs sinti eee es seeds vets deus ER 8 7 Configure the Measuring 8 7 Configurethe S648 anges EEK Re Pew ESET 8 7 Measure DANATIONS 40 4 tote X dod a Vide ped pa WARE es 8 7 Test Record 8 7 OA eee Ee ard cac doa do rdc aca 8 8 Connect the Test sese Re ERROR RE PENA EX EE AR ERA 8 8 Configure the Synthesized Signal 8 8 Measure Deviations icssusssuka cic usd SERE RA PERKS PEERS ERR E 8 8 TRO RTT err 8 9 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 8 10 Connect the Test ESUIDPAnE Lusia ci E dard E XX ERE Geo dea qeu ex pede 8 10 Configure the Measuring 8 10 C ontioure Eae BGS pec cc ta acr xod dup doe aede d 8 10 Measure Deviatlofis ERAS 8 10 ott icy oh a a Ee eh a See
252. formation for the selected driver 6 Click Remove 25 7 Click Close Adding Test Drivers The Test Drivers window allows for the addition of software drivers for the test procedures being used to verify the performance of the DUT Follow these instructions to add a test driver 1 Login 2 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 7 48 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Select Test Drivers from the File drop down menu Drivers Remove Version E Required Devices Tests Supported 80 DUT s Supported wk774a 4 Click Add 28 5 Using the standard file search procedure select the test driver that you are adding and dick OK The selected driver should now be displayed in the Test Drivers dialog box 6 Click Close 30 Removing Test Drivers Removing test drivers is accomplished using the Test Drivers dialog box 1 Login 2 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 7 49 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Select Test Drivers from the File drop down menu Drivers Revision 1 101 5 Required Devices AUDIO ANALYZER MEASURING RECEIVER Tests Supported pue DISTORTIC DUT s Supported wk775a 4 Select the driver dll file to be removed 31 5 Ensurethat the information displayed in the Version Device Type and Models Supported fields reflects the current information for the selected driver
253. gnal to be present at the output terminal RST value is OFF PAGing Subsystem Option 1EP Only Note SOURce PAGing FORMat SELect POCSag FLEX FTD RESYnc PN15 Sets the pager format to POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD FTD RESYNC or PN15 value is FLEX For POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD PN15 SOURce PAGing FORMat POCSag FLEX FTD PN15 RATE lt NR1 gt Sets the data rate as follows depending the format selected For FLEX FLEX TD 1600 3200 or 6400 For POCSAG 512 1200 or 2400 For PN15 512 1200 1600 2400 3200 6400 RST value is 1600 for FLEX FLEX TD or 512 for POCSAG and PNI5 To set or change the data rate the FSK level must be set properly For example when you want to set the data rate to 6400 bps 4 level FSK for FLEX pagers send the following commands PAG FLEX RATE 6400 DM FORM FSK4 DM DEV 4 8 KHZ DM STAT ON For POCSAG FLEX FLEX TD SOURce PAGing FORMat POCS FLEX FTD MESSage SELect SELect lt NR1 gt Selects the message number which is to be encoded 0 for the arbitrary message 1 to 5 for the fixed messages 6 for the user definable message RST value is 1 DEFine DEFine string Sets the user definable message message 6 up to 40 characters RST value is null GPIB Programming 2 25 Note 2 26 GPIB Programming LENGth LENGth NR1 Sets the length of the user definable message If the m
254. gt 1000MHz gt s lt A6 Lo SS DATA 1 0 See DETAIL POST REGULATOR CLOCK a amp S SEn t 9 REG 48V DATA Fig 2 we A346 AS EN INT ala 3J29 3 bs EL Si 22 EM 45V REG 5V S L 2 m 5 5 1 15 15 IMG Sc CAL POWER an 2 lt 8 re o 12V REG 12V REG Diognostics w w nes e E ROM A3J15 1 15V E a POWER M 11 7 S 12V REG 12V REG 1811 OS OUT OF LOCK SUPPLY 1s lt gt 8 38V 12V REG Se SS SR SS SS gt bd 1 ALC DET 5 10 lt 3 4 6 LOND 12V REG FROM A10 M 1 1 1510 f e 5v 5V 2 2 lt 24V REG 24V 83300A 83301A 2 3J5 540 CONTROLLER ES NE A1 FRONT PANEL ree 7 g RX aL E zog QUAD 2 Z 5 ik gt gt 2 gt y CLOCK CPU pe RS232 1 15 lt 3 229 Z SF gt 3s gt 4 Lois CE LJ S 4 RPGB CPU BUS RTS GND CTS lt 7 571 lt 8 A3J4 CLOCK A3J7 DE TA IL RPG 1 gt gt CND F 9 Se E E 1 5 gt A4 5 cogo sio EMIT E A14 MODULATION GENERATOR OPT 1E2 A gt 3 T CONTROL CLOCK A3J8 J4 4S 8 lt 8 i PULSE CK C GND DATA Ls AS NE PULSE DATA EEPROM lt 9 Ea PULSE EN THRU KE YBOARD A3J3 PINS 1 7 KEY CLOCK 8 COL 1 7 coL 1 1 00 SCANNING SS DATA bd 6 NC 8 2 7 1 s EN INT core bas CLOCK A3
255. he MOD ON OFF key on the 83300A Remote nterface 2 INT 400 Hz INT 1 2 Press one of these keys to select an internal source for modulating the carrier The selected source is also output at the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port as a 1 Vpk signal into 600 ohms 3 FREQUENCY 4 FREQUENCY WAVEFORM If Option 1EP is present the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY key or if Option 1E2 is present the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY WAVEF ORM key will toggle between the 1 kHz internal source and the internal variable frequency generator with its four waveforms Repetiti vely pressing the INT 1kHz key toggles between 1kHz the 1 kHz internal source SIN the sine waveform TRI thetriangle waveform sou the square waveform and saw the saw or ramp waveform The frequency of the modulated frequency may be changed by entering the frequency on the keypad and terminating the value with the kHz key kHz is the only valid units key that is accepted Therefore to set a frequency of 10 Hz you must press 01 kHz The frequency knob will not change this frequency After the frequency is set toggling the INT 1kHz key only changes the waveform The frequency remains unchanged 1b 44 Operation Reference Function The acceptable frequency range for the internal variable frequency generator is 10 Hz to 20 kHz Pressing AM FM allows you to store a variable frequency and waveform for each of these types of modulation After setting up one of these types of modul
256. he condition of the POWer register Besides querying the condition you may also query if an event has occurred Replace the COND with EVEN to read the event status Reading the event status clears the register Line 20 Enters the condition of the POWer register into the variable Value Line 30 Uses the HP BASIC command BINAND to check the contents of bit 1 in Value If bit 1 is high Pow_spec will equal 2 Line 40 Checks if Pow_spec equals 2 and then prints that the amplitude is in an unspecified range GPIB Programming 2 17 Pager Encoding Status Paging encoding status may be queried to detect the end of encoding Option 1EP Only the start of each frame for FLEX FLEX TD or batch for POCSAG Figure 2 2shows the example of the outputs of these bits for the following settings Format FLEX Output Mode Burst No of Bursts 4 Start Frame 0 Collapse Cycle 0 Header On Terminator On Paging Status Register Bit 0 Start of frame batch Bit 1 End of encoding 127 0 1 Frame Number 5 Cidle sage sage Figure 2 2 Paging Encoding Status Note If the pager format is POCSAG and the message extends over two batches the start of each frame batch bit is set at every two batches Example Check the end of message encoding 19 OUTPUT 713 STATS QUES PAG EHRE OUTPUT 719 STAT GUES EHAE 4836 zB OUTPUT SEE 48 IF SPOLLE Ti
257. ile the memory registers are being copied from the 83301A memory Interface to the instrument Invalid data in Memory Interface This message is displayed when the instrument detects that the 83301A Memory nterface does not contain valid memory register data Try copying a memory register into the memory interface first then initiate a copy from the memory interface to the instrument again Communication failure copy aborted This message is displayed when the instrument is not able to successfully copy memory registers between the instrument and the 83301A M emory Interface This message will be displayed if the cable connecting the instrument to the primary interface is disconnected during the copy process Memory copy was successful This message is displayed when the instrument has successfully copied the memory registers between the instrument and the 83301A Memory Interface When this message is displayed the copy process is complete and you can disconnect the memory interface from the instrument 1c 4 Operation messages GPIB Command Messages GPIB Command Messages 1 0 1 aa ooa Boa Moll 1 Invalid character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type for example a header containing an ampersand SETUP amp This error might be used in place of errors 121 141 and perhaps some others Syntax error An unrecognized command or data ty
258. in the test record For each frequency measure the change in amplitude as the RF is pulsed on and off Press MOD ON OFF 2 Record the text results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record 8648B Table 8 42 e 8648C Table 8 67 8648D Table 8 92 8 36 Performance Tests Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1E6 Only Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1E6 Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 19 Pulse Modulation On off Risetime Equipment Setup DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE 8648 UNDER TEST RF OUTPUT sn71bo Configure the Pulse Generator 1 Mode normal Frequency 10 Mhz Duty cycle 50 Amplitude 1 V Offset 1V amp W N Configure the 8648 1 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 2 Activate pulse modulation display press AM AM 3 Turn pulse modulation on press MOD ON OFF 4 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 0 dB m Configure the Oscilloscope 1 Channel 1 125 mV div 2 Trigger source channel 4 3 Trigger level 1 5 V 4 Timebase 10 ns div 8 37 Performance Tests Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1E6 Only Measure the Rise Time 1 Use the timebase delay to align a rising pulse edge with the center of the oscilloscope screen 2 Change the timebase to 2 ns div 3 Display the envelope of channel 1 4 Set the frequency of the 8648 to that listed in the test record For this f
259. ing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM Replace the A3 assembly The A3 assembly has a continuity failure The calibration ROM is on the A3 assembly with the RAM Output prelevel cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A6 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly if the failure is still present after replacing the assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM Atten comp loss cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM Replace the A3 assembly The A3 assembly has a continuity failure The calibration ROM is on the A3 assembly with the RAM 601 Description Cause What To Do 603 Description Cause What To Do 604 Description Cause What To Do 605 Description Cause What To Do 608 Description Cause What To Do Service Error Messages 12 V power supply failure The 12 V diagnostic test point decreased by more than approximately 0 4 V Either the 12 V regulator on
260. instrument s status is considered to be an advanced application See GPIB Status Reporting Programming Examples Note Programming RF Frequency Programming RF Frequency and FM Modulation Examples are provided here to help you understand the required programming structure All examples use the HP BASIC programming language See Table 2 1 for a complete listing of commands Command statements may be concatenated on the same line if separated by a semicolon A colon must precede successive command statements to ensure command hierarchy OUTPUT 719 FREG CH S88 MHZ OUTPUT The output statement HP BASIC tells the system controller to output what follows 7 The Input Output select code of the system controller is 7 19 The GPIB address of the signal generator is 19 Semicolon semicolon separates the HP BASIC command from the output string that follows Quotes All command statements must be contained in quotes FREQ CW This command programs the RF frequency FREQ must be in the statement first representing its hierarchy over CW The colon is used to separate the command hierarchy The signal generator will be programmed to a RF frequency of 500 MHz OUTPUT 719 FREG CH S80 MHZ FM DEY 3 EHZ SOUR ERT IFM EEXT COLE ACS AM STAT OFF PHM ZTRT OFFS FM STAT DH FM DEV This command programs the FM deviation FM is higher than DEV in the command hierarchy and is separated by a
261. ion DEViation lt NRf gt lt 1 term gt Sets PM deviation in radians RST value is 1 0 RAD STATe STATe ON OFF 110 Turns PM modulation ON or OFF PM is not turned on by just setting PM DEViation Turning PM modulation ON will not automatically turn OFF any other types of modulation Turning any or all modulation types ON or OFF must be done explicitly If a modulation type is turned ON while another modulation type is ON an execution error 221 is generated and the state of the instrument is changed RST value is OFF S0URce SOURce INTernal 1 L EXTernal EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Selects PM source RST value is INTernal INTernal2 is the internal Option 1E2 Modulation Generator EXTernal COUPling COUPling AC DC Sets source coupling for PM The GROund parameter defined by the 1991 SCPI Command Reference 17 10 9 2 is not supported RST value is DC INTernal 1 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt lt freq term gt Sets the frequency of the PM internal signal source Legal values are 400 Hz and 1 kHz RST value is 1 kHz 12 FREQuency FREQuency lt NRf gt freq term gt Sets the PM modulation frequency using the internal audio generator in the Option 1EP and the internal modulation generator in the Option 1E2 Legal values are 20 Hz to 10 kHz for the Option 1 and 10 Hz to 20 kHz for the Option 1E2 RST value is 1 kHz INTernal2 FUNCti
262. ion 120 Hz 400 Hz or 1 kHz 10 Hz to 20 kHz dc to 150 kHz typical 3 dB BW 1 Hz to 150 kHz typical 3 dB BW 1 at deviations gt 4 kHz 1 at deviations gt 8 kHz lt 1 at deviations gt 16 kHz 0 5 at deviations lt 75 kHz 100 Hz typically 40 Hz at deviations lt 10 kHz 200 Hz typically 80 Hz at deviations lt 20 kHz 400 Hz typically 160 Hz at deviations lt 40 kHz Specifications apply over the 25 5 C range within 1 hour of DC FM calibration Internal 1 kHz or 400 Hz source plus external In internal plus external FM mode the internal source produces the set level of deviation The external input should be set to lt 0 5 Vpk or 0 5 Vdc one half of the set deviation Phase Modulation Peak Deviation Range 249 MHz 501 MHz 1001 MHz 2001 MHz 4000 MHz 4 6 Specifications 0 to 10 radians 0 to 5 radians 0 to 10 radians 0 to 20 radians 0 to 40 radians Resolution lt 2001 MHz 0 01 radian gt 2001 MHz 0 02 radian Deviation Accuracy internal 1 kHz rate typical lt 1001 MHz 3 of deviation setting 0 05 radians lt 2001 MHz 3 of deviation setting 0 1 radians lt 4000 MHz 3 of deviation setting 0 2 radians Rates Internal 400 Hz or 1 kHz Option 1 2 20 Hz to 10 kHz External 20 Hz to 10 kHz typical 3 dB BW Distortion 1 kHz rate lt 1001 MHz lt 1 at deviations gt 3 radians lt 2001 MHz lt 1 at deviations gt 6 radians
263. ion is downloaded to the motherboard a complete calibration is required because calibration data is erased during the download Read theinstrument information that is stored in the 8648 motherboard This is a safe way to view the information stored in the motherboard You do not run the risk of accidentally downloading information to the motherboard and causing the instrument to require a complete calibration Theinformation that this utility reads from the motherboard is instrument serial number instrument model number attenuator part number and serial number 8648B C D only options installed in the instrument GPIB Address In the HP8648 Motherboard Repair utility window notice the three digit GPIB address The first digit is the bus number to which the GPIB card that is installed in the PC is set Thelast two digits arethe GPIB address to which the 8648 is set If the last two numbers do not match the actual address to which the 8648 is set an 1 port error message is displayed This can be corrected by Changing the actual 8648 GPIB address to match the last two digits displayed in the GPIB address entry in the HP8648 motherboard Repair Utility window 1 On the 8648 press ADRS and press the keys to match the last two digits of the GPIB address entry in the motherboard repair utility window 2 Click the OK button on the 1 0 Port Error Changingthelast two digits displayed in the GPIB address entry i
264. ions Installed 4 Select all options that are actually installed in the instrument that has been changed More than one may be selected Any options that are not available with the instrument model number selected are grayed out and are not accessible Select the correct instrument model number before selecting the options installed CAUTION Selecting options that are not actually installed in the instrument will cause erroneous information to be saved in the motherboard and will affect the instrument calibration CAUTION Once the Send Data button is selected the download process is started and can not be stopped Calibration data will be erased and a complete calibration will be required 4 When you have finished entering the information for the instrument that has been changed download it to the motherboard by selecting the Send Data button The download process can take several minutes to complete A progress indicator will be displayed 5 Oncethe information has been stored in the motherboard select the Get Data button to read what is stored in the motherboard If the information is not correct repeat steps 3 and 4 6 After the correct information has been stored in the motherboard select Cancel to exit 7 61 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 7 62 8 Performance Tests The procedures in this chapter test the electrical performance of the signal generator These tests do not require access to the interior of
265. is not required Table 8 41 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 4 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 16 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 16 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 16 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 16 Table 8 42 Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1 6 Limits dB Frequency Uncertainty MHz Measured Upper dB 100 80 1 8 500 80 2 1000 80 2 1500 80 2 2000 80 2 8 93 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 43 Pulse Modulation Rise Time Performance Test Option 1 6 Limits ns Frequency Uncertainty MHz Measured Upper tns 1000 10 1 Table 8 44 Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Limits kHz Uncertainty Lower Measured Upper Hz 5x10 day 5 6 10711 8 94 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record 8 95 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record 8648C Test Record Table 8 45 8648C Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Customer Tested By Model Ambieritemperature Serial Number Relative Humidity Options Line Frequency Firmware Revision Special Notes Hz nominal 8 96 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 46 8648C Test Record Model Report Number Date Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Audi
266. ister number until you have saved operating settings in it again NOTE The register number is immediately deleted from the sequence when the delete entry is completed H owever the settings contained in the register are recalled when you delete the register so you can re save the settings if you need to Renumbering the Registers f you use the arrow keys to recall the registers in sequence the deleted register number will be skipped If you wish to eliminate the skip you can do so by moving each register following the deleted register back one register number To delete an entire sequence delete each register in the sequence 1b 42 Operation Reference Function Modulation Source Figure 1 2 Modulation Source Paths the 1 kHz path is highlighted CARRIER Option 1EP Audio Generator Option 1E2 Modulation Generator MOD INPUT OUTPUT on819bd 1b 43 Operation Reference Function 0 OO Opt 1E2 only Opt 1EP only 1 2bd 1 MOD ON OFF Press MOD ON OFF toturn on or off the currently selected modulation mode AM or pulse OFF appears in the second line of the MODULATION display when modulation is turned off This key also turns on or off the audio output at the MOD INPUT OUTPUT connector when an internal source 400 Hz or 1 kHz is selected The operation of this key is the same as t
267. ives it a Fail status Then continues testing with the next test restarts the testing at the beginning of the first test quits testing and aborts all tests 7 56 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Printing the Test and Adjustment Results Once the tests are complete a dialog box asks if you want to print the log file The log file contains the test and adjustment results Choose Yes to print using the printer connected to LPT1 Choose No to exit the program without printing There are two other methods of printing the test results Select Print from the File drop down menu The software asks you to define the computer path and file name where the tests were performed The default directory is the log subdirectory of the destination directory where you installed the software C hp svc Hp8648 was the default destination directory e Open the file in a text editor and print from the text editor Exiting the Software Select Exit from the File drop down menu or press Alt F 4 7 57 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Motherboard Repair Utility Using the motherboard repair utility you can Enter the information required for changing the A3 motherboard to the PC and download that information to the controller portion of the motherboard As an example of its use this utility should be used after changing the motherboard in an 8648 or after an option has been added CAUTION After informat
268. ividing the 500 to 1000 MHz main band signal by two Filtering is handled by separate low pass filters for each frequency band AM is done using two separate modulators one for the divide band and one dual output modulator for the main and heterodyne bands The AM signal from the A3 modulation section for both modulators is summed into the ALC loop integrator Amplitude leveling is handled with an ALC loop to lock the level and an amplitude DAC to set the level The error signal from the ALC integrator is sent to either of the two modulators along with the summed AM signal The output assembly contains a calibration EEROM that contains calibration data This data must be regenerated anytime an A6 assembly is replaced 5 11 Theory of Operation A6 Output 8648B C D A6 Output 8648B C D The output module works in conjunction with the A10 frequency extension module and differs from 8648A operation in the following ways AM is input to the output module only for frequencies lt 1000 MHz For higher frequencies this signal goes to the A10 frequency extension module 2 The ALC detector voltage for all frequencies not just gt 1000 MHz is now generated the A10 frequency extension module 3 Therange of the RF input to mixer in the a6 Output has been changed to allow the mixer to output signals between 9 kHz and 249 MHz tothe a10 frequency extension assembly 5a 12 Theory of Operation A7 Attenuator 8648A
269. l FSK modulation Various carrier frequencies modulation rates and encoder paths are checked Required Test Equipment Vector Signal Analyzer Procedure Figure 7 34 Filter Path Test Setup VECTOR SIGNAL ANALYZER Ext Ref Out 000 na 000 na oooo oooo n uU e ooo 08 Bano B naoa Hz Ref Section RF Output an64a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 35 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Agilent Service Support Software The service support software contains the program and supporting files necessary to run the automated performance tests and adjustments for your signal generator This section lists the equipment required to run the software and gives instructions for installing and using the software Refer to the previous section for a description of each automated adjustment and refer to Chapter 8 for a description of each automated performance test The part number for the service support software is listed in Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 Required Test Equipment The following equipment is required to run the software Personal Computer PC with the following specifications 386 33 MHz CPU or better At least 8 M bytes of RAM Hard drive with at least 350 M bytes free 16 color VGA monitor or better
270. l modulation internal and external to the RF carrier When modulation is turned off the LED above the key is off and OFF appears in the second line of the instrument s MODULATION display This key also turns on or off the audio output at the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port when an internal source 400 Hz or INT 1 2 is selected 2 RF ON OFF Press RF ON OFF to turn the RF output signal or off When the RF output signal is turned off the LED above the key is off and RF OFF appears in the second line of the instrument s AMPLITUDE display There is approximately 170 dB of carrier isolation when the output is off 3 Sequence Selection Arrows Press or to select the next or previous sequence of registers The sequences are selected in numeric order The number of the selected sequence appears in the second line of the FREQUENCY display When a sequence is selected the first register in the sequence is recalled When a sequence is selected that has no registers saved it two dashes will appear in the REG field 1b 51 Operation Reference Function 4 Register Recall Arrows Press or to recall the operating settings saved in the registers in the currently selected sequence The number of the last register accessed appears in the REG field If two dashes appear in the REG field a sequence that has no registers saved in it has been selected After the last register in the sequence has been recalled
271. l source is set toless than 0 5 V peak the modulation level provided by the external source will less than one half of the displayed modulation The following equation may be helpful for determining the appropriate modulation level setting for the instrument when the level of the external source is less than 0 5 V A te D Where e A Actual modulation level E External source level e D Displayed modulation level For example to set up for 3 kHz of FM deviation with an external source set to 0 3 V peak the instrument s displayed modulation level would be 3 kHz 7 MOD INPUT OUTPUT This port outputs a 1 Vpk into 600 ohms audio tone when an internal modulation source is selected When an external modulation input is selected EXT AC EXT DC or 1 kHz EXT DC it provides the input for a 1 Vpk into 600 ohms audio source Refer to the preceding table for acceptable frequency ranges 1b 46 Operation Reference Function RF Output RF OUTPUT Max Rev Pwr ad 1 ard am 2 3 1 RF ON OFF Press RF ON OFF to turn the RF output signal on or off RF OFF appears in the second line of the AMPLITUDE display when the output signal is off Theinstrument turns off the output signal by switching in the maximum output attenuation 130 dB and setting the vernier to its lowest setting This results in approxima
272. latches are open collector therefore pulses can not be seen until the circuit is completed by pressing a key The keyboard connects directly to the controller at 3 The display is driven by the controller through data latches on the A3 assembly The display control lines are eight bi directional data lines an enable clock line a read write line and a data instruction line The other lines going to the display are the display 5 V and ground The enable dock line is high during every data interchange The read write line is high for a read operation and low for a write operation The data instruction lineis high for a data operation and low for an instruction operation The data instruction lineis used only during write operations Data refers to the character data while instruction refers to commands such as return or space When interchanging data the controller polls the display for acknowledgment This means that if the display is disconnected the 5 5 Theory of Operation A1 Front Panel controller will cease to attempt operations Table 5 1 1 Front Panel Keyboard Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 A3J3 1 A3J3 2 A3J3 3 A3J3 4 A3J3 5 A3J3 6 A3J3 7 Row 1 FREQUENCY INCR 7 8 9 MHz 3 9 freq SET dB m Row 2 AMPLITUDE 1 4 5 6 kHz 3 10 freq mV Row 3 REF FM U 1 2 3 96 A3J 3 11 SET mV freq Row 4 REF AM 0 rad 3 12 ON O
273. le Parts 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Table 6 2 8648B C D Replaceable Parts Item Part Number Qty Description 08647 69045 1 STANDARD EXCHANGE REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A4 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A4 A4 08648 60042 1 OPTION 1E5 HIGH STABILITY REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08648 69042 1 EXCHANGE OPTION 1E5 HIGH STABILITY REFERENCE ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A4 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A4 A5 08648 60115 1 SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY 08648 69115 1 EXCHANGE SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A5 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A5 A5 08648 60124 1 SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY OPTION 1EP 08648 69124 1 EXCHANGE SIG GEN SYNTH ASSEMBLY OPTION 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A5 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A5 A6 08648 60200 1 OUTPUT ASSEMBLY 08648 69200 1 EXCHANGE OUTPUT ASSEMBLY KIT 08920 40009 2 CAM LEVERS P O A6 08920 40016 2 LEVER LOCKS P O A6 A9 9135 0270 1 FILTERED LINE MODULE 0361 1265 2 RIVETS HOLDS A9 TO MP1 10 08648 60199 1 FREQUENCY EXTENSION MODULE 08648 69199 1 EXCHANGE FREQUENCY EXTENSION MODULE All 33322 60011 1 MICROWAVE ATTENUATOR 12 08648 60025 1 REVERSE POWER PROTECTION ASSEMBLY RPP 08648 60143 1 REVERSE POWER PROTECTION REPLACEMENT KIT Serial prefixes 3619A and 3443U A13 08648 60010 1
274. lowing folder install to this folder click Next install to different folder click Browse and select another folder You can choose not to install 8648 Service Software by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder C HP_SVC HP8648 Browse 6 Select Next and the Select Program Folder screen is displayed This installation procedure will install the service software icons into a program folder You can enter a new folder name the Program Folders text box or select a folder from the Existing lt Back 7 38 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Folder list We suggest Agilent Service Software as a good folder name Select Program Folder x Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders 8648 Service Software Existing Folders Administrative Tools Common Adobe Adobe Acrobat Adobe Acrobat 4 0 CD Writer Plus HP DeskJet 880C Series v11 1 HP FrameSGML Files HP Info Macromedia Dreamweaver 3 zi lt Back Cancel NOTE This documentation refers to the folder name as 8648 Service Software in the future so if you use another name for the folder be aware that you will have to note the difference 7 Select Next and the Start Copying Files window is displayed This window shows
275. lowing table lists the recommended test equipment required for performance tests and adjustments If the recommended equipment is not available substitute it with equipment that meets the critical specifications for the recommended model Table 5 1 Recommended Test E quipment Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Use Model Performance Test P Adjustment A Supp Verification Test V 500 Resistance 500 1 10100C LF Output L evel A Feedthrough Maximum SWR LF Power Level Accuracy A dcto 100 kHz 1 1 Amplifier Low Freq range 100 kHz to 1300 MHz 8447D Power Level Accuracy P Frequency Gain mean per channel gt 25 dB HF Power Level Accuracy A Noise Figure 8 5 dB Amplifier High Freq range 1300 kHz to 4 GHz 8449B Power Level Accuracy P Frequency Gain mean per channel gt 26 dB HF Power Level Accuracy A NoiseFigure 8 5 dB Attenuator Freq range 100 kHz to 4 GHz 8491A B Power Level Accuracy P 6 dB Maximum SWR 1 2 Option 006 HF Power Level Accuracy A LF Power L evel Accuracy A Attenuator Freq range 100 kHz to 4 GHz 8493A DC FM Frequency Error P 10 dB Maximum SWR 1 2 Option 010 RF Level Accuracy P CW Frequency Accuracy V Audio Analyzer Distortion accuracy 1 dB 8903B FM Distortion P Residual distortion 80 dB at 80 kHz BW Option 051 AM Distortion P 30 kHz low pass filter Phase M odulation Distortion P AC level accuracy 4 Residual FM
276. ls from around the instrument that are read by the controller during power up The motherboard contains calibration EEPROM that is specific to this instrument If the A3 assembly is replaced information specific to that 8648 must be downloaded to the calibration EEPROM and then the calibration data must be regenerated Refer to Motherboard Repair Utility in Chapter 7 for information on the using the Agilent Service Support Software to download the instrument information to the EEPROM See Chapter 7 to regenerate the calibration data using the adjustments 5 8 Theory of Operation A4 Reference A4 Reference The reference assembly accepts either an external 10 MHz reference signal to lock the internal 10 MHz TCXO temperature compensated crystal oscillator or uses an optional high stability 10 MHz OCXO oven controlled crystal oscillator The reference assembly outputs two 200 kHz signals 1 GHz signal and a 10 MHz signal which is routed to the rear panel One of the two 200 kHz signals is routed to the A5 synthesizer and the other to the A3 modulation section The 1 GHz signal is routed to the A6 output assembly The 10 MHz REF OUTPUT rear panel signal is a buffered output from the 10 MHz TCXO or OCXO The 200 kHz signals are derived by dividing the 10 MHz signal by 50 The 1 GHz signal is derived from a 1 GHz VCO that is phase locked to the 10 MHz signal Thereference assembly contains a calibration ROM that contains fac
277. m Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 999 9 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 90 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 37 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 1300 13 12 140 0 22 10 9 0 11 0 0 22 4 3 0 5 0 0 22 5 9 6 9 4 9 0 22 15 9 16 9 14 9 0 23 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 23 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 23 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 23 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 24 65 9 66 9 64 9 0 24 75 9 76 9 74 9 0 25 85 9 86 9 84 9 0 25 95 9 96 9 94 9 0 25 96 0 97 0 95 0 0 25 105 9 106 9 104 9 0 26 106 0 107 0 105 0 0 26 115 9 116 9 114 9 0 27 116 0 117 0 115 0 0 27 125 9 126 9 124 9 0 28 126 0 127 0 125 0 0 29 127 0 128 0 126 0 0 29 8 91 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record NOTE
278. message The format of the response is error number gt lt error string VERSion Returns a formatted numeric value corresponding to the SCPI version number for which the instrument complies The format of the response is YYYY V The Ys represent the year version for example 1990 and the V represents an approved revision number for that year Pager encoder programming commands are valid only for instruments with Option 1EP TRIGger COUNC COUNt lt NR1 gt This command sets the number of times the pager signal will be sent out A count set at 1 and collapse cycle set to 0 represent the single mode A count set from 1 to 256 represents the burst mode A count set at 0 represents the continuous mode RST value is 1 For the resynchronization function set by the SOURce PAGing FORMat SELect RESYnc command this command defines the number of bursts of the resynchronization pattern 0 to 256 One burst is 1 92 s 0 represents the continuous mode RST value is 1 The meaning of this TRIGger COUNt command changes with the firmware revision B 04 00 as described above For the older version firmware this TRIGger COUNt command defines the number of the frames for FLEX FLEX TD or batches for POCSAG to be actually output for the arbitrary message Changing Parameters While Encoding Option 1EP only Note Note Using the Buffer Memory for the Arbitrary Messages The contents of
279. n off state when the instrument is powered on OUTPUT 719 PULM STAT ON PULM STAT PULM STAT ON PULM STAT OFF This command enables the pulse modulator which must be driven from the rear panel input This command disables the pulse modulator ST T19 FREG CH 153 Programming Pager 1 cd DUTPUT 719i DEM OUTP STAT OH Encoder Option 1EP UTP JT 719 PRG a OUTPUT 7193 PAG 1 2 QUTPUT 713 PAG FLEX BAG 713 TRIG COUN 1 BUTPLT Pisa TAIT IMM Line 100 Programs the RF frequency Line 200 Programs the RF amplitude and sets the output on Line 300 Programs the pager format Line 400 Programs the modulation and deviation and sets the modulation on Line 500 Programs the data rate and modulation Line 600 Programs the pager type and message to be sent Line 700 Programs the pager capcode address Line 800 Programs how many times the pager signal will be transmitted Line 900 Starts encoding GPIB Programming 2 5 Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions Command Statement Amplitude OUTP STAT ON OUTP STAT OFF POW AMPL lt value gt lt units gt POW ATT AUTO ON POW ATT AUTO OFF POW REF value units POW REF STAT ON POW REF STAT OFF Frequency FREQ CW value units FREQ REF value units FREQ REF STAT ON FREQ REF STAT OFF Turns the RF output
280. n the HP8648 Motherboard Repair Utility window to match the actual 8648 GPIB address 1 Click the Cancel button on the I O Port Error 2 In the HP8648 Motherboard Repair Utility window change the last two GPIB address digits to match the actual 8648 GPIB address 7 58 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Reading Information from the A3 Motherboard This is a safe way to view the information stored in the motherboard You do not run the risk of accidentally downloading information to the motherboard To read information from the motherboard follow these steps 1 Open the HP8648 Motherboard Utility For MS Windows version 3 x a Open the Program Manager window b Open the Service Support program group Select the HP8648 Motherboard Utility icon For MS Windows 95 98 NT a Select Start b Selec Agilent Service Software for PC s C Select HP8648 Motherboard Utility 2 When the User I nformation dialog box requesting a password is displayed leave the password box empty and select the Cancel button 3 TheHP8648 Motherboard Repair Utility window is displayed along with the following information that is stored in the motherboard instrument serial number 1 instrument model number 2 attenuator part number and serial number 3 8648B C D only options installed 4 e HP8548 Motherboard Repair Utility Please enter the HP IB address to Select the desired Model establish communic
281. n this example you will enter an RF output frequency set it as the reference value and then offset the RF output frequency 10 MHz below the reference value Setting the Reference Value 1 Set the frequency to 500 MHz m N FREQUENCY M MODULATION AMPLITUDE A E CJ CJ CJ C9 amp N 2 55 SISRESSIS C 500 00000 MHz ud 2 00 ogooo lo fo gerrig oja j FREQUENCY 5 0 ref1 drw 2 Set 500 MHz as the reference frequency The4A symbol appears the display to indicate that the reference mode is selected The output frequency is still 500 MHz i ofSesoooao FREQUENCY m MODULATION AMPLITUDE EM y JB uO BOgJoN 0 000004 MHz m m ref2 drw 1a 16 Operation Examples Offsetting the RF Output from a Reference Offsetting the RF Output 3 Offset the output frequency 10 MHz below the reference frequency You can enter in the offset value directly or use the knob or f and keys SS RA 1 oloooodllo FRE
282. nable register Enabling this bit masks other bits in the QUEStionable register from reporting their status in the summary bit to STATus Enables bit 3 decimal equivalent 8 of the STATus register Enabling this bit masks other bits from reporting Uses the HP BASIC command SPOLL Serial Poll to see if the service request bit is reporting any interrupts Clears all status registers Clearing the status registers is not absolutely necessary but is used here because of the unknown state of the instrument GPIB Programming 2 19 SCPI Command Reference Table 2 2 Dictionary of Terms Description Indicates an ASCII representation of a number if required in the command statement The numbers may be an integer or floating point and may include a decimal exponent NRf stands for flexible numeric representation For further information refer to the IEEE 488 2 standard Indicates an ASCII representation of a number if required in the command statement The number must be an integer and may not include decimal points For further information refer to the IEEE 488 2 standard Indicates that a PCT termination is required in the command statement If no termination is specified a PCT value is assumed Indicates that a HZ KHZ GHZ or MHZ termination is required in the command statement IF the command is not terminated then HZ is ass
283. nce NOTE N _ ee ME ol elo oo I FREQUENCY MEME MODULATION MEIN AMPLITUDE dal 12 00000 MHz Ojloo 0205 0205100 SEQ 0 REG 01 gogg C3 C9 C3 0 10 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 00 REG lt gt numseq3 drw In this example you renumbered one register when you need to renumber two or more registers use REG instead of DEL to recall each register until you get to the last register in the sequence then use DEL Inserting a Register in a Sequence In this example you will insert a register into the sequence you created in the previous example The process involves incrementing each register number that comes after the point in the sequence where you wish to insert a register 1 Recall thelast register in sequence O NES 5 FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 01 insseq1 drw 7 FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE umm 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 02 insseq2 drw 1a 13 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers 3 Recall register 00 Register 01 can now b
284. nce Test Option 1E2 Only Test Record e 8648A Table 8 6 e 8648B Table 8 24 e 8648C Table 8 49 86480 Table 8 74 8648B C D Option 1 2 Only The following steps are for the 8648b C D with Option 1E 2 only For the 8648A this performance test is concluded Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 4 FM Accuracy Equipment Setup for 8648B C D Option 1E 2 SYNTHESIZED 8648 UNDER TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR RF OUTEUT OUTPUT MEASURING RECEIVER oooo0 59 o oo o 0000 7 Hu H INPUT 500 sn67a NOTE Use RF mixer MDC 164 when testing the 8648C D When testing the 8648B either RF mixer MDC 174 or MDC 164 may be used Configure the Synthesized Signal Generator 1 Amplitude 16 dBm 2 Frequency CW LO frequencies on test record 3 Modulation off Performance Tests FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 Only Measure Deviations 1 Enter the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record 8648B Table8 25 e 8648C Table8 50 8648D Table 8 75 8 12 Performance Tests FM Distortion Performance Test FM Distortion Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 5 FM Distortion Equipment Setup AUDIO ANALYZER o gg 7999 2 Hm racc n 8648 UNDER TEST
285. ncy range the signal from the output module is between 500 and 1000 MHz ALC operation is the same as for the 1000 to 2000 MHz band TheA10 assembly contains a calibration EEROM that contains calibration data This data must be regenerated anytime the A10 assembly is replaced 5a 14 Theory of Operation A11 Attenuator 8648B C D 11 Attenuator 8648B C D The attenuator is a 4 section attenuator 10 20 30 and 60 dB sections that provides 130 dB attenuation in 10 dB steps Calibration EEROM on the motherboard contains calibration data specific to this assembly It needs to be updated whenever the attenuator is replaced 5a 15 Theory of Operation A12 Reverse Power Protection 8648B C D A12 Reverse Power Protection 8648B C D The reverse power protection assembly is designed to protect the instrument from power applied to the RF output from an external source It opens the RF path when an excessive power level is detected When it istripped the front panel indicates that RF power is off To reset the RPP assembly just turn the RF power on again Calibration EEROM on the motherboard contains calibration data specific to this assembly It needs to be updated whenever the RPP assembly is replaced 5 16 Theory of Operation A13 Pulse Modulator 8648B C D Option 1E6 A13 Pulse Modulator 8648B C D Option 1E 6 The pulse modulation module is a thick film circuit mounted inside the instrument The main input
286. nd calibrate the power meter Measure Low Level Power accuracy 20 dBm 1 Connect the power sensor to the 8648 RF OUTPUT connector 2 Enter the frequencies and power levels shown in the test record Make sure the power sensor cal factors are entered correctly for each frequency Do not test at levels gt 20 dBm with this test setup 3 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record 8648B Table8 41 8648C Table 8 66 e 8648D Table 8 91 8 34 Performance Tests Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E6 Only Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E 6 Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 18 Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Equipment Setup 8648 UNDER TEST SPECTRUM ANALYZER 10 MHz Ref 10 MHz Ref RF Output an626a2d Configure the Spectrum Analyzer Resolution BW 10 kHz video BW 1MHz Frequency span 0 Hz Referencelevel 0 dBm Scale 10 dB div Videotrigger A WYN Configure the 8648 1 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 2 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 0 dB m 3 Activate pulse modulation display press AM AM 4 Turn pulse modulation on press MOD ON OFF 8 35 Performance Tests Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E6 Only Measure the On Off Ratio 1 Set the frequencies of the spectrum analyzer and the 8648 to those listed
287. ng Now amplitude changes do not cause the attenuator to change its range setting Consequently amplitude changes are limited to the range provided by the instrument s vernier For information about the instrument s vernier ranges refer to Chapter 1b Operation Reference NENNEN r CREME fm m FREQUENCY MODULATION AVL MEER C otc J L3 C39 C3 C3 C3 ORA 82 0 dBm NL C3 C3 C3 ET HOLD Cy oa G O Ex E E E _ jlo i CJ G cog aoan Co d EN N P Ne attn3 drw 7 7 1 20 Operation Examples Setting a User Selectable Modulated Frequency and Waveform Option 1E2 or 1EP Only Setting a User Selectable Modulated Frequency and Waveform Option 1 2 or Only NOTE This modulation example can only be performed if Option 1E2 or is present In this example you will select the modulation level and the modulated frequency and waveform of the RF signal output Setting the Modulation Level 1 Select FM modulation with a deviation of 25 kHz Either AM modulation may be used instead of FM The modulation type AM or and the modulation level deviation or depth is displayed on the top line of the front panel display as shown CHS G
288. ng Receiver 1 Reset AM mode detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter amp N Configure the Audio Analyzer 1 Distortion mode 2 30 kHz low pass filter 3 Set low input to ground Configure the 8648 1 Turn AM on press AM MOD ON OFF 2 Set therate press INT 1 kHz 3 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m 4 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Performance Tests AM Distortion Performance Test Measure Distortion Amplitudes 1 Enter the amplitudes frequencies and depths shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Test Record e 8648A Table8 10 e 8648B Table 8 30 e 8648C Table 8 55 e 86480 Table 8 80 8 20 Performance Tests Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 10 Phase Modulation Distortion Equipment Setup AUDIO ANALYZER B gg 7999 9 H Ex rara n 8648 UNDER TEST oo rici cann oooo n O ooopop o 0000 p a p000 Tangga n 0000 d MEASURING RECEIVER INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn65a Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset mode Peak detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter BW N Configure the Audio Analyzer 1 Distortion mode 2 30 kHz low p
289. ng keys are invalid when the pulse modulation screen is visible INT 400 Hz INT 1kHz EXT AC e EXTDC e 1kHz EXT DC 1b 30 Operation Reference Function Increment Set 1 INCR SET Press INCR SET to view or change the increment set value for the currently active function the active function is the last function key you press FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE FM AM or When you press INCR SET is displayed between the value and the units The U indicates that the displayed valueis the increment set value NOTE An increment value cannot be set for the knobs or the memory recall arrow keys Increment Set Ranges Function Range Frequency 1 Hz to 999 75 MHz Amplitude gt 0 0 to 149 0 dB 8648A Amplitude gt 0 0 to 150 5 dB 8648B C D FM Deviation gt 0 0 to 100 kHz AM Depth gt 0 0 to 100 Deviation gt 0 0 to 10 0 Radians Internal Audio Generator 0 01 to 1 0 kHz Options 1EP and 1E2 only NOTE It is possible to set an increment value of greater resolution than can be displayed or than the hardware can respond to However the instrument records each arrow key press and will respond after the appropriate number of presses START STOP Encoding f Option 1EP is present and the signal generator is the ENCODER mode the INCR SET key functions as a START STOP key to start or stop the pager encoding when in the pager encoder mode PREV and NEXT f Option is present and the
290. ns 1 General Purpose Interface System may contain no more than 2 meters 6 6 ft of connecting cable per instrument 2 The maximum accumulative length of connecting cables for any General Purpose Interface System is 20 meters 65 5 ft 2 44 GPIB Programming gpib n 8656 57 Compatible Language The 8648 signal generator can be operated remotely using either SCPI or 8656 57 compatible language SCPI is the recommended language for remote programming and all features are supported 8656 57 compatible language is offered so that the 8648 signal generator can be used as a replacement for the 8656B and 8657A B The 8648 is not fully compatible with programs developed for the 8656 57 but with the following minor changes it can be On the 8656 57 if the SCPI code turns RF to off and then changes amplitude the RF automatically turns back on For this same SCPI code to work in the 8648 the following line of code must be added to turn the RF back on OUTP STAT ON a On the 8656 57 a line terminator is not required to execute a line of code For the 8648 however a new line is required Send the SCPI command SYST LANG COMP to change from SCPI to 8656 57 compatible language or change the setting of the rear panel language switch The switch is read once at power up so if the language has been remotely selected it will revert to the switch setting when power is cycled GPIB Programming 2 45
291. nt The preset conditions are different depending on which language is selected The following table shows the differences between a clear message in the compatibility language and a RST in SCPI The parameters for the 8656B and 8657A B are shown for comparison Parameter 8648 8648 8656B Value 8657A B Value RST Value Compatibility Value Carrier Frequency 100 00000 MHz 100 00000 MHz 100 00000 MHz 100 00000 MHz 136 dBm 30 1 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 1 0 dB 0 1 100 kHz 10 00000 MHz Remain unchanged Output Amplitude AM Depth FM Peak Deviation Carrier Frequency Increment 136 dBm 0 0 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 10 0 dB 1 1 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 0 Remain unchanged 127 dBm 0 0 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 10 0 dB 1 1 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 0 Remain unchanged 143 5 dBm 0 0 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 10 0 dB 1 1 0 kHz 10 00000 MHz 0 Remain unchanged Output Amplitude Increment AM Depth Increment FM Peak Deviation Increment Coarse and Fine Tune Pointer Sequence Counter 100 Saved Set Ups Pulse Modulation Remain unchanged Off Remain unchanged Remain unchanged Remain unchanged Additional For additional 8656 57 programming information refer to the Programming HP 8656B HP 8657A HP 8657B Synthesized Signal Generator Information Operation and Calibration Manual 2 48 GP
292. nt s operation 5 1 Theory of Operation Figure 5a 1 8648A Simplified Block Diagram A4 REFERENCE A6 OUTPUT 1 GHz OUT 10 MHz REF IN 10 MHz REF OUT 1MHz A5 SIG GEN SYNTH ATTENUATOR OUT J99 RF OUTPUT gt O OPTIONAL TIMEBASE MOTHERBOARD MODUL AT I ON DISTRIBUTION FM Mop MOD REF A14 MODULATION GENERATOR OPTION 1E2 OR A30 PAGER ENCODER OPTION 1EP MOD INPUT OUTPUT A2 POWER SUPPLY IN R CONTROLLE OS OUT OF LOCK FRONT PANEL AUXILIARY KEYBOARD INTERFACE DISPLAY on621a2d 5a 2 Theory of Operation Figure 5a 2 8648B C D Simplified Block Diagram A4 REFERENCE OUTPUT 1 GHz OUT gt MHz REF IN 5 SIG GEN SYNTH All 12 10 MHz ATTENUATOR RPP REF OUT RF OUT OUT _ gt RF RF 1MHz output amp O0 OPTIONAL TIMEBASE A3 MOTHERBOARD MODULAT I ON A14 MODULATION GENERATOR OPTION 1E2 AM MOD RF lt 1000MHz AM MOD 4 R gt 1000MHz LG DE MOD INPUT OUTPUT A2 POWER SUPPLY NTR R CONTROLLE 05 001 OF LOCK A1 FRONT PANEL AUXILIARY INTERFACE on615bd 5a 3 Theory of Operation Overview Overview The 8648A B C D signal generator covers the frequency ranges shown in the following table Model Frequency Range 8648A 100 kHz to 1000 MHz 8648B
293. nty MHz Measured Upper dB 100 80 1 8 500 80 2 1000 80 2 1500 80 2 2000 80 2 2300 70 1 8 2500 70 2 2700 70 2 3000 70 2 3200 70 2 Table 8 68 Pulse Modulation Rise T Limits ns Frequency Uncertainty MHz Measured Upper tns 1000 10 1 Table 8 69 Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Limits kHz Uncertainty Lower Measured Upper Hz 5x10 D day 5 6x10 4 8 121 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record 8648D Test Record Table 8 70 8648D Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Customer Tested By Model Ambieritemperature Serial Number Relative Humidity Options Line Frequency Firmware Revision Special Notes Hz nominal 8 122 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 71 8648D Test Record Model Report Number Date Test Equipment Used Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Audio Analyzer 2 Measuring Receiver 3 Spectrum Analyzer 4 Synthesized Signal Generator 5 Frequency Counter 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 123 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 72 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4
294. o 136 0 dBm a 13 dBm for 8648B C D 3 RF OUTPUT The following table shows the reverse power protection for the RF output port of each instrument model When the instrument senses a reverse power signal it turns the RF output off the step attenuator to maximum attenuation and the vernier to its lowest setting A message appears in the second line of the display when the reverse power protection has been activated After you have removed the reverse power signal from the RF output press the RF ON OFF key toturn the output signal on again 1b 48 Operation Reference Function CAUTION Applying a signal source to the RF output port that exceeds the power level listed or maintaining a signal source at the RF output for an extended period of time may damage the instrument Reverse Power Protection lt 2000 MHz 50 watts into 500 gt 2000 MHz 25 watts into 500 iul Jum EE 00000000000000 0000000000000000000000000 L G00 00000000000 GGG GOOD OOOOOOOUODOODODOGOUOODOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOGGOGOG OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OGGOOOOGOOGOOGOOo OOOO000000000000000000000 gGOGOGQUOgOUOOGOOUO 000000000000000000000000 00000000000000 00000
295. o Analyzer 2 Measuring Receiver 3 Spectrum Analyzer 4 Synthesized Signal Generator 5 Frequency Counter 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 97 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 47 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 Table 8 48 FM Accuracy Performance Test Part 2 Limits kHz RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648C 8663A 8902A kHz Hz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2500 2501 5 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 2500 2501 5 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3200 2500 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 3200 2500 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 8 98 Performance Tests 8648C Test Rec
296. of AMPLITUDE or R of RF OFF Operation Reference Function Pulse Modulation NOTE Pulse modulation is valid only for instruments with Option 1 6 CJ gm funckeys drw 1 PULSE To select pulse modulation press AM PULSE twice If RF is on the display will look like the following representation The MOD ON OFF key enables or disables the pulse modulator When the instrument is in the pulse modulation mode pulse modulation should be turned off using MOD ON OFF before switching off the instrument If theinstrument is switched off whilethe pulse modulation mode is turned on the instrument will power up with no RF output p FREQUENCY PULSE MOD 100 0 dBm REAR IN PULSE PULSE MOD 100 0 dBm REAR IN OFF MOD ON OFF on68a2d NOTE The word PULSE is shown in the AMPLITUDE portion of the display when pulse modulation is enabled MOD ON OFF and the RF is turned on RF ON OFF In this case no RF will be present at the RF output unless a TTL high signal is applied to the rear panel PULSE IN connector 1b 29 Operation Reference Function The followi
297. ogies offices is located at the front of this book In the U S A it is also possible to call 800 227 8164 and they will take your parts order If you need help finding the correct part number you can call Parts Identification at 916 783 0804 in the U S A Assembly Replacements For most parts you can either order a new assembly or an exchange assembly E xchange assemblies are factory repaired inspected and tested If you order an exchange assembly you must return the defective assembly part NOTE After the removal or replacement of assemblies it may be necessary to perform related adjustments and performance test procedures prior to calibrating the signal generator For more information refer to Post Repair located in Chapter 5 of this manual This section provides tables describing the assemblies and their related procedures 6 1 Replaceable Parts Assembly Replacements 6 2 OPTION P71 is MP2 LN MP14 4 Places gt MP13 35 Ploces amp When multiple parts are listed 1EP parts are listed first 1E2 parts are listed last REAR VIEW 8 MP10 4 Places m O SN A Ru MP19 2 Places N S Be A3J19 N n NININ QQ SSH A3J18 NNUS SES SR Gu W1 or 11 W15 Option A1J1 4 Places W18 on Option 1E2 8 8 4 8 P 8 oe
298. om ROM Either the controller has failed in reading from ROM or the ROM data has failed Check the hardware connection between the motherboard and the ROM board 5c 7 Service Error Messages 626 Description Cause What To Do 627 Description Cause What To Do 628 Description Cause What To Do 629 Description Cause What To Do 5c 8 Volatile RAM read write failure The controller detected a failure when comparing data that was written to and then read from volatile RAM This is a hardware failure between points on the A3 board The A3 board failure should be verified and the board replaced Battery RAM failure memory lost The battery backed RAM lost data Either the RAM has failed the battery is bad or the DEL key was held down at power up Check the battery voltage and replace it if it is incorrect Non volatile RAM read write failure The controller detected a failure when comparing data that was written to and then from non volatile RAM This is a hardware failure between points on the A3 board The A3 board failure should be verified and the board replaced dsp board failure The dsp board self test has failed Either the dsp board attached to the display or the A3 controller has failed Check the dsp board first for problems If the dsp board is normal check the A3 controller 6 Replaceable Parts To order parts contact Agilent Technologies A list of the Agilent Technol
299. on SHAPe SHAPe shape Sets the PM modulation waveform for the internal modulation generator Option 1E2 only Legal values for shape are SINe TRIangle SQUare and SAW RST value is SINe GPIB Programming 2 37 POWer Subsystem PULM Subsystem 2 38 GPIB Programming SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Returns the value of the current CW amplitude The return value is in units of DBM if POWer REFerence STATe is OFF or it is in DB relative to the current value of POWer REFerence if POWer REFerence STATe is ON LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude NRf lt 1 term gt Sets CW amplitude RST value is 186 dBm ATTenuation AUTO AUTO ON OFF 110 When set ON the firmware will control the attenuators Turning it OFF causes the attenuator range to hold to it s present setting RST value is ON REFerence REFerence lt NRf gt lt ampl term gt Sets a reference value which if STATe is ON allows all amplitude parameters to be queried set as relative to the reference value RST value is 0 dBm STATe STATe ON OFF 11 0 Determines whether amplitude is output in absolute or relative mode RST value is OFF PULM STATe STATe ON OFF 110 This function controls the state of the pulse modulation RST value is OFF STATus Subsystem Note STATus QUEStionable EVENt Returns the contents of the event register associated with the status structu
300. on ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A6 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A6 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM Attenuator cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A6 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A6 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM Timebase cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully Thereis either a failurein writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A4 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the module If thefailureis still present after replacing the A4 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM 510 Description Cause What To Do 511 Description Cause What To Do 512 Descri
301. onnect the Test Re xh EESE E Ka RE 8 37 Conngure tne Pulse Get Oil a aac Xe ode a Cea EXC a XL e Oe X Dao 8 37 Configure the 8648 peed ERR TENS HEAR FESTUS ee eee EES EOE TREES 8 37 Configure het Sateen 4 agnor ec ced Ra s 8 37 Measure the Rise Hu OE OE RE HES ERE 8 38 SE P eel a ee SP 8 38 Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Performance Test Option Only 8 39 Connect ihe Test eirs sseni tegeta beaded news bans 8 39 Configure the Frequency 8 39 CON OUI DAD 4 oh aad eoa Fa RISE dura e d Ea py hw a ae 8 39 Measure the Frequency iusck ewes irbis WEE YER Oded es PEAG DER 8 39 Wet Fa a sack doy suia Eacecionare dra head a poe Ace aod Re cal e depo dei dioe d i 8 39 FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 8 40 Connect ihe Test reacted bebe debe CE a de EROR d a 8 40 Configure the Vector Signal 8 40 CONGO the Se dotes qe OPE ed eb 8 42 Measure FSK DevistiOn EET WERT ERE 8 43 TERE CUTS 8 45 Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option
302. opyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law 4 Select Next to continue with the setup The important I nformation screen is displayed This screen contains information that is vital to installing and using the software In addition any new information may also be shown on this screen 7 37 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Stop now and read the information displayed Important Information Please READ ALL of this information PLEASE READ THESE NOTES BEFORE INSTALLING Welcome to the Agilent Service Support Software These notes are designed to help you understand character of this application that apply to the installation OVERVIEW Included in this software installation is the Agilent Service 5 INSTALLATION ON SYSTEMS WITH ESG A ESG_B or E This software is compatible with ESG_A ESG_B and ESG_ For the latest ESG software try www agilent com find 5 5 Select Next and the Choose Destination Location screen is displayed The default location for installing the software is C H P_SVC HP 8648 You are strongly urged to use this as the software s destination folder Choose Destination Location Setup will install 8648 Service Software in the fol
303. or to a changein altitude usually go away when the instrument is returned toits original position A frequency change due to mechanical shock usually appears as a fixed frequency error 8 46 Performance Tests Internal Timebase Aging Rate Performance Test Option 1E5 Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 22 Internal Timebase Aging Rate E quipment Setup OSC LLOSCOPE CHANNEL 2 P d N 8648A 10 MHz 5D _ D PRIMARY T PORT 1 s m UNDER TESI Y REF OUTPUT output FREQUENCY STANDARD H nm poooooood 0 B agn 200000 Em 8o L aoa 9 an68abc 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 22 2 Preset all instruments and let them warm up for at least one hour NOTE If the oscilloscope does not have a 50Q input impedance connect channel 1 through a 50Q feedthrough Configure the Oscilloscope On the oscilloscope adjust the external triggering for a display of the 10 MHz REF OUTPUT signal from the synthesizer 1 Channel 1 Display On Volts Division 500 mV Input Coupling dc Input Impedance 50Q or use a 50Q feedthrough 2 Channel 2 Display Off Input Coupling dc Input Impedance 50Q or use 50Q feedthrough 3 Timebase 8 47 Performance T
304. orced convection must be used 3 2 Installation Connecting AC Power Connecting AC Power WARNING This is a Safety Class 1 product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited If this instrument is to be energized via an external autotransformer for voltage reduction make sure that its common terminal is connected to a neutral earthed pole of the power supply This instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power receptacle this cable grounds the instrument cabinet The type of mains plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination Refer to Figure 302 for the part numbers of the power cables and mains plugs available Power Requirements The signal generator requires a power source of either 50 60 400 Hz at 100 120 V or 50 60 Hz at 200 240 V The voltage ranges for these nominal voltage values are shown in the following table Power consumption is 170 VA maximum Available AC Voltage Voltage Range 100 V 90 to 110 Vrms 120 V 108 to 132 Vrms 220 V 198 to 242 Vrms 240 V 216 to 250 Vrms CAUTION This instrument has autoranging line voltage input
305. ord Table 8 49 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1 2 Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 Table 8 50 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E 2 Part 2 Limits kHz RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648C 8663A 8902A kHz Hz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2500 2501 5 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 2500 2501 5 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 3200 2500 700 5 4 730 5 270 50 3200 2500 700 10 9 580 10 420 100 8 99 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 51 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper 10 5 0 1 0 16 10 50 0 1 0 16 10 100 0 1 0 16 100 5 0 1 0 16 100 50 0 1 0 16 100 100 0 1 0 16 400 5 0 1 0 16 400 30 0 1 0 16 400 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 5 0 1 0 16 756 25 50 0 1 0 16 756 25 100 0 1 0 1
306. ower Levels gt 10 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST POWER METER POWER SENSOR an6sa2d 7 28 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 27 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup for Power Levels of 10 to 70 dBm 8648 UNDER TEST Ref Out 19 MHz Rer SPECTRUM ANALYZER a o000000 ATTENUATOR an66a2d Figure 7 28 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup for Power Levels of lt 70 dBm and lt 1300 MHz 8648 UNDER TEST Ref Out 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM ANALYZER LOW FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER an67a2d 7 29 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 29 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup for Power Levels of lt 70 dBm and 1300 MHz 8648 10 MHz UNDER TEST Ref Out 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM ANALYZER HIGH FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER an68a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 30 Adjustments Manual Adjustments LF Output Level Most 8648B C D 8648B C Frequency Range Early versions of the 8648B and 8648C have a frequency range that begins at 100 kHz rather than 9 kHz If the DUT has a frequency range that begins at 100 kHz do not run this adjustment Description This adjustment creates and stores the slope and offset calibration data for the output module from 9 kHz to 100 kHz This adjustment will not allow any calibration data to be stor
307. pe was encountered For example a string was received when the device does not accept strings Additional information is available over GPIB Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the semicolon was omitted after a program unit EMC1 CH1 VOLTS5 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than one allowed For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the EMC common command only accepts one parameter so receiving EMCO 1 is not allowed Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header For example the EMC common command requires one parameter so receiving EMC is not allowed Header separator error A character which is not legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus C MACRO is in error Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 1c 5 Operation messages GPIB Command Messages Q ANa 2 Undefined header The header is syntactically correc
308. performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 65 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test with Option 1EA and 1E6 Part 3 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 3 0 13 11 5 14 5 0 23 249 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 400 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 999 9 18 16 5 19 5 0 23 1500 17 15 5 18 5 0 23 2100 15 13 5 16 5 0 40 2500 13 11 5 14 5 0 58 3200 11 9 0 13 0 0 58 8 119 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record NOTE f the automated Power Level Accuracy performance test is performed the RF Level Accuracy performance test is not required Table 8 66 RF Level Accuracy Performance Test Part 4 Limits dBm Frequency Amplitude Uncertainty MHz dBm Lower Measured Upper dB 2000 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 16 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 16 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 16 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 16 2499 25 9 26 9 24 9 0 16 35 9 36 9 34 9 0 16 45 9 46 9 44 9 0 16 55 9 56 9 54 9 0 16 3200 25 9 27 4 24 4 0 19 35 9 37 4 34 4 0 19 45 9 47 4 44 4 0 19 55 9 57 4 54 4 0 19 8 120 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 67 Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Performance Test Option 1E6 ime Performance Test Option 1E6 Limits dB Frequency Uncertai
309. ption Cause What To Do 513 Description Cause What To Do Service Error Messages Temperature cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to RAM or in restoring data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A7 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the module If the failure is still present after replacing the A7 assembly replace the A3 assembly which contains the RAM failure TF coeff s cal restore After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM The calibration ROM can be verified by replacing the A7 assembly The calibration ROM is contained in the assembly If thefailureis still present after replacing the A7 assembly replacethe a3 assembly which contains the RAM Generic path cal restore failure After detecting a failure in comparing calibration data between RAM and the calibration ROM a data restore was attempted unsuccessfully There is either a failure in writing data to RAM or in reading data from the calibration ROM Replace the assembly The assembly has a continuity failure The calibration R
310. quence 0 The deleted register number has been removed from the sequence Note that the instrument does not renumber the registers when is deleted S MN TEES CT FREQUENCY MODULATION umm C3 CJ CH C3 12 00000 MHz 20200050 SEQ 0 REG 02 E D0 E 10 00000 MHz C3 2 SEQ 0 REG 00 REG lt gt delreg2 drw Renumbering the Registers in a Sequence In this example you will eliminate the skip from register 00 to register 02 in sequence 0 caused when you deleted register 01 in the previous example Decreasing the Register Number 1 Delete register 02 The settings saved in register 02 are recalled when it is deleted S oo B FREQUENCY MODULATION mE AMPLITUDE 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG o 0 numseq1 drw yp FREQUENCY a MODULATION AMPLITUDE me 12 00000 MHz SEQ 0 REG 01 nemswaq2 drw 1a 12 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers Checking the Sequence 3 Step through the register seque
311. r Procedure 1 Turn off power to the signal generator 2 Remove the instrument cover 3 Connect the MOD INPUT OUTPUT connector of the signal generator to the input of the universal counter as shown in Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Pager Encoder Timebase Frequency Adjustment Setup 8648A UNDER TEST UNIVERSAL COUNTER MOD INPUT OUTPUT on64abc 4 Turn on power tothe signal generator and let it warm up for one hour 5 Enter the pager encoder mode by pressing FM ENCODER twice If FM was the last active function only press the FM ENCODER key once 6 Rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob to set FORMAT to SERVICE 7 Press NEXT and rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob to set CALIBRATION FSKto3200 2 8 Press INCR SET START STOP toturn the encoder output on The universal counter should now read dose to 1600 Hz 9 Adjust the variable capacitor on the encoder timebase until the frequency on the universal counter reads 1600 Hz 0 0016 Hz The capacitor is labeled TIMEBASE ADJ UST 1 in Figure 7 5 7 7 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Figure 7 5 Variable Capacitor Location 10 Turn power off to the signal generator and replace the instrument cover Adjustments Manual Adjustments Automated Adjustments This section documents the following automated adjustments 1 AM Level and Distortion Not used for serial prefixes gt 3847A 3847U 2 Detector Offset Not used for serial prefixes gt 38
312. racy 2 millihertz at 1600 Hz 89441A Vector Signal Analyzer with Options AYB and UFG for use with 8648A Option 1EP only FSK deviation accuracy 10 Hz at 4800 Hz deviation 54600B Oscilloscope for use with 8648 Option 1E5 only Bandwidth 100MHz 5071A Primary Frequency Standard for use with 8648 Option 1E5 only Frequency 10Mhz Stability gt 1x10 year 5316B Frequency Counter Resolution 0 1 8447D Low Frequency Amplifier Frequency range 100 kHz to 1300 MHz Gain mean per channel gt 25 dB Noisefigure lt 8 5 dB 8449B High Frequency amplifier Frequency range 1300MHzto4 GHz Gain mean per channel gt 26 dB Noisefigure lt 8 5 dB 8 5 Performance Tests Performance Test Descriptions Performance Test Descriptions The performance test verify the signal generator meets its specifications The following tests are documented in this section Manual Performance Tests FM Accuracy FM Accuracy Option 1E2 Only FM distortion AM Accuracy AM Accuracy Option 1E2 Only AM Distortion PhaseModulation Distortion Residual FM harmonics Spurious DC FM Frequency Error RF Level Accuracy Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Option 1E 6 Only Pulse Modulation Rise Time Option 1E6 Only Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Option Only FSK Deviation Accuracy Option Only Internal Timebase Aging Rate
313. re CONDition Returns the contents of the condition register associated with the status structure Reading the condition register is non destructive ENABle lt NR1 gt Sets the enable mask which allows true conditions in the event register to be reported in the summary bit ENABle Queries the enable mask PAGing Event CONDition 1 lt NR1 gt 1 The start of frame batch and the end of message encoding be detected by checking this register status with serial polling Pager encoder programming commands are valid only for instruments with Option 1EP POWer EVENt CONDition ENABle lt NR1 gt ENABle MODulation EVENt CONDition ENABle lt NR1 gt ENABle CALibration FEXTension EVENt CONDition ENABle lt NR1 gt 1 GPIB Programming 2 39 SYSTem Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem Option 1EP Only Note Note 2 40 GPIB Programming SYSTem LANGuage COMP SCPI Causes the signal generator to perform a language switch to 8656 57 compatible language or to SCPI For example OUTPUT 7193 SYZT iLRHG COMHP sets the language to 8656 57 compatible language A 0 5 second WAIT statement is required after changing languages The rear panel language switch is read once at power up so if the language has been remotely selected it will revert to the switch setting when power is cycled ERRor Returns any system error
314. reading 1 digit 8902A FM Accuracy P Receiver AM accuracy 2 of reading 1 digit FM Distortion P Range 250 kHz to 1000 MHz AM Accuracy P Filters 300 Hz high pass 15 kHz Phase Modulation Distortion P low pass Residual FM P Detectors Peak RF Level Accuracy P AM Modulator A Motherboard Audio Path A Oscilloscope Bandwidth 1 GHz 54100A Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio P Pulse Modulation Rise Time P Oscilloscope Bandwidth 100 MHz 54600B Internal Timebase Aging Rate P Power Meter Instrumentation accuracy 0 5 438A RF Level Accuracy P Power reference accuracy 0 9 Power Level Accuracy P Detector Offset A Output Level A Predistortion amp Detector Offset A Prelevel A Output L evel FE A HF Power Level Accuracy A Power Sensor Freq range 100 kHz to 4 2 GHz 8482A RF Level Accuracy P Power range 30 dBm to 13 dBm Power Level Accuracy P Maximum SWR Detector Offset A 100 kHz to 300 kHz 1 1 6 Output Level A 300 kHz to 1 MHz 1 1 2 Predistortion amp Detector Offset A 1MHzto2 GHz1 1 1 Prelevel A 2 GHz to 4 2 GHz 1 1 3 Output Level FE A Cal factor accuracy RSS lt 1 6 HF Power Level Accuracy A Power Sensor Freq range 100 kHz to 4 2 GHz 8481D RF Level Accuracy P Low Power range 70 dBm to 20 dBm Option H70 Maximum SWR 100 kHz to 300 kHz 1 1 2 300 kHz to 2 GHz 1 1 15 2 GHz to 4 2 GHz 1 1 4 Power linearity 30 to 20 dBm 1 Cal factor accuracy 1 696 Primary Frequency 1
315. requency measure the 10 to 90 rise time of the RF pulse Test Record 8648B Table8 43 e 8648C Table 8 68 e 8648D Table 8 93 8 38 Performance Tests Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 20 Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy Equipment Setup 8648A UNDER TEST UNIVERSAL COUNTER MOD I NPUT OUTPUT on64abc Configure the Frequency Counter 1 Frequency Auto 2 Input 1 MQ Configure the 8648 1 Enter the pager encoder mode by pressing FM ENCODER twice If FM was the last active function only press the FM ENCODER key once 2 Rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob to set FORMAT to SERVICE 3 Press NEXT and rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob to se CALIBRATION FSK to 3200 2 4 Press INCR SET START STOP toturn the encoder output on Measure the Frequency 1 Record the test results and comparethe results to the limits in thetest record Test Record 8648A Option IEP Table 8 17 8 39 Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 21 FM Deviation Accuracy Equipment Setup N VECTOR 10 MHz EXT SIGNAL ANALYZER REF INPUT E nnan
316. rer s Address Microwave Instruments Division Queensferry Microwave Division 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway South Queensferry Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 West Lothian USA EH30 9TG United Kingdom declares that the products Product Name RF Signal Generator Model Number HP 8648A HP 8648B HP 8648C HP 8648D Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above products conform to the following Product specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 EN 61010 1 1993 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class IEC 801 2 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 3 V m 27 500 MHz IEC 801 4 1988 EN 50082 1 1992 0 5 kV Sig Lines 1 kV Power Lines IEC 555 2 1982 A1 1985 EN 60555 2 1987 IEC 555 3 1982 A1 1990 EN 60555 3 1987 A1 1991 Supplementary Information These products herewith comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carry the CE marking accordingly Santa Rosa 19 Dec 1996 4 To B n Hiatt Quality Engineering Manager South Queensferry 27 Dec 1996 RA de A pv R M Evans Quality Manager European Contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewiett Packard GmbH Department ZQ Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse 130 D 71034 B blinger Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 4 14 Specifications Specifications 4
317. rformance Test Option 1 2 Only Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 8 AM Accuracy Equipment Setup for Option 1E 2 MEASURING RECEIVER 8648 UNDER TEST nn HEB Dooooo Foo n n rng nummum o 00 INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn64ao Configure the Measuring Receiver 1 Reset AM mode detector 300 Hz high pass filter 15 kHz low pass filter BW N Configure the 8648 1 Turn AM on press AM MOD ON OFF 2 Press INT 1 kHz until the modulation generator Option 1E 2 sine waveform is activated 3 Set the rate press 1 kHz 4 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Measure Depths Enter the amplitudes frequencies and depths shown in the test record 2 Record the test results and compare the results to the limits in the test record Performance Tests AM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 Only Test Record 8648A Table 8 9 8648B Table 8 29 e 8648C Table 8 54 86480 Table 8 79 8 18 Performance Tests AM Distortion Performance Test AM Distortion Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 9 AM Distortion Equipment Setup AUDIO ANALYZER o cuu 7999 EI ERI rara n EE T 8648 UNDER TEST racc nnum o m nnnnnn Ooooo Bu Bogue MODULATION o 0000 p MEASURING RECEIVER INPUT 500 RF OUTPUT sn65a Configure the Measuri
318. rmation about the line voltage connector or fuse replacement refer to Chapter 3 Installation 5 HP IB Connector This is an IEEE 488 1 1987 connector for controlling the instrument via an external controller For information about GPIB operation of the instrument refer to Chapter 2 GPIB Programming 6 TIMEBASE ADJ and Language Switches Position one of this switch places the instrument in the timebase adjustment mode For the timebase adjustment procedure refer to Chapter 7 Adjustments Position two of this switch allows you to set the language for remote programming to either 8656 57 compatible language 1 or to SCPI 0 The language switch is read once at power up 7 External Pulse Input This connector provides the input for an external TTL signal which is used by the pulse modulator to modulate the RF signal off and on This connector is on Option 1E6 only 1b 50 Operation Reference Function Remote Interface Accessory 833004 REMOTE INTERFACE REC Jo t3 80 o 506 261 9 S 3505000 02090 5959096 00000 00996 095 pcs AUXILLARY 4 gt INTERFACE N O RE al d 2 E Nut 4 v M S J go ot72a 1 MOD ON OFF Press MOD ON OFF toturn on or off al
319. rned off except that the RF output will turned off and the digit select arrow keys lt and will be reset to the least significant digit 2 Display The display can be one of two displays depending on the serial number prefix of your instrument as illustrated below FREQUENCY MENS MODULATION AMPLITUDE T FREQUENCY MEN yopusion ot77a 8648A Prefix A Liquid Crystal Display LCD labels located above the display 8648B Prefix 8648C Prefix Operation Quick Overview 8648D Prefix 3636A and below 3623A and below 3623A and below 3613A and below 3643U and below 3642U and below 3642u and below 3642U and below The following table describes the prefixes that apply to the various 8648 models equipped with an LCD The display contrast of the LCD can be achieved using the adjustment that is located on the rear panel of these instruments Note that this adjustment is only available for instruments equipped with an LCD It allows you to adjust the contrast of the LCD Turn the adjustment to optimize the display for viewing from most angles If the display is blank first attempt to adjust the display contrast before returning the instrument for service The following table describes the prefixes that apply to the various 8648 models equipped with a VFD A Vacuum Fluorescent Display VCD labels located below the display 8648A Prefix 8648B
320. s 8648C Test Record Table 8 55 AM Distortion Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 6 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39 400 70 0 3 0 70 1000 30 0 2 0 39 1000 70 0 3 0 70 8 106 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 56 Phase Modulation Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz Rad Lower Measured Upper 0 250 5 0 1 0 26 100 5 0 1 0 26 400 5 0 1 0 26 500 5 0 1 0 26 750 5 0 1 0 26 1000 5 0 1 0 26 Table 8 57 PhaseModulation Distortion Performance Test Part 2 Limits RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648C 8663A 8902A Rad MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 7 0 1 0 26 2000 2001 5 700 7 0 1 0 26 2500 2501 5 700 14 0 1 0 26 3200 2500 700 14 0 1 0 26 8 107 Performance Tests 8648C Test Record Table 8 58 Residual FM Performance Test Limits Hz RF Frequency LO Frequency Input Frequency Uncertainty 8648C 8663A 89
321. s are RF output from the A10 frequency extension module TTL pulse from the rear panel PULSE IN connector The module is supplied with 15V 45V GND data and enable lines from the motherboard assembly via a twisted wire assembly If Option 1E2 is present the power and lines are routed from the motherboard via the A14 modulation generator assembly 5a 17 Theory of Operation A14 Modulation Generator Option 1E2 A14 Modulation Generator Option 1E 2 The modulation generator contains the DSP digital signal processor memory DAC serial 1 for the other assemblies and output filters It generates sine square triangle and saw or ramp waveforms used to modulate the FM and states of the instrument When the instrument is using the variable frequency waveform source the modulation generator will work as an internal modulation source connected to the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port The modulated signal can be monitored from the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port as a 2 Vp p signal This assembly has a serial communication port and communicates with the main controller on the A3 motherboard through this port The calibration data for the modulation generator output level is stored in EEPROM on this assembly The modulation generator has its own crystal controlled oscillator The DAC output signal is filtered by a 50 kHz cut off low pass filter 5 18 Theory of Operation A30 Pager Encoder 8648A Option 1EP A30 P
322. s the Dummy Call function Sets a message with all 5s 0101 in numeric format which is automatically defined to the all non call phases to equalize the FSK deviation An address for the non call phases must be set OFF Does not activate the dummy call function Idle frames are set to the all non call phases ADDR 1 12 ADDR 112 lt NR1 gt Sets the dummy call address 1 and 2 RST values are 0032769 for address 1 and 0000000 for address 2 ROAMing SELect SELect NONE SSID NID Selects the roaming mode to NONE SSID or NID RST value is NONE NONE Tests a pager without the roaming mode SSID Tests a pager in the SSID roaming mode which responds to a simulcast transmission system The Frame Offset function is added NID 7 Tests a pager in the SSID and NID roaming mode The NID mode in addition to the SSID mode is a roaming network for covering wider multiple areas SOURce PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD ROAMing SSID LID LID lt NR1 gt Sets the SSID local channel ID 0 to 511 of a pager under test RST value is 0 CZONe CZONe lt NR1 gt Sets the coverage zone 0 to 31 of a pager under test RST value is 0 CCODe CCODe NR1 Sets the country code 0 to 1023 RST value 0 TMF TMF lt NR1 gt Sets the SSID traffic management flag 0 to 15 RST value is 2 FOFF FOFF lt NR1 gt Sets the number of frames to be offset by BIW101 from the signaling frame
323. s the NID traffic management flag Sets the NID frame offset Sets the number of repeats for FLEX TD Returns the current number of repeats during encoding PAG POCS TYPE TONE NUM ALPH ALPH7 ALPH8 PAG POCS CODE value PAG POCS FUNC 0 1 2 3 Sets the message type to be sent PAG POCS TYPE Sets the pager code for POCSAG format Sets the POCSAG function bit PAG POCS CODE PAG POCS FUNC GPIB Programming 2 9 Table 2 1 Programming Command Statements and Descriptions continued Command Statement Standard Commands for Status See also GPIB Status Reporting examples STAT QUES POW COND Returns contents of the power condition register STAT QUES POW ENAB NR1 Enables NR1 event registers for power STAT QUES POW ENAB STAT QUES POW EVEN Returns contents of enabled event registers for power Returns contents of the modulation condition register STAT QUES MOD COND STAT QUES MOD ENAB NR1 Enables NR1 event registers for modulation STAT QUES MOD ENAB Returns contents of enabled registers for STAT QUES MOD EVEN modulation Returns contents of enabled registers for frequency extension calibration STAT QUES CAL FEXT EVEN Returns contents of the frequency extension calibration condition register STAT QUES CAL FEXT COND STAT QUES CAL FEXT
324. s the value RST value is A0000001 SOURce PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD CYCLe CYCLe lt NR1 gt Sets the cycle number 0 to 4 RST value is 0 FRAMe NR1 Sets the frame number 0 to 127 RST value is 0 CCOunt Returns the current cycle number during encoding FCOunt Returns the current frame number during encoding PHASe PHASe A BICID Sets the phase A B C or D RST value is A COLLapse COLLapse lt NR1 gt Sets the collapse cycle 0 to 7 RST value is 4 GPIBProgramming 2 31 Note 2 32 GPIB Programming SOURce PAGing FORMat FLEX FTD ATYPe ATYPe SHORt LONG Sets the address type to SHORt or LONG RST value is SHORt ADDR1 ADDR1 lt NR1 gt Sets the short address or the primary address of the long address RST value is 0032679 ADDR2 ADDR2 lt NR1 gt Sets the secondary address of the long address RST value is 0000000 To set the address of the pager under test use the ATYPe ADDR1 and ADDR2 commands The following commands are left to keep the compatibility of the programs developed under the older revision firmware SADDress SADDress lt NR1 gt Sets the 7 digit short address RST value is 0032769 LADD1 LADD1 lt NR1 gt Set the 7 digit long address 1 RST value is 0032769 gt LADD2 LADD2 lt NR1 gt Set the 7 digit long address 2 RST value is 0000000 SOURce
325. service support software The software s administrative functions allow for the addition or removal of all necessary test equi pment software drivers and test procedures This would indude additional software drivers as they are released to extend the range of tests and equipment supported by the test set or maintenance releases of the current drivers Software Configuration Follow the instructions below to configure the software to run in either User mode or Administration mode Start the software For MS Windows version 3 x 1 Open the Program Manager window 2 Open the Agilent Service Support program group 3 Select the Agilent Service Support icon For MS Windows 95 98 NT 1 Select Start 2 Select Agilent Service Software for PC s 3 Select Agilent Service Software The service support software has two configurations U ser and Administration e User Logging in User configuration only allows access to the instrument s performance test and adjustments Refer tothe section title Starting the Software Administration Logging on in Administration configuration supports all administrative functions induding the addition of new equipment and the installation of test procedures and device drivers 1 In theUser Name field type Admin Case is important 2 In the Password field type Falcon 3 Click OK Adding Test Equipment Before any performance tests can berun your specific test equipment must be en
326. sing the internal audio generator in the Option 1EP and the internal modulation generator in the Option 1E2 Legal values are 20 Hz to 10 kHz for the Option 1EP and 10 Hz to 20 kHz for the Option 1E2 RST value 15 1 kHz GPIB Programming 2 23 FREQuency Subsystem INITiate Subsystem Option 1EP Only Note OUTPut Subsystem 2 24 GPIB Programming INTernal2 FUNCtion SHAPe SHAPe shape Sets the FM modulation waveform for the internal modulation generator Option 1E2 only Legal values for shape are SINe TRIangle SQUare and SAW RST value is SINe SOURce FREQuency FIXed CW FIXed lt NRf gt lt freq term gt This function selects a frequency for the continuous wave non swept signal RST value is 100 MHz REFerence REFerence lt NRf gt lt freq term gt Sets a reference value which if STATe is ON allows all frequency parameters to be queried set as relative to the reference value RST value is MHz STATe STATe ON OFF 110 Determines whether frequency is output in absolute or relative mode RST value is OFF INITiate IMMediate This command starts pager encoding Pager encoder programming commands are valid only for instruments with Option 1EP OUTPut STATe STATe ON OFF 110 This function controls the state of the RF output When OUTPut STATe is OFF the RF source level is set to off Turning OUTPut STATe ON causes the programmed CW si
327. solution BW 1 kHz 3 Video BW 1 kHz Configure the 8648 1 Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF 2 Turn modulation off press MOD ON OFF Measure Spurious Levels 1 Measure the levels of the spurious signals shown in the test record 2 Convert the measured levels to decibels below the fundamental dBc and compare the results to the corresponding limits Test Record e 8648A Table 8 14 8648B Table 8 35 e 8648C Table 8 60 86480 Table 8 65 8 27 Performance Tests DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test DC FM Frequency Error Performance Test Connect the Test Equipment Figure 8 15 DC FM Frequency Error Equipment Setup 8648 UNDER TEST 53508 FREQUENCY COUNTER ATTENUATOR 10 dB on63bd Configure the Frequency Counter For frequencies gt 10 MHz and 500 MHz Use Input 2 press 500 For frequencies gt 500 MHz Use Input 1 press AUTO Configure the 8648 1 Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 4 dB m Select external DC FM press FM EXT DC Press RF ON OFF toturn the RF output on Turn on MOD ON OFF Press EXT DC to perform DC FM calibration amp W N Measure Deviations 1 Set the frequencies and deviations shown in the test record 2 For each data point measure the carrier frequency with FM turned off press MOD ON OFF 3 For each data point measure the carrier frequency with FM turned on press MOD ON OFF 4 Compute the error difference an
328. ssage is displayed when a sequence is selected that has no registers saved in it f you wish to save registers in the sequence set up the instrument press the SAV key and enter a two digit register number 0 No external dc coupling for PM 1 0 This message is displayed when is selected and EXT DC or 1 kHz EXT DC is also selected DC coupling of an external source is not possible for PM If you press 1 kHz EXT DC you will actually get 1 kHz and external ac Or select EXT AC coupling for PM Additional internal plus external modulation capabilities such as 1 kHz EXT DC are available through GPIB control of the instrument refer to Chapter 2 GPIB Programming 0 Modulation exceeds deviation range 0 This message is displayed when modulation is set to level that exceeds the operating range of the instrument This condition occurs when a modulation level is entered that is out of range for the current RF frequency setting or when the RF frequency setting is changed and the modulation setting is out of range for the new setting 0 There are no registers available p This message is displayed when an attempt is made to save a memory register and all of the instrument s memory registers have already been used Delete any unneeded registers in order to save new ones Deleting registers from any sequence will make them unavailable for saving new settings in the sequence you are using 1c 2 0 Operation messages
329. ssage to appear on the display 627 Battery RAM failure memory lost Thisis normal 1b 34 Operation Reference Function Instrument Preset Settings Function Parameter Setting RF Frequency Frequency 100 MHz Increment 10 MHz Reference 0 0 MHz RF Amplitude Power Level 136 dBm Increment 1 0 dBm Reference 0 0 dBm FM Input Internal Frequency 1kHz Coupling AC State Off Deviation 30 Increment 0 1 kHz AM Input Internal Frequency 1kHz State Off Depth 30 Increment 0 1 Input Internal Frequency 1kHz Coupling AC State Off Deviation 1 0 radians Increment 0 1 radians RF State Off Attenuator Coupling Off Pulse Option 1E6 State Off 1b 35 Operation Reference Function Instrument Preset Settings 1b 36 Function Parameter Setting Pager Encoding Option 1EP FORMAT FLEX POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON DATA RATE 1600 2 for FLEX FLEX TD 512 for POCSAG PAGER TYPE NUMERIC VECTOR TYPE STANDARD BLOCKING LENGTH 1BIT FUNCTION 00 MESSAGE NO 1 MESSAGE LENGTH 40 MODE SINGLE BURSTS 1 IMMEDIATE STOP OFF HEADER ON TERMINATOR ON PAGER CODE A0000001 for FLEX FLEX TD 0000000 for POCSAG ADDRESS TYPE SHORT ADDRESS1 0032769 ADDRESS2 0000000 CYCLE 0 0 PHASE A COLLAPSE CYCLE 4 REPEAT 0 INTERNAL AUDIO 1 GENERATOR STA
330. ster Queries the Operation Complete bit of the Standard Event Register RCL reg num seq num Recalls the Standard Event Status Register seq num is optional in that the last sequence number that was sent over GPIB is Stored and that number is used if no sequence number is used in the command The power up default sequence number is 0 Saves the Standard Event Status Register seq num is optional in that the last sequence number that was sent over GPIB is stored and that number is used if no sequence number is used in the command The power up default sequence number is 0 Enables the bits in the Status Byte that will cause a Service Request SAV reg num seq num SRE dec num data Queries the Service Request Enable Register Queries the Status Byte with the MSS bit GPIB Programming 2 11 GPIB Status Reporting 2 12 GPIB Programming The IEEE 488 2 standard provides a status byte for instrument status reporting This status byte may be accessed by using IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Status Commands The following figure shows the status reporting structure for instrument operation The following examples will be used to explain instrument operation status External Modulation Input Status m Reverse Power Protection Status m Unspecified Power Amplitude Entry Status m Pager Encoding Complete Status General
331. ster examples show you how to crate a sequence of registers delete a register from that sequence renumber the registers in the sequence and insert a new register in the sequence Up to 10 register sequences can be defined 0 through 9 A sequence can contain up to 100 registers 00 through 99 There are a total of 300 registers availablein the instrument Theregisters can be used in the sequences in any combination 9such as 10 sequences of 30 registers each or 3 sequences of 100 registers each as long as the total does not exceed 300 registers It is not possible to have all 10 sequences each contain 100 registers as that would be 1000 registers If Option is present there are a total of 70 registers available CG p FREQUENCY MODULATION AMPLITUDE 100 00000MHz FM 3 00kKz 136 0dBm SEQ 0 REG 01 kHz OFF RF OFF DATA AMPLITUDE MHz lt ne dBim A i ol RAM a FREQUENCY Ad SEQ 0 P FREQUENCY 300 SEQ 9 TEST2 drw 1a 7 Operation Examples Using the Memory Registers Saving Instrument Setting in Register Sequences In this ten step example you will use the memory keys to create a sequence containing three registers Each register will contain a different frequency setting Selecting the Sequence 1 Select sequence 0 I
332. sts 8648D Test Record Table 8 79 AM Accuracy Option 1E 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 130 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 79 AM Accuracy Option 1 2 Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 6 2 10 8 12 0 21 2 30 27 33 0 6 2 60 55 5 64 5 1 2 248 10 8 12 0 11 248 30 27 33 0 31 248 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 400 10 8 12 0 11 400 30 27 33 0 31 400 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 700 10 8 12 0 11 700 30 27 33 0 31 700 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 1000 10 8 12 0 11 1000 30 27 33 0 31 1000 60 55 5 64 5 0 61 8 131 Performance Tests 8648D Test Record Table 8 80 AM Distortion Performance Test Limits Amplitude Frequency Depth Uncertainty dBm MHz Lower Measured Upper 4 2 30 0 2 0 39 2 70 0 3 0 70 248 30 0 2 0 39 248 70 0 3 0 70 400 30 0 2 0 39
333. t but it is undefined for this specific device For example 7 is not defined for any device Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contained more than 255 digits excluding leader zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the device does not accept one in this position for the header Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for this device Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 1c 6 ooa oun ona ona Operation messages GPIB Command Messages Character data not allowed A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the device String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at
334. t to instrument communication system between the signal generator and up to 14 other instruments Any instrument having GPIB capability can be interfaced to the signal generator including non Agilent instruments that have GPIB IEEE 488 ANSI MC1 1 or IEC 625 capability these are common generic terms for GPIB all are electrically equivalent although IEC 625 uses a unique connector functions are programmable except the front panel power key knobs increment set key arrow keys frequency reference keys and the rear panel display contrast control The GPIB address for the signal generator is set to 19 at the factory It may be changed to any address from 00 through 30 by pressing and the desired two digit number The GPIB programming error messages are described in Chapter Ic Operation Messages Although many system controllers and programming software languages are compatible with this instrument all examples and references in this manual assume the use of a controller utilizing the HP BASIC programming language Most instrument settings may be queried via GPIB The data returned from the query will vary from a yes no 1 0 to the actual setting depending on the function See Table 2 1 For the majority of applications remotely programming the signal generator requires only basic programming knowledge and the command statements listed later in this chapter Developing programs for querying the
335. tal Operating temperature range Shock and vibration Leakage General Power Requirements Internal Diagnostics Storage Registers Weight 8648A 8648B C D Dimensions 0 to 50 C Meets MIL STD 28800E Type III Class 5 Conducted and radiated interference meets MIL STD 461B REO2 Part 2 and CISPR 11 Leakage is typically lt 1 uV nominally 0 1 uV with a 2 turn loop at lt 1001 MHz when measured with a resonant dipole antenna one inch from any surface except the rear panel with output level lt 0 dBm all inputs outputs properly terminated 90 to 264 V 48 to 440 Hz 170 VA maximum Automatically executes on instrument power up Assists user in locating instrument errors and locating faulty module 300 storage registers with sequence and register number displayed Up to 10 sequences are available with 30 registers each 7 kg 15 Ibs net 9 kg 20 lbs shipping 8 5 kg 19 Ibs net 11 kg 24 Ibs shipping 165H x 330W x 368D mm 6 5H x 13W x 14 6D in High power 8648B C D only Modulation generator Not available with Option 1EP High stability timebase Pulse modulation 8648B C D only Pager encoder signaling includes modulation generator functionality of Option 1E2 8648A only Not available with Option 1E2 Rack kit part number 08648 60001 Delete manual Extra manual includes service information Three year warranty Specifications 4 9 Translated Operating Manuals Option
336. tate 8 41 Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only The status should look like the following Inst Digital Demodulation Channels 2 Mode Meas from input Receiver RF 2650 MHz Format 2FSK Rate 1 2kHz Alpha 0 05 Meas filter Low Pass Normalize off Ref filter rect CIk Adj 0 sym Freq Span 20 kHz Center 155 MHz Bw Win Rbw 300 kHz Window flat top Time Puls srch off Syncsrch on Pts sym 20 Srch MS Result 10 sym Sync offset Osym Average Status off Num averages 10 Avg Off Type Repeat avg Overlap Fast avg NOTE The field indicated as may be any value or automatically set Configure the 8648 1 Set the frequency press FREQUENCY 155 MHz Set the amplitude press AMPLITUDE 0 dB m Set the FSK deviation press 4 8 kHz Turn the RF output on press RF ON OFF Set FORMAT to SERVICE rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob until FORMAT SERVICE appears 6 Set the FSK mode press NEXT and rotate the AMPLITUDE ENCODER knob until CALIBRATION FSK 1200 2 appears 7 Turn the encoder on press INCR SET START ST OP BW N 8 42 Performance Tests FSK Deviation Accuracy Performance Test Option 1EP Only Measure F SK Deviation A WN HG Set the 8648 frequencies FSK modes shown in Table 8 2 Set the 89441A symbol rate and frequency span as shown in the table Restart the measurement press Measure Restart
337. te 8648 Service Software Setup 10 The MS Windows program must be restarted before you can use the software Choose either to restart now or later 7 40 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Uninstalling the Software MS Windows 95 98 NT 1 2 3 Display the Control Panel program group by selecting Start Settings Control Panel Select the Add Remove Programs icon From the I nstall U ninstall tab in the Add Remove Programs Properties dialog box a Select 8648 Service Software then select the Add Remove button b Click yes to confirm deletion The program is removed but the path has not been removed Click the details button and note the path Click OK Display theMS Windows Explorer dialog box by selecting Start Programs Windows Explorer Select the path that you previously noted then select Delete from theFiles drop down menu to delete the path MS Windows version 3 x 1 From Program Manager click the program group Agilent Service Support was the software s default program group name 2 From the File drop down menu select Delete From File Manager select the subdirectory where the program is stored The program s default subdirectory was hp svc From the File drop down menu select Delete 7 41 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software Service Support Software Administration The following section shows you how to administer and run the
338. tely 170 dB of carrier isolation rfkeys drw 2 ATTN HOLD Press ATTN HOLD to hold the step attenuator at its current setting HOLD appears in the second line of the AMPLITUDE display when the attenuator hold function is on When the attenuator hold function is on amplitude adjustments are limited to the range of the instrument s vernier The vernier provides 0 1 dB per step adjustment resolution across its specified 10 dB range 1b 47 Operation Reference Function Vernier Ranges The following table 10 dB Specified Vernier Ranges provides the upper and lower limits of each vernier range The instrument s amplitude setting when you press the ATTN HOLD key determines which vernier range is used The vernier is allowed to over range and under range beyond the limits shown in the table when ATTN HOLD is selected However amplitude settings that exceed the limits may not provide output levels that are within the accuracy specifications of the instrument 10 dB Specified Vernier Ranges Range Upper and Lower Limits 1 10 0 dBm to 5 9 dBm 2 6 0 dBm to 15 9 dBm 3 16 0 dBm to 25 9 dBm 4 26 0 dBm to 35 9 dBm 5 36 0 dBm to 45 9 dBm 6 46 0 dBm to 55 9 dBm 7 56 0 dBm 65 9 dBm 8 66 0 dBm to 75 9 dBm 9 76 0 dBm to 85 9 dBm 10 86 0 dBm to 95 9 dBm 11 96 0 dBm to 105 9 dBm 12 106 0 dBm to 115 9 dBm 13 116 0 dBm to 127 0 dBm 14 127 1 dBm t
339. tered into the software database containing the serial numbers calibration dates GPIB address and traceability information for each individual component Only equipment which has been entered into system will be available for the test equi pment selection process during the test setup To add test equipment follow these instructions 1 In the DUT Selection dialog box highlight the instrument model that you will be testi ng 2 Enter the serial number of an instrument and theinstrument s GPIB address 7 42 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 3 Click OK 4 Cancel the Select Test Equipment and Tests window 5 In theFile drop down menu select Test Equipment Test Equipment 5 Device Types AUDIO ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLT METER FUNCTION GENERATOR Models 6 7 Equipment 3514415418 wk797a 6 In the Test Equipment dialog box select the Device Type 5 for the new equipment you are adding 7 Select the model of the device 6 8 Click Add 7 7 43 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software 9 The New Test Equipment window is displayed New Test Equipment Device Type Model Name AUDIO ANALYZER s HP8903B Serial Number HPIB Address 9 28 Cal Due Date Trace Number 11 Calibration Type Calibration Data wk798a Enter the following parameters and then click OK Serial Number GPIB Address Cal D
340. the motherboard has failed or the 15 V supply on the A2 power supply assembly has failed Check the output of both the 15 V and 12 V supplies 12 V power supply failure The 12 V diagnostic test point decreased by more than approximately 0 4 V Either the 12 V regulator on the A3 motherboard has failed or the 15 V supply on the A2 power supply assembly has failed Check the output of both the 15 V and 12 V supplies 38 V power supply failure The 438 V diagnostic test point decreased by more than approximately 2 2 V The 438 V supply on the A2 power supply has failed Check the 38 V supply ALC out of lock div het main band The ALC loop is out of lock in the indicated bands Either the A6 output has failed or the signal from the A5 synthesizer has failed or the A4 reference has failed If only the het band has failed it is possible that the A4 reference has failed Check the input to the A6 output from the A5 synthesizer and the A4 reference Synth out of lock div het main band The synthesis loop is out of lock in theindicated bands Either the A5 synthesizer has failed or the signal from the A4 reference has failed Check the input to the A5 synthesizer from the A4 reference 5 5 Service Error Messages 611 Description Cause What To Do 612 Description Cause What To Do 613 Description Cause What To Do 614 Description Cause What To Do 615 Description Cause What
341. the destination directory and the folder name settings To change these settings select the Back button until the appropriate window is displayed Start Copying Files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Destination Directory Name of Folder C HP_SVC HP8648 8648 Service Software E Cancel 7 39 Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software NOTE This is the last point that you can cancel the installation if you select Next the installation proceeds until the software is completely installed 8 Select Next to proceed A status gauge is displayed to show the progress of the installation When another of the installation disks is required you will be notified to insert the next in the series of disks Select the OK button when you have the required disk in place 9 The Setup Complete screen is displayed when the installation is complete You may choose to view the README file as well as the INFO file at this time You already read the INFO file when you started the installation Make your selection and select the Finish button Setup Complete 8648 Service Software Setup is almost complete Select the desired option below Click Finish to comple
342. the capcode and its related parameters such as address can be changed via GPIB without stopping encoding at all while testing a pager The new contents affected by this change will be transmitted normally from the third frame following the first frame since this GPIB command has been received For getting the exact information of the frame affected it is recommended to monitor the Paging Status Register Bit 0 Start of frame This indicates when the frame to which this GPIB command is sent starts GPIB command New contents New contents affected Frame Frame Frame No 1 No 2 No 3 Bit 0 4 i Paging Status Register The frequency value and amplitude value can be also changed via GPIB without stopping encoding and these values will be changed immediately after the GPIB commands for these changes are sent The message should not be changed during the repeat frames when testing a FLEX TD pager Option LEP only Using the buffer memory enables you to send the arbitrary messages message 0 up to 128 frames for FLEX FLEX TD or 128 batches for POCSAG The buffer memory consists of the 128 segments numbered from 0 to 127 Buffer Memory 0 1 2 127 Segment No GPIB Programming 2 41 Note 2 42 GPIB Programming The arbitrary messages can contain the following data FLEX FLEX TD Frame Information and Block data POCSAG Message Codeword dat
343. the register count will begin again at the first register saved in the sequence Refer to MEMORY in this section for further information about register sequences 1b 52 Operation Reference Function Memory Interface Accessory f Bu a 83301A MEMORY INTERFACE 750 y COPY sgo INSTRUMENT HAS oo 290 TN E t BUSY D A O E 2 7 POWER Ry je 7 _ O E 1 HP 83301A ME J s ot73c 1 POWER This light indicates that power is being supplied to the 83301A It should light when the cableis connected to the AUXILIARY INTERFACE connector on the rear panel of the instrument If it does not light refer to Chapter 5 Service 2 Copy Arrow Keys Making a Copy When the 83301A is connected to the instrument press the to copy all of the memory registers saved in theinstrument into the 83301A s memory After you have pressed an arrow key you must also press the SAV key on the instrument s front panel to begin the copy process Press the and SAV keys to copy the memory registers stored in the 83301A into the instrument s memory NOTE Copying memory into the instrument or the 83301A causes any existing memory registers in the receiving device to be erased It does not effect the memory in the sending device however
344. the test that is highlighted in the Selected Tests box The Selected Test Results box shows the pass fail status P F the lower limits LL the measured value Result the upper limits UL and the measured units for example KHz mV or dBm for each test point checked by the performance tests and some adjustments indicates values not displayed by the adjustments shows the results of the test that is currently running the pass fail status P F the lower limits LL the measured value Result the upper limits UL and the measured units for example kHz mV or dBm for each test point checked by the performance tests and some adjustments indicates values not displayed by the adjustments The following buttons are also displayed on the Agilent Service Support Software main window These buttons are used to control the testing Only the buttons that are appropriate are active For example if thetest is already in progress the Run button would not be active Run Stop Restart Next Test Rerun Abort starts running the highlighted test when initially starting the testing or continues running the current test at the next data point after the testing was stopped stops the test that is currently running The test stops after making the next measurements reruns a test that was running when the testing was stopped This restarts the test from the beginning quits running the current test and g
345. this point in parsing Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at this point in parsing Expression data not allowed A legal expression data was encountered but was not allowed by the device at this point in parsing 1c 7 Operation messages GPIB Execution Errors NNN GPIB Execution Errors Settings Conflict Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state see 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 Data out of range Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the device see iEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 Illegal parameter Value Indicates that a parameter is not correct Check to make sure that the GPI B commands are correctly spelled Hardware Missing pulse Mod not allowed no hardware Indicates that the 8648B C is not fitted with the pulse modulator Option 1E 6 1c 8 Operation messages GPIB Device Specific Errors GPIB Device Specific Errors Self test failed 3 3 0 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code 0 indicates that thereis no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 1c 9 Operation messages GPIB Query Errors GPIB Query Errors
346. till available When you save a register it is assigned to the currently selected sequence The number of the selected sequence appears in the second line of the FREQUENCY display You can only recall a register when the sequence it is assigned to is selected Refer to 4 SEQ for further information about register sequences NOTE The instrument does not have a copy function for saving registers from one sequence to another 2 REG Press REG and a register number 00 through 99 to recall the operating settings saved in that register The number of the last register recalled appears in the display along with the number of the currently selected sequence You can only recall registers from the currently selected sequence To recall a register from another sequence you must first select the sequence using the SEQ key f you recall a register remotely in 8656 57 compatible language and nothing has been saved in that register the instrument preset settings will be restored 1b 40 Operation Reference Function 3 Register Recall Arrows The recall ft and keys can be used to select sequences or recall registers The last key pressed SEQ or REG determines which field is affected by the arrow keys Refer to 4 SEQ for further information about register sequences zero d memkey1 drw 4 SEQ Press SEQ and a sequenc
347. tions on instruments with Option Figure 1b 1 8648A Option 1EP Signal Generator 8648A 100kHz 1000MHz SIGNAL GENERATOR Agilent FREQUENCY MEE MODULATION NENNEN P L TUDE FORMAT FLEX POLARITY NORMAL FILTER ON e FUNCTION DATA ERN AMPLITUDE ENCODER START STOP A B C ENTER pm INCR MHz Frequency 7 8 9 dB m lt RM PREV D E F M f N AMPLITUDE AN kHz N N De n gt G H 1 Eg el a 2 81 ENCODER J K SHIFT A Z rad REF Se 0 EA NG PULSE N ORY AA SOURCE RF OUTPUT MOD INT EXT MOD A MAX REV PWR ON OFF 400 Hz AC INPUT OUTPUT 50 W 25 VDC X Y Z 1kHz INT EXT f EXT 1kHz DC FREQUENCY 1 PK 500 Q For numeric messages the following keys are assigned for the special characters in addition to the standard numeric keys 0 to 9 Front Character B2 5 Spare 110 110 U U 1101111 Space Space 1 1 0 0 Hyphen 1 110 1 111110 111111 16 6 Operation Reference Function EJ CA 55550515 C3 OOOO Q 0 funckeys drw FREQUE N
348. to 136 dBm DATA MOD REF A Dey a A3 MOTHERBOARD A3J8 7 T9 a3u11 3 412V CARRIER D 5V F1 NEN MODULATION DISTRIBUTION E Is osi E CARR Bes pon 7 4 VPK FOR REF SS A14 MODULATION 400Ha 100 CAL reve GENERATOR OPTION 200 _fiKAZN 12 BIT Dac M EEERTOB ROM sENSE 97 y lt 1 CARRIER me FRONT PANEL A30 PAGER ENCODER mit e tvt PT e MOD 2048 4 INPUT OUTPUT OPTION 1E2 P Ii lt MOD x x 1000MHz ASIO See detailed Block Diagrams 031 3 a gt CLOCK on the next page POST REGHLATOR CLOCK aja A6 S SS DATA i o 48V REG io EIE 5 INT A3J6 EN INT ale A3J29 3 6 ee iid 5V REG 4 5V 1 ES y N 15V 15 ae F A2 lt 8 amp 12 REG 12V REG A KESIC 5V F1 CAL E E ROM POWER cones Le 11 7 3 4 82 a 12V REG 12V REG Diognostics w y ee LL SUPPLY Nh dd on 58V 38V OS OUT OF LOCK RF 5V F1 n RR oF 4 5 10 ES pu 12V REG gt 1 e 5v 5V 12V_ REG L lo L lt 2 424V REG 424V 83300A A3J5 CONTROLLER Bis REDE 1 FRONT PANEL _pet 1300 4 RPG LS GND RX 22 LL 2 S TX VAs Z 52 T asy RS232 GND Fi fF B m QUAD 1 lt 5 QX C 4 DECODE CLOCK B CPU
349. tortion Residual FM Harmonics Spurious DC FM Frequeng Error A6 Output AM Level AM Level FE Predistortion and Detector Offset Prelevel Output Level HF Power Level Accuracy LF Output L evel HF Power Level Accuracy AM Accuracy AM Distortion Harmonics Spurious RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A9Filtered Line Module None Power on Self Test A10 Frequency E xtension AM Level AM Accuracy AM Level FE AM Distortion Harmonics Predistortion and Detector Offset Spurious Prelevel Output Level FE HF Power Level Accuracy LF Output L evel LF Power Level Accuracy RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A11 Attenuator HF Power Level Accuracy LF Power Level Accuracy RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A12 Reverse Power Protection HF Power Level Accuracy LF Power Level Accuracy RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A13 Pulse Modulator Module 1E 6 HF Power Level Accuracy LF Power Level Accuracy RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Pulse Modulation On Off Ratio Pulse Modulation Rise Time 5 7 Service Post Repair Table 5 3 Adjustments and Performance Tests Required after Repair or Replacement of an 8648B C D Assembly Assembly A14 Modulation Generator 91E 2 Adjustments Audio Generator Performance Tests FM AM BlFan None Power on Self Test
350. tory generated calibration data that is specific to the assembl y 5 9 Theory of Operation A5 Sig Gen Synth A5 Sig Gen Synth The synthesizer assembly uses a 200 kHz reference signal from the A4 reference assembl y and generates a 500 to 1000 MHz signal using a divide by n phase locked loop VCO Frequency and phase modulation are also done in the synthesizer assembly The frequency is modulated both inside and outside of the loop bandwidth FM outside of the loop bandwidth is summed with the integrator error voltage and applied directly tothe VCO FM within the loop bandwidth and phase modulation signals are applied to a phase modulator along with the signal from the divide by n circuitry and then applied to the phase detector The synthesizer assembly contains a calibration ROM that contains factory generated calibration data that is specific to the assembly 5a 10 Theory of Operation A6 Output 8648A A6 Output 8648A The output assembly takes the 500 to 1000 MHz signal from the A5 assembly and the 1 GHz LO signal from the A4 assembly to generate the output frequency range of 0 1 to 1000 MHz in three bands The output assembly also handles the filtering AM and amplitude leveling functions Thethree frequency bands range from 0 1 to 249 MHz 249 to 501 MHz and 501 to 1000 MHz TheO 1to 250 MHz band is heterodyned from the 1 GHz LO signal and the 500 to 1000 MHz main band signal The 250 to 500 MHz signal is derived by d
351. ude exceeds ATTN HOLD limits This message is displayed then ATTN HOLD is on and the amplitude is set to a level that exceeds the vernier range limits by greater than 5 dBm Exceeding the 10 dB vernier range of an attenuator hold setting causes the output level accuracy to degrade For information about the vernier ranges and limits refer to RF Output in Chapter 1b Operation Reference DCFM calibration in progress 7 This message is displayed when FM is selected and EXT DC is also selected The 0 instrument will perform a dc FM calibration and this message is displayed during the calibration Press SAV to copy memory FROM 8647 8 This message is displayed when the key is pressed 83301A memory Interface connected to the instrument Press the SAV key to copy the memory registers saved in the instrument into the memory interface 1c 3 Operation messages Front Panel Operation Messages 0 1 0 2 2 ONO ANO 0 2 5 0 Copying registers from 8647 8 This message is displayed while the memory registers are being copied from the instrument to the 83301A Memory Interface Press SAV to copy memory TO 8647 8 This message is displayed when key is pressed on 83301A Memory Interface connected to the instrument Press the SAV key to copy memory registers that had been saved in the memory interface into the instrument Copying registers to 8647 8 This message is displayed wh
352. ue Date Trace Number Calibration Type 7 44 of the new equipment 8 of the new equipment 9 This address must bein the range of 0 through 31 and it should not conflict with any other instrument address already present in the test setup Note The power sensor must be assigned GPIB address 1 negative 1 the projected calibration due date of the new equipment 10 the calibration tracking number 11 This is the last required item optional is used only when special calibration data is associated with the device being added and only as a function setup by the factory for equipment requiring specific calibration data 14 The only devices currently requiring this feature are power sensors Adjustments Agilent Service Support Software The following table is an example of the calibration information that is required to ensure accuracy to measurements using the power sensor This window is accessed for data entry by selecting the words CAL DATA from the Calibration Type field in the Edit or New Test Equipment window Example Calibration Data Frequency Calibration MHz Factor 0 100 97 6 03000 98 9 1 0 99 1 3 0 99 4 NOTE The serial number of the test equipment added will be displayed in the Equipment field of the Test Equipment dialog box 13 Removing Test Equipment Removal of test equi pment is accomplished using the Test Equipment dialog box Test Equipment B Device
353. uipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 26 Adjustments Manual Adjustments Audio Generator Options 1 2 and Only Description This program generates the offset and gain calibration values for the sinewave source on the A14 modulation generator board Required Test Equipment DVM Procedure Figure 7 25 DCF M Test Setup 8648 UNDER TEST DIGITAL MULTIMETER 0000000 Mod Input Output an611a2d 1 Connect the equipment as shown above 2 Preset all of the equipment 3 Follow the instructions as they are displayed on the PC 7 27 Adjustments Manual Adjustments HF Power Level Accuracy All 8648A B C D Description This is the power level accuracy adjustment for the power range of 0 dBm to 130 dBm The first step in this adjustment is to test the noise floor level to ensure at least 20 dB separation between the lowest measured power level and the spectrum analyzer noise floor If the noise floor does not allow for 20 dB of separation at 30 dBm then it is checked at 20 dBm If there is not 20 dB of separation at 120 dBm the 130 dBm correction factors will be set to the 120 dBm values Required Test Equipment Power meter Power Sensor Spectrum Analyzer Low Frequency Amplifier High Frequency Amplifier 6 dB Attenuator Procedure Figure 7 26 HF Power Level Accuracy Test Setup for P
354. umed Indicates that a RAD termination is required in the command statement If no termination is specified then RAD is assumed Indicates that a DB DBM DBUV UV MV UVEMF or DBUVEMF termination is ampl term required in the command statement If no termination is specified then DBM is assumed command Bracketed commands are optional SCPI assumes the optional command is present param param Parameters separated by indicate that either parameter is acceptable param param Parameters separated by indicate that multiple parameters are allowed command command Commands enclosed in the blanket indicate one of these codes can be selected string Indicates a string parameter that contains ASCII character string must begin with a double quote and end with a double quote mark You can include the quotation marks as part of the string by typing it twice without any characters in between the quotation marks Or you can avoid typing the quotation marks twice by using a single quotation mark 2 20 GPIB Programming ABORt Subsystem Option 1EP Only Note AM Subsystem ABORt This command stops pager encoding Pager encoder programming commands are valid only for instruments with Option 1EP SOURce AM DEPTh DEPTh lt NRf gt lt term gt Sets AM Depth in percent RST value is
355. uracy Performance TesE occisos khao eek barnes se XR cp orca 8 16 Connect the Test Equipment usus Ru ERA HE yew agen WEGE 8 16 Configure the Measuring Receiver 8 16 ContiqurethegO4B iliauso ska ERR RIEGO ERK 8 16 Measure iori cand dike auda drea Lae papa b 8 16 TSERE essei RERO REG ER Pada hanes RT RR KY DERE RR E TENE RE RE HES 8 16 AM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E2 Only 8 17 Connect the Test oh I RR reas bees 8 17 Configure the Measuring 8 17 Confiquretne 8648 0ccieyeciek sek ERROR LEGERE ed EA ke ORC RR WC Peed ewes EER 8 17 Se Edd d ud e Ase Meee eae ee 8 17 Test Record nes sica E Teh RR ARX TREES P ERE 8 18 AM Distortion Performance Test d ba PR 8 19 Connect the Test Eguipienit lisse igs des ee ERR RE ERR RR REA RR DEES 8 19 Configure the Measuring 8 19 Ceontigqurethe Audio Analyzer cius rien is eee E ESERPERE ERAT ages 8 19 xiv Contents Configure the 8646 cioe sua gi ci ERR Gs HE
356. urce and a variable frequency internal source with four different waveform selections The four modulation waveforms are sine triangle square and sawtooth or ramp 1 5 Operation Quick Overview 1 6 la Operation Examples This section contains operating examples to help you learn how to operate the signal generator These examples can be performed without any additional equipment The pager testing example can only be performed if Option 1EP is present If this is the first time you have operated this instrument perform each of the following examples for a quick introduction to general operation After you have completed the examples try operating the instrument s remaining functions on your own If you have trouble or want additional information on a function refer to Chapter 1b Operation Reference If a message is displayed that you do not understand refer to Chapter 1c Operation M essages Theitem numbers of the following operation examples correspond to the numbers called out on drawing of the instrument front panel Setting the RF Output Signal Incrementing or Decrementing the RF Output Signal Using the Memory Registers Offsetting the RF Output from a Reference Holding the Output Attenuator Range Setting a User Selectable Modulated Frequency and Waveform Option 1E2 or Only 7 Signaling a Numeric Type FLEX Pager Option 1EP Only nu A WN 1a 1 Operation Examples
357. utput on and off press RF ON OFF HOLD is displayed when the step attenuator is held at its current range setting To toggle the attenuator hold function on and off press ATTN HOLD Another menu is displayed as follows for completing the Encoding M ode c Fue CJ It Jt ie FREQUENCY MODULATION au AMPLITUDE CIC 3 2 02 Cf J IMMEDIATE STOP OFF Hin CON HEADER ON TERMINATOR ON ojoo J C3 CJ CJ joacgjeaooc3o QO IMMEDIATE STOP terminates pager signaling as follows when stop event occurs ON Terminates pager signaling immediately OFF Default setting Terminates pager signaling just before the next instance the pager is on If TERMINATOR is Set to ON the pager encoder generates the re synchronization pattern in the frame that was supposed to contain the message HEADER sets whether the idle frame signal is output in the frame before the first message ON Default setting Outputs the idle frame signal OFF Does not output the idle frame signal 1b 12 Operation Reference Function TERMINATOR sets whether the re synchronization pattern is output after the last message The collapse cycle will determine in which frame the re synchronization pattern appears after the INCR SET START STOP key is pressed to stop or at the end of
358. vel Accuracy A6 Output AM Level and Distortion AM Accuracy Detector Offset AM Distortion 4 Harmonics Output Level Spurious AM Modulator RF Level Accuracy HF Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A7 Attenuator RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A9Filtered Line Module None Power on Self Test A14 Modulation Generator Audio FM AM A30 Pager Encoder Audio Generator 4 Pager Encoder Timebase Calibration HF Power Level Accuracy d FSK Deviation Filter Path d RF level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Pager Encoder Timebase Accuracy FSK Deviation AccuracyP BlFan None Power on Self Test S1 Line Switch None RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Option 1E5 only Option 1E2 only Option 1EP only eoo Adjustment or performance test is automated Service Post Repair Table 5 3 Adjustments and Performance Tests Required after Repair or Replacement of an 8648B C D Assembly Assembly Adjustments Performance Tests 1 Front Panel None RF Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy A2 Power Supply All All A3 Motherboard Assembly All All A3A1 memory Board None Power on Self Test A3BT1 Battery DC FM2 DC FM Frequengy Error A4 Reference Time Base DAC Residual FM Internal Timebase Aging Rate A5 Sig Gen Synth DC FM FM Accuracy FM Distortion Phase M odulation Dis
359. vel Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Table 9 10 8648C 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits kHz Power Uncertainty Level Lower Measured Upper dB dBm 10 596 841 0 21 0 188 265 0 21 10 59 84 021 20 19 27 0 21 30 6 0 8 0 0 21 40 1 9 2 7 0 21 50 0 566 0 894 0 25 60 0 179 0 283 0 25 70 0 055 0 094 0 39 Table 9 11 8648D 9 kHz RF Level Accuracy Supplemental Verification Test Limits kHz Power Uncertainty Level Lower Measured Upper dB dBm 10 596 841 0 21 0 188 265 0 21 10 59 84 021 20 19 27 0 21 30 6 0 8 0 0 21 40 1 9 2 7 0 21 50 0 566 0 894 0 25 60 0 179 0 283 0 25 70 0 055 0 094 0 39 9 10 Index A Al theory of operation 5a 5 10 theory of operation 5 14 All theory of operation 5a 15 12 theory of operation 5 16 13 theory of operation 5 17 A2 theory of operation 5a 7 A3 theory of operation 5a 8 A4 theory of operation 5a 9 A5 theory of operation 5a 10 A6 theory of operation 5a 11 5a 12 7 theory of operation 5a 13 ac power connection 3 3 AC symbol vi adjustment AM level 7 12 AM level FE 7 16 AM modulator 7 21 audio generator 7 27 DCFM 7 26 detector offset 7 14 filter path 7 35 FSK deviation 7 34 HF power level accuracy 7 28 LF output level 7 31 LF power level accuracy 7 32 motherboard audio path 7
360. your registers in up to ten different sequences The number of the currently selected sequence and the last register selected are always displayed in the lower left corner of the display to help you keep track of where you arein your testing process If Option is present the sequence and register are not displayed on any pager encoding menu The memory register examples provided in Chapter 1a Operation E xamples show you how to create a sequence and how to delete or add registers in your sequence 1 4 Operation Quick Overview 7 Modulation Source Press MOD ON OFF toturn on or off the modulation source Press INT 400 kHz or INT 1 kHz to select one of the internal source tones for modulating the RF output signal These tones are also available as an output signal at the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port when they are selected Press EXT AC or EXT DC to ac or dc couple an external audio source via the MOD INPUT OUTPUT port Press 1kHz EXT DC to frequency modulate the RF signal with the internal 1 kHz tone and an external source at the same time Additional internal plus external modulation capabilities are available for GPIB operation 1kHz EXT DC will also amplitude or phase modulate the RF signal with the internal 1 kHz tone but it will not be dc coupled If Option 1EP is present the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY key or if Option 1E2 is present the INT 1kHz FREQUENCY WAVEF ORM key scrolls between five states a fixed 1 kHz internal so
361. z MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 8 74 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 24 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1 2 Part 1 Limits kHz Frequency Deviation Uncertainty MHz kHz Lower Measured Upper Hz 0 25 5 4 820 5 180 100 0 25 10 9 670 10 330 200 100 10 9 670 10 330 100 100 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 5 4 820 5 180 50 250 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 10 9 670 10 330 100 375 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 5 4 820 5 180 50 500 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 10 9 670 10 330 100 756 25 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 5 4 820 5 180 50 1000 10 9 670 10 330 100 Table 8 25 FM Accuracy Performance Test Option 1E 2 Part 2 Limits kHz RF LO Input Frequency Frequency Frequency Deviation Lower Measured Upper Uncertainty 8648B 8663A 8902A kHz Hz MHz MHz MHz 1500 1501 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 1500 1501 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 2000 2001 5 700 5 4 790 5 210 50 2000 2001 5 700 10 9 640 10 360 100 8 75 Performance Tests 8648B Test Record Table 8 26 FM Distortion Performance Test Part 1 Limits Frequency Deviation Uncertainty M

8648A/B/C/D Signal Generator Operation and Service Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents